Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 560

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference


Release: 16.0 Document Revision: 16.14

www.nortel.com

411-9001-124 .

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Release: 16.0 Publication: 411-9001-124 Document status: Standard Document release date: 28 May 2008 Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved.

Sourced in Canada, France, and the United States of America. LEGAL NOTICE While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice. Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, S2000, and S8000 are trademarks of Nortel Networks. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Contents
New in this release
PM1270 - TDMA based counters (15405) 34 Interference Matrix Processing and Mediation (16411) 34 MS location E911 (20365) 34 Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure (22810) 34 Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS (22859) 35 BSS Packet Flow Context (22860) 35 EGPRS Uplink Incremental Redundancy (24498) 36 Edge one phase access (24620) 36 BSC 3000 Support of BTS SW BCKGRND DWNLDG (25316) 36 PCUSN : MSA32 (single slot) board introduction (E1 & T1) (26742) 37 Optimized Agprs cell allocation (26828, 26953) 37 EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS (26954) 37 GPRS/EDGE TDMA configuration improvements (27731) 37 BTS/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement for IN and TCU (29718) 37 MSS7480 platform ROHS compliance (29915) 37 Tx power offset for signaling channels (30293) 38 Repeated Downlink FACCH (30296) 38 PCUSN MSA32 E1 board introduction (30377) 38 Differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40 Watts (30713) 38 BTS18000 4-way Tx coupler (H4) introduction (32300) 38 BTS18000 HPRM3T differentiation (33657) 39 Frequency independent high speed enhancements (34756) 39

33

Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction


1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters 1.2 Different types of configuration parameters 49 1.3 Description of dictionary entries 50 1.3.1 Header line 50 1.3.2 Main body of entries 51 43

41 43

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


A 53 abisSpy Class 3 53 absoluteRFChannelNo Class 2 53 access time end 54 access time start 55 accessClassCongestion Class 3 55 accessibilityState 55 acknowledged by 55 acknowledgment time 56 activationObject 56 activationObject 56 active (passive) chain disk state 56 active (passive) chain Dmux state 57 active (passive) chain ECI board state 57 active (passive) chain REM link state 57 active (passive) chain Sic board state 57 active (passive) chain sic channels state 58 active (passive) chain sls board state 58 active (passive) chain state 58 active (passive) chain switching capacity 58 active (passive) chain tcu accessibility 59 active (passive) chain ute board state 59 active rem link 59 activeChain 59 additional supervised PCM 0 Class 2 60 additional supervised PCM 1 Class 2 61 additional supervised PCM 2 Class 2 61 additional supervised PCM 3 Class 2 62 additional supervised PCM 4 Class 2 63 additional supervised PCM 5 Class 2 63 additional unmasked users alarms Class 2 64 addresses 65 adjacent cell umbrella ref Class 3 65 adjacentCellHandOver 66 adjacentCellHandOverId 66 adjacentCellReselection 67 adjacentCellReselectionId 67 administrativeState 68 administrativeState 68 administrativeState 68 administrativeState 69 administrativeState 69
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

53

5 administrativeState 71 administrativeState 72 administrativeState 73 administrativeState 73 administrativeState 73 administrativeState 74 administrativeState 74 administrativeState 74 administrativeState 74 administrativeState 75 administrativeState 75 administrativeState 75 administrativeState 75 administrativeState 76 administrativeState 76 administrativeState 76 administrativeState 76 administrativeState 77 administrativeState 77 administrativeState 77 administrativeState 77 administrativeState 78 administrativeState 78 administrativeState 79 administrativeState 80 administrativeState 80 administrativeState 81 agprsFilterCoefficient Class 3 81 agprsHysteresis Class 3 82 agprsThreshold Class 3 82 agprsTsSharingProtection Class 2 82 agpsTimer Class 3 83 aLAIntState 83 alarm criteria 83 alarm criteria 84 alarm number 84 alarm severity 85 alarm state 85 alarmDuration 85 alarmListConverter 85 alarmListFan 85 alarmListFanBoard 86 alarmListVCOTension 86 alarmPriority 86
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

6 algoId class 2 87 algorithm Used Class 2 87 allocationState 88 allocPriorityTable Class 3 88 allocPriorityThreshold Class 3 89 allocPriorityTimers Class 3 89 allocWaitThreshold Class 3 90 allOtherCasesPriority Class 3 90 amrAdaptationSet Class 3 90 amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL Class 3 91 amrDirectAllocIntRxLevUL Class 3 91 amrDirectAllocRxLevDL Class 3 92 amrDirectAllocRxLevUL Class 3 92 amrDlFrAdaptationSet class 3 92 amrDlHrAdaptationSet class 3 93 amrFRIntercellCodecMode Class 3 93 amrFRIntracellCodecMode Class 3 93 amrHRIntercellCodecMode Class 3 94 amrHRToFRIntraCodecMode Class 3 94 amriRxLevDLH Class 3 95 amriRxLevULH Class 3 95 amrReserved1 95 amrReserved2 Class 3 96 amrUlFrAdaptationSet class 3 96 amrUlHrAdaptationSet class 3 97 answerPagingPriority Class 3 97 architecture 97 assignRequestPriority Class 3 98 associatedInterface Class 0 98 associatedLog 99 associatedTMUPosition 99 aterLapd 99 atmRm 100 atmRmId 100 attenuation Class 2 100 auditBdaStatus 100 auditState 101 authorised user 101 availabilityStatus 101 availabilityStatus 102 availabilityStatus 102 availabilityStatus 102 availabilityStatus 103 availabilityStatus 103
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

7 availabilityStatus 103 availabilityStatus 103 availabilityStatus 104 available synchronization sources 104 averagingPeriod Class 2 104 B 105 backup manager addresses 105 backupServer 105 baseColourCode Class 3 105 baseColourCode Class 2 105 batteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2 106 bCCHFrequency Class 3 106 bCCHFrequency Class 3 108 bCCHFrequency Class 2 109 bckgDLLayer3WindowSize Class 3 110 bdaNewBscState 110 bdaSelected 111 bdaState 112 bdaVersionBuild 112 bdaVersionNumber 113 beacBatteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2 113 beginning date 113 beginSearchTime 114 beginSearchTime 114 beginSearchTime 115 beginSearchTime 115 beginSearchTime 115 bEPPeriod Class 3 116 biZonePowerOffset Class 3 116 biZonePowerOffset Class 3 117 bsc2GEqpt 117 bsc2GEqptId 117 bsc3GEqpt 117 bsc3GEqptId 118 bsc 118 bsc 119 bsc equipment name 119 bscList 120 bsc model 121 bscNumber 121 bscAlarmMask Class 3 121 bscArchitecture Class 0 122 bscCapacityReduction Class 3 122 bscChainId 122
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

8 bscCounterList 123 bscDateTime 123 bscGprsActivation Class 3 123 bscHighSwitchingCapacity Class 3 124 bscHopReconfUse Class 1 124 bscIPFirstAdr Class 2 124 bscIPSecondAdr Class 2 125 bscList 126 bscLog 126 bscLogId 126 bscMdInterface 126 bscMdInterfaceRef 127 bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber 127 bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 127 bscName 128 bscPcuPcmRefList Class 2 128 bscQueueingOption Class 1 129 bscRefList 129 bscReset 130 bscSitePcmList Class 2 130 bscTimeSlot 131 bscType Class 0 131 bscUsedAdr 132 bsCvMax Class 3 132 bscX25PrefAdr Class 2 132 bscX25SecAdr Class 2 133 bscX25UsedAdr 133 bsPowerControl Class 3 134 bssMapT1 Class 1 134 bssMapT4 Class 1 134 bssMapT7 Class 1 135 bssMapT8 Class 1 135 bssMapT12 Class 1 135 bssMapT13 Class 1 136 bssMapT19 Class 1 136 bssMapT20 Class 1 136 bssMapTchoke Class 1 137 bssSccpConnEst Class 1 137 bssSccpInactRx Class 1 137 bssSccpInactTx Class 1 138 bssSccpRelease Class 1 138 bssSccpSubSysTest Class 1 139 bsTxPwrMax Class 3 139 bts 141
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

9 bts 142 bts equipment name 143 bts list 144 btsSMSynchroMode Class 2 144 bts time between HO configuration Class 3 145 btsDescription 145 btsHopReconfRestart Class 2 145 btsIsHopping Class 2 146 btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 147 btsReserved3 Class 3 147 btsReserved4 Class 3 147 btsSensitivity Class 3 147 btsSensitivityInnerZone Class 3 148 btsSiteManager 148 btsSiteManager 149 btsSiteManager model 150 btsSiteManagerList Class 2 150 btsThresholdHopReconf Class 2 151 btsWithCavity Class 2 151 buildState 152 C 152 callClearing Class 3 152 callDropActivation class 3 153 callPathObservationArea Class 2 153 callPathTrace 154 callPathTraceType Class 2 154 callReestablishment Class 3 155 callReestablishmentPriority Class 3 155 capacityAlarmThreshold 155 capacityTimeRejection Class 3 156 cause 156 cCCHGprsAtBtsLevel Class 3 157 cc 157 ccId 157 cellAllocation Class 2 158 cellBarQualify Class 3 159 cellBarred Class 3 159 cellDeletionCount Class 3 160 cellDtxDownLink Class 3 160 cellIdentity Class 3 160 cellIdentity Class 3 161 cellIdentity Class 2 161 cellName 161 cellPagingState 162
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

10 cellReselectHysteresis Class 3 163 cellReselectOffset Class 3 164 cellReselInd Class 3 164 cellThreshold Class 2 165 cellType Class 3 165 cellType Class 3 165 cemId 166 chain 166 chain 166 chain 166 chainId 167 chainId 167 chainId 167 channel 168 channel state 168 channelReleaseOnAbisFailure 169 channelType Class 2 170 chanState 173 chosenChannelAsscomp Class 1 174 chosenChannelCompL3Info Class 1 174 chosenChannelHoPerf Class 1 175 chosenChannelHoReq Class 1 175 cic Class 0 175 circuitGroupBlock Class 1 176 circularFileId 177 circularFileState 177 clear time 177 cleared by 178 clearing cause 178 cn 178 control Node Id 178 coderPoolConfiguration Class 2 for a BSC 12000HC V12, a BSC 12000HC V15 and a BSC 3000 V15, and class 3 for a BSC 3000 V14 179 coderPoolList 179 codingScheme Class 2 180 command classes 180 command line 180 command number 181 commandFile 181 commandFile 181 comment 182 comment 182 comments 182 computeSyntheticCounters 182
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

11 concentAlgoExtMsRange Class 3 183 concentAlgoExtRxLev Class 3 183 concentAlgoIntMsRange Class 3 184 concentAlgoIntRxLev Class 3 184 concentric cell Class 2 185 condition 186 configRef Class 3 187 configRefList 188 configurationType 188 confusion Class 1 188 counter list 189 counter list filename 189 counterId 189 counters 189 counters 189 cpueNumber Class 0 190 cpueOccurrence 190 cRC Class 0 191 cRC Class 2 191 creator 192 criteriaEventType 192 cSS7LocalSubSystemNumber Class 0 192 cSS7RemoteSubSystemNumber Class 0 193 CTU cable 193 current log size 193 current synchronization mode 194 currentChannelHorqd Class 1 194 cypherModeReject Class 1 194 D 195 dARPPh1Priority class 2 195 data mode 14.4 kbit/s Class 2 195 data non transparent mode Class 3 195 data non transparent mode Class 3 196 data transparent mode Class 3 196 data transparent mode Class 3 197 data14-4OnNoHoppingTs Class 3 197 date 197 date 197 date 198 date 198 date 198 day intervention 198 day to be purged 199 dDTIIntState 199
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

12 degradedCause 199 degradedCause 199 delayBetweenRetrans Class 2 200 delivery 200 deltaUtc 202 detectionFunction 202 directedRetry Class 3 202 directedRetryModeUsed Class 3 202 directedRetryPrio Class 3 203 directory 203 display Data Configuration 204 display Data Information 204 distHreqt Class 3 204 distributionActivation Class 3 204 distributionDuration Class 3 205 distributionTime Class 3 205 distributionQualityThreshold Class 3 206 distWtsList Class 3 207 diversity Class 2 208 dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 208 dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 208 dlMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 208 dlMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 209 dlMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3 209 dlMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3 209 dlMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3 210 dlMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3 210 drxTimerMax Class 3 210 dtxMode Class 3 211 duplex link state 211 duration 212 dwAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime) 212 dynamicAgprsAllowed Class 2 212 E 213 early classmark sending Class 3 213 edgeDataServiceType Class 2 213 edgeFavor Class 3 213 eDGEMixity Class 3 213 efd 214 efdType 214 egprsIrULActivation Class 3 215 egprsServices Class 3 215 emergencyCallPriority Class 3 216 emergencyCallRestricted Class 3 216
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

13 emergencyThreshold Class 3 217 eMLPPThreshold Class 3 217 enableRepeatedFacchFr Class 2 217 encrypAlgoAsscomp Class 1 218 encrypAlgoCiphModComp Class 1 218 encrypAlgoHoperf Class 1 218 encrypAlgoHoreq Class 1 219 encryptionAlgorSupported Class 0 219 encryptionAlgorSupported Class 1 219 end date 220 end date 220 end of probative Phase Type 220 end time 221 end time 221 endAlarmFilter 221 endAlarmThreshold 222 endAlarmThreshold 222 endCounterThreshold 223 endSearchTime 223 endSearchTime 223 endSearchTime 224 endSearchTime 224 endSearchTime 225 endSessionCriteriaDuration 225 endSessionCriteriaType 225 enhancedTRAUFrameIndication 226 enhCellTieringConfiguration 226 equipment identity 228 equipment processor number 228 error concealment unit Class 2 228 errorCorrectionMethod Class 3 229 estimatedSiteLoad Class 3 229 exclusive interval of codano 229 exclusive list of codano 230 executableSoftware 230 executableSoftwareId 230 executableSoftwareName 230 extCommsInt 231 extended cell Class 2 231 extendedTimingAdvanceWindow 232 external alarm configuration Class 2 232 external battery cabinet Class 2 234 externalTime 234 extUtbfNoData Class 3 235
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

14 F 235 facchPowerOffset Class 2 235 Family 235 faultNumber 238 fERThreshold1 Class 3 238 fERThreshold2 Class 3 239 fERThreshold3 Class 3 239 fERThreshold4 Class 3 240 fhsRef Class 2 240 filteredTrafficCoefficient Class 3 241 floor 241 flowControlMaxDelay 241 flowControlMaxRate 242 fnOffset class 2 242 forced handover algo Class 3 242 frAmrPriority Class 2 243 frequencyHoppingSystem 243 frPowerControlTargetMode Class 3 244 frPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3 244 fullDlKa Class 3 244 G 245 geographical coordinates 245 geographical coordinates 246 gprsAvgParam Class 3 246 gprsCellActivation Class 3 246 gprsNetworkModeOperation Class 3 247 gprsPcuCrossConnectList Class 2 247 gprsPcuLockExtendedConf Class 2 248 gprsPermittedAccess Class 3 248 gprsPreemption Class 3 248 gprsPreemptionProtection Class 3 249 gprsPriority Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) gprsState 249 gprsState 249 gprsTimerWaitPUAM Class 3 250 gprsTimerWaitRLC Class 3 250 gsmToUmtsReselection Class 3 251 H 252 handOver from signalling channel Class 3 252 handOverControl 253 hardware configuration Class 2 253 hardwareRef Class 2 255 hardwareRef Class 2 255 hardwareRef Class 2 255
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

249

15 hexa text 255 highSpeedUplinkDistortionRemoval 256 hoMargin Class 3 256 hoMarginAMR Class 3 256 hoMarginBeg Class 3 256 hoMarginDist Class 3 257 hoMarginRxLev Class 3 257 hoMarginRxQual Class 3 257 hoMarginTiering Class 3 258 hoMarginTrafficOffset Class 3 258 hoPingpongCombination Class 3 258 hoPingpongTimeRejection Class 3 260 hoppingSequenceNumber Class 2 260 hoSecondBestCellConfiguration Class 3 261 hoTraffic Class 3 261 hoTraffic Class 3 261 hrAmrPriority Class 2 262 hrCellLoadEnd Class 3 262 hrCellLoadStart Class 3 263 hrPowerControlTargetMode Class 3 263 hrPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3 264 I 264 identifier 264 identifier 265 identifier 265 identifier 265 iem 265 iemId 266 iMSIAttachDetach Class 2 266 in 266 inactivity timeout 266 inclusive interval of codano 267 inclusive list of codano 267 incomingHandOver Class 3 267 inhibitRequest 267 inId 268 initialMCSDL Class 3 268 initialMCSUL Class 3 268 interBscDirectedRetry Class 3 269 interBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 269 interCellHOExtPriority Class 3 269 interCellHOIntPriority Class 3 270 interferenceType Class 3 270 interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc 270
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

16 interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts 272 interferer cancel algo usage Class 2 274 internal DMUX alarm state 274 internal DMUX state 276 internal PCM states 277 internal switching matrix 277 interOmuEtherlinkOper 277 intraBscDirectedRetry Class 3 278 intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 278 intraCell Class 3 278 intraCellHOIntPriority Class 3 279 intraCellQueueing Class 3 279 intraCellSDCCH Class 3 279 J 280 job 280 jobResult 280 jokerPerMainTarget Class 3 280 L 281 label 281 language 281 lapdConcentration 281 lapdLink 282 lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2 283 lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2 283 lapdLinkOMLRef Class 0 284 lapdLinkRSLRef Class 2 284 lapdTerminalNumber Class 0 285 layer3MsgCyphModComp Class 1 286 lcsType Class 0 286 level to process 287 lightning protection Class 2 287 line 287 locationAreaCode Class 3 288 locationAreaCode Class 3 288 locationAreaCode Class 2 288 log 288 logFullAction 289 login command type 289 longTbfLossThroughput Class 3 289 longTbfSizeThreshold Class 3 290 lRxLevDLH Class 3 290 lRxLevDLP Class 3 290 lRxLevULH Class 3 291 lRxLevULP Class 3 291
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

17 lRxQualDLH Class 3 291 lRxQualDLP Class 3 292 lRxQualULH Class 3 292 lRxQualULP Class 3 292 lsaPcmList Class 3 293 lsaRc 294 lsaRcId 294 lsaRc Reference 295 M 295 machine name 295 machine name 295 mainNetworkBand Class 0 295 maio Class 2 296 managedObjectClass 296 managedObjectInstance 297 manager address type 297 manager addresses 297 managerServer 297 manufacturerIntervention 298 marking type 298 masterBtsSMId class 2 298 max log size 298 maxAdjCHOARMPerBts 299 maxBscPerNetwork 299 maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone Class 3 299 maxBtsPerBtsSM 299 maxBtsPerNetwork 299 maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 300 maxDnTbfPerTs Class 3 300 maxDwAssign Class 3 300 maxFileSize Class 2 300 maximum acknowledgment time 301 maximum alarm number 301 maximum clear time 302 maximum event time 302 maximum MD notification number 302 maximum OMC notification number 303 maximum reception time 303 maxLapdChPerBtsSM 303 maxNbrConsMess 303 maxNbOfCells Class 2 304 maxNbrPDAAssig Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) 304 maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange Class 2 (NN0002Max) gprsTranscvLockExtended Conf 304
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

18 maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock Class 2 (n3101Max) (gprsTranscvLockExtendedCon f) 305 maxNumberRetransmission Class 3 305 maxPcmCPerBtsSM 305 maxPcmCPerTranscd 306 maxRACH Class 3 306 maxRowCount 306 maxSigLPerSigLS 307 maxTeiPerLapdCh 307 maxTranscdBPerTranscd 307 maxTranscdPerBsc 307 maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 308 maxUpTbfPerTs Class 3 308 md 308 md notification number 308 mdArchive 309 mdConfirm 309 mdFileName 309 mdGranularityPeriod 309 mdGranularityPeriod 310 mdGranularityPeriod 311 mdId 312 mdLog 312 mdObjectList 312 mdObjectList 313 mdObjectList 313 mdScanner 313 mdScannerType 314 mdScannerType 314 mdScannerType 314 mdScannerType 315 mdScannerType 315 mdStorageDuration 315 mdTransferMode 316 mdWarning 316 measurementProcAlgorithm Class 2 316 microCellCaptureTimer Class 3 317 microCellStability Class 3 318 minimum acknowledgment time 318 minimum alarm number 318 minimum clear time 319 minimum event time 319 minimum MD notification number 319 minimum OMC notification number 320
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

19 minimum reception time 320 minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain Class 3 320 minNbOfTDMA Class 2 321 minNbrGprsTs Class 3 321 minTimeQualityIntraCellHO Class 3 321 missDistWt Class 3 322 missRxLevWt Class 3 322 missRxQualWt Class 3 323 mms 323 mmsId 323 mmsUsage 324 mobileAllocation Class 2 324 mobileCountryCode Class 3 324 mobileCountryCode Class 3 325 mobileCountryCode Class 1 325 mobileCountryCode Class 2 326 mobileNetworkCode Class 3 326 mobileNetworkCode Class 3 326 mobileNetworkCode Class 1 327 mobileNetworkCode Class 2 327 modeModifyMandatory Class 3 327 monitoredObjectClass 328 monitoredObjectInstance 328 monitoredSpecificProblemsList 329 month 329 msBtsDistanceInterCell Class 3 329 msCapWeightActive Class 2 329 msLeakRate 330 msPowerClassToggle Class 3 330 msRangeMax Class 3 330 msTxPwrMax Class 3 331 msTxPwrMax2ndBand Class 2 331 msTxPwrMaxCCH Class 3 332 msTxPwrMaxCell Class 3 333 multi band reporting Class 3 334 multiple site 334 multipleVocoders Class 1 335 muxNumber Class 3 335 N 336 n3103 Class 3 336 n3105max Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf) nACCActivation Class 3 336 nAvgl Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) 336 nAvgT Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) 337
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

336

20 nAvgW Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) 337 nbOfFramesForFER Class 3 337 nbOfRepeat Class 2 338 nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation Class 3 338 nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation Class 3 339 nbrTch Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) 339 nCapacityFRRequestedCodec Class 3 339 nCHPosition Class2 340 networkColourCode Class 3 341 networkColourCode Class 2 341 networkIndicator Class 1 342 new name 342 new password 1st try 342 new password 2nd try 343 new power control algorithm Class 3 343 next execution time 344 nFRRequestedCodec Class 3 344 nHRRequestedCodec Class 3 345 night intervention 345 noOfBlocksForAccessGrant Class 2 345 noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging Class 2 346 notAllowedAccessClasses Class 3 346 notification number 347 notification type 347 numberOfJokerDS0 Class 2 347 number of records 348 number of large reuse data channels Class 3 348 numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts 348 numberOfPwciSamples Class 3 349 numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans Class 3 349 numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion Class 3 351 numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion Class 3 352 numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion Class 3 352 numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion Class 3 352 nUsfExt Class 3 353 nwExtUtbf Class 3 353 O 353 objectClass 353 objectInstance 354 object Filter List 354 objects 355 objects assigned 355 observation type 355 observation type 356
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

21 observed counters 356 observed object class 356 occupationState 356 offsetLoad Class 3 357 offsetNeighbouringCell Class 3 357 offsetPriority Class 3 359 oMC notification number 359 omu 359 omuId 360 on error 360 onlyExtUtbf Class 3 360 onePhaseAccess Class 2 360 onePhaseDnMsCapability Class 3 361 operationalState 361 operationalState 362 operationalState 363 operationalState 363 operationalState 364 operationalState 364 operationalState 365 operationalState 366 operationalState 366 operationalState 366 operationalState 367 operationalState 367 operationalState 368 operationalState 368 operationalState 369 operationalState 369 operationalState 370 operationalState 370 operationalState 371 operationalState 371 operationalState 371 operationalState 372 operationalState 372 operationalState 373 operationalState 374 operationalState 374 operationalState 375 operationalState 375 operationalState 376 operationalState 376 operationalState 377
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

22 operationalState 378 operationalState 378 otherServicesPriority Class 3 379 output classes 379 output classes 380 owner 380 P 380 packetAckTime Class 3 380 packetFlowContext Class 3 381 packetSiStatus Class 3 382 pagingOnCell Class 3 382 pan Class 3 382 panDec Class 3 (pan) 382 panInc Class 3 (pan) 383 panMax Class 3 (pan) 383 parameter(s) 384 partialRecordCriteriaType Class 2 384 partialRecordCriteriaEventType 385 partialRecordCriteriaNbEvent 385 partialrecordCriteriaTimer 385 particular intervention 385 password 385 password 385 password duration 386 pcmCircuit 386 pcmCircuit 388 pcmCircuitBsc 389 pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager 389 pcmCircuitId 389 pcmCircuitId Class 2 390 pcmCircuitId Class 2 390 pcmCircuitId Class 2 391 pcmErrorCorrection Class 2 391 pcmNbr Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) 391 pcmTimeSlotNumber Class 2 392 pcmType Class 3 (BSC 12000) or Class 0 (BSC 3000) 392 pcu 393 pcuCellState 393 pcuLapdEqptRefList Class 2 394 pcusn 394 pcuSNName 394 penaltyTime Class 3 395 perceived severity 396 periodCCCHLoadIndication Class 3 396
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

23 periodicity 396 pfcActivation Class 2 396 pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3 397 pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3 397 pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3 397 pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3 398 pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3 398 pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3 398 pfcFlowControlActivation Class 2 399 pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs Class 3 399 pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate Class 3 400 pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold Class 3 400 pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold Class 3 401 pfcPreemptionRatioGold Class 3 401 pfcPreemptionRatioSilver Class 3 401 pfcRtDowngradeAllowed Class 3 402 pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold Class 3 402 pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold Class 3 402 pfcT6 Class 3 403 pfcT8 Class 3 403 pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl Class 3 403 pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl Class 3 404 plmnPermitted Class 3 404 pODType 404 pointCode Class 1 404 pointCode Class 1 405 port Ethernet operational 405 port Ethernet status 405 port 0 X25 status 406 port 1 X25 status 406 portChosen Class 2 407 portUsed 407 positionInShelf 407 powerBudgetInterCell Class 3 408 powerClass 408 powerControl 408 powerControlIndicator Class 3 409 powerDownlink (algorithm Used) class 2 409 powerIncrStepSize Class 3 409 powerIncrStepSizeUpLink Class 3 410 powerIncrStepSizeDownLink Class 3 411 powerRedStepSize Class 3 411 powerRedStepSizeDownLink Class 3 412 powerRedStepSizeUpLink Class 3 412
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

24 powerUplink (algorithm Used) Class 2 413 preemptionAuthor Class 3 413 preemptionConfiguration Class 3 413 pRequestedCodec Class 3 414 preSynchroTimingAdvance Class 3 414 priority Class 2 414 privateMmsOmuRef 415 privilegedCell Class 3 415 probable cause 416 processor identity 418 processorLoadSupConf Class 3 418 pwciHrequave Class 3 419 R 420 rACHLoadAveragingSlots Class 3 420 radChanSelIntThreshold Class 3 420 radioAllocator Class 2 421 radioLinkTimeOut Class 3 422 radioSiteMask Class 2 423 radioSiteMaskOffset Class 2 424 radioSiteName 425 radResSupBusyTimer Class 3 426 radResSupervision Class 3 426 radResSupFreeTimer Class 3 426 range 427 reception time 427 record reference 427 redundantPcmNumber 428 redundantPcmPresence Class 2 428 refPeriod 428 refPeriod 428 relatedSoftwares 429 relay 429 remoteSsuState 430 repetition rate 430 report range 430 report template 431 report type 431 reportObjLevel 431 reportTypeMeas Class 2 432 resetCircuitRepeat Class 1 432 retransDuration Class 2 432 retry on error 433 rlf1 Class 2 433 rlf2 Class 2 434
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

25 rlf3 Class 2 434 rLCPolling Class 3 435 rmpConfState 435 rndAccTimAdvThreshold Class 3 436 routingArea Class 2 436 rowPosition 436 runCallClear Class 3 437 runHandOver Class 3 437 runPwrControl Class 3 437 rxLevAccessMin Class 3 437 rxLevDLIH Class 3 438 rxLevDLPBGT Class 3 438 rxLevHreqave Class 3 439 rxLevHreqaveBeg Class3 439 rxLevHreqt Class 3 439 rxLevMinCell Class 3 440 rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg Class 3 440 rxLevRxQualDistributionActivation Class 3 441 rxLevULIH Class 3 441 rxLevWtsList Class 3 441 rxNCellHreqave Class 3 442 rxQualAveBeg Class 3 442 rxQualDLIH Class 3 443 rxQualHreqave Class 3 443 rxQualHreqt Class 3 443 rxQualULIH Class 3 443 rxQualThresholdDistribution Class 3 444 rxQualWtsList Class 3 444 S 444 sIkAssociatedTmuPortPosition 444 sIkATerResource 445 sacchPowerOffset Class 2 445 sacchPowerOffsetSelection Class 2 445 sapi 445 scannerId 446 scannerId 446 sCCPRoutingIndicator 446 securedLoopActivation Class 2 447 selfAdaptActivation Class 3 447 selfTuningObs Class 3 448 sequenceNumber 448 serial number 448 serial number 449 servingFactorOffset Class 3 449
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

26 session context saving mode 449 sGSNRelease Class 3 450 shelfNumber 450 short message 450 sicBoardsInt 451 signallingLinkId 451 signallingLinkResState 452 signallingLinkSet 453 signallingPoint 453 signallingPointType 453 signallingTerminalNumber Class 2 454 sigPowerOverboost Class 3 454 sigPReserved2 Class 3 454 site 455 siteGsmFctList Class 2 455 siteName 456 slc Class 2 457 small to large zone HO priority Class 3 457 smoke detector Class 2 458 smsCB Class 3 458 software 459 softwareLabel 460 source indicator 460 specific problems 460 speechMode Class 3 461 speechMode Class 3 461 speechOnHoppingTs Class 3 462 speechVersionAsscomp Class 1 462 speechVersionHoperf Class 1 462 speechVersionHoreq Class 1 462 speechVersionHorqd Class 1 463 standard indicator AdjC Class 3 463 standard indicator AdjC Class 3 463 standardIndicator Class 2 464 standbyStatus 467 start date 467 start time 468 start time 468 startAlarmFilter 468 startAlarmThreshold 469 startAlarmThreshold 470 startCounterThreshold 470 startTime 471 startTime 471
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

27 stopTime 471 stopTime 471 subChanId 472 subject 472 suffix 472 summary 473 suspendResumeActivation Class 3 473 supportingTransceiverEquipment 473 sw8kRm 474 sw8kRmId 474 sWVersionBackUp 474 sWVersionFallBack 475 sWVersionNew 475 sWVersionRunning Class 2 476 synchronized Class 3 476 synchronizing PCM 477 syntheticFaultNumber 477 systemInfoType2 Class 2 477 system state 478 T 478 t3101 Class 3 478 t3103 Class 3 478 t3107 Class 3 479 t3109 Class 3 479 t3111 Class 3 480 t3122 Class 3 480 t3168 Class 3 480 t3172 Class 3 481 t3192 Class 3 481 target Bda 481 tcu2gGroup 482 teiBtsSiteManager Class 2 482 teiLapdLink 483 teiTransceiverEqpt Class 2 483 teiTranscoder Class 2 484 temporaryOffset Class 3 484 terminal name 485 terminal profile 485 text 485 text 486 text 486 tFH or RWM Class 2 486 tGMMKeepAlive Class 3 486 thresholdCCCHLoadIndication Class 3 487
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

28 thresholdInterference Class 2 487 thresholdType 488 timeBetweenHOConfiguration Class 3 489 timerGcchNotif Class 3 489 timerPeriodicUpdateMS Class 3 489 timeSlotNumber 490 timeSlotNumber Class 2 490 timeSlotNumber 490 tmu 491 tmuId 491 tnOffset class 2 492 tNwExtUtbf Class 3 492 traceConstraintList 492 traceControl 493 traceDayAccessed 493 traceFileName 494 traceInfoRequested 494 traceReference 494 traffic PCM allocation priority Class 2 494 transceiver 495 transceiver 495 transceiver equipment class Class 2 496 transceiver zone Ref Class 2 497 transceiverEquipment 497 transceiverEquipment 498 transceiver equipment class 499 transceiverZone 499 transcoder2GEqptId 500 transcoder3GEqptId 500 transcoder 501 transcoder 501 transcoder 502 transcoderAlarmList 502 transcoderAlarmMask Class 3 502 transcoderArchitecture 502 transcoderBoard 503 transcoderBoard 503 transcoderBoardIntState 503 transcoderId Class 2 504 transcoderId Class 2 504 transcoderIntPcmIntState 504 transcoderMatrix 505 transparentSiteAttrib2 Class 2 507 transparentTeiAttrib2 Class 2 507
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

29 tResumeAck Class 3 507 trm 508 trmArchipelagoCalls 508 trmId 508 tSCBNumber 508 tSCBUse 509 tsConfiguration 509 tSuspendAck Class 3 510 tUsfExt Class 3 510 txPowerMaxReduction Class 2 510 type 511 type 511 type 512 type 512 type 512 type of data to be purged 513 type of display 513 U 513 ulBepPeriod Class 2 513 ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 513 ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 514 ulMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 514 ulMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 514 ulMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3 515 ulMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3 515 ulMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3 515 ulMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3 515 UMTS access min level Class 3 516 UMTS reselection ARFCN Class 3 516 UMTS reselection offset Class 3 516 UMTS search min level Class 3 517 unequippedCircuit Class 1 517 unit 517 unknownNCellWarning Class 3 518 unmasked users alarms Class 2 518 upAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime) 519 upgradeStatus 519 uplinkMappingChannelNumber Class 2 520 uplinkMappingFreq Class 2 520 uplinkMappingMeasurementMode Class 2 520 uplinkMappingProcessingMode Class 3 521 uplinkPowerControl Class 3 521 uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA Class 3 521 uplinkReply Class 3 521
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

30 uplinkReplyTimer Class 3 522 uRxLevDLP Class 3 522 uRxLevULP Class 3 523 uRxQualDLP Class 3 523 uRxQualULP Class 3 523 usageState 524 usageState 524 use default list 525 user name 525 user profile 525 username 525 username 526 usfGranularity Class 3 526 V 526 version Class 2 526 voiceBroadcastService Class 3 527 voiceGroupCallService Class 3 527 vSWR meter Class 2 527 W 528 workstation name 528 wPSManagement Class 3 528 wPSQueueStepRotation Class 3 528 X 529 X25 port 0 operational 529 X25 port 1 operational 529 xSCBConfiguration Class 0 530 xSCBNumber 530 xSCBUse 530 xtp 531 Z 532 zI bss 532 zI bss 532 zone frequency hopping Class 2 533 zone frequency threshold Class 2 533 zone Tx power max reduction Class 2 534

Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution


A.1 New V16 parameters A.2 New V15 parameters A.3 New V14 parameters 535 536 539

535

Appendix B Parameters per feature


B.1 AMR based on traffic 543 B.2 AMR Optimizations 543 B.3 BSC/TCU 3000 543
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

543

31 B.4 BSC 3000 cell group management/load balancing 544 B.5 BSC 3000 switching increase capacity 544 B.6 BSC overload management 544 B.7 Dualband cell management 544 B.8 EDGE dynamic allocation 544 B.9 EDGE traffic management 545 B.10 EDGE link adaptation 545 B.11 GSM-R V12 545 B.12 GSM-R V15 546 B.13 GPRS (SV407 - V12) 546 B.14 GPRS (TF1134 - NMO I) 548 B.15 GPRS (TF1121 - V12) 548 B.16 GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access 548 B.17 GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume 549 B.18 PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC 549 B.19 Network Synchronization 549 B.20 BTS Synchronization 549 B.21 Automatic Cell Tiering 549 B.22 Handover for traffic reasons 550 B.23 Handover decision (adjacent cell priority and load) 550 B.24 General protection against pingpong handover 550 B.25 Intracell handover enhancements 550 B.26 AR 264 550 B.27 Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs 550 B.28 Call drop analysis 550 B.29 Extended CCCH 551 B.30 CPU/BIFP load sharing 551 B.31 Distribution on Radio measurements 551 B.32 Extended UL TBF 551 B.33 Broadcast of PSI 13 551 B.34 L1M evolutions for advanced features support 551 B.35 Fast power control at TCH assignment 552 B.36 Data Backhaul Evolution 552 B.37 Disabling TBF Keep Alive 552 B.38 PCM error correction 552 B.39 Unequipped circuit and circuit group block 552 B.40 Uplink mapping 552 B.41 WPS public access bandwidth protection 552 B.42 WPS queuing management 552 B.43 BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement 553 B.44 Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS 553 B.45 BSS Packet Flow Context 553 B.46 BSC 3000 support of BTS background downloading 554 B.47 Optimized Agprs cell allocation 554
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

32 B.48 B.49 B.50 B.51 B.52 B.53 B.54 B.56 EDGE Dynamic Agprs 554 Switch Interference Matrix 554 Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure 554 PM1270 - TDMA based counters 554 Tx power offset for signalling channels 554 Tx power overboost for signaling channels 554 U-TDOA support on the BSS 555 Smart Power Management 555

Appendix C PCUSN components

557

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

33

New in this release


The following section detail what is new in Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference for the V16.0 release.

Features
PM1270 - TDMA based counters (15405) Interference Matrix Processing and Mediation (16411) MS location E911 (20365) Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure (22810) Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS (22859) BSS Packet Flow Context (22860) EGPRS Uplink Incremental Redundancy (24498) Edge one phase access (24620) BSC 3000 Support of BTS SW BCKGRND DWNLDG (25316) PCUSN : MSA32 (single slot) board introduction (E1 & T1) (26742) Optimized Agprs cell allocation (26828, 26953) EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS (26954) GPRS/EDGE TDMA configuration improvements (27731) BTS/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement for IN and TCU (29718) MSS7480 platform ROHS compliance (29915) Tx power offset for signaling channels (30293) Repeated Downlink FACCH (30296) PCUSN MSA32 E1 board introduction (30377) Differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40 Watts (30713) BTS18000 4-way Tx coupler (H4) introduction (32300)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

34

New in this release

BTS18000 HPRM3T differentiation (33657) Frequency independent high speed enhancements (34756)

PM1270 - TDMA based counters (15405)


This feature provides observation counters on a TDMAbasis. The tuned network analysis enables the operator to detect local QoS anomalies and adjust network parameters. See impact of this feature in the following location: updated the monitoredObjectClass parameter.

Interference Matrix Processing and Mediation (16411)


This feature provides an interference matrix, which allows an operator to evaluate cell overlaps. With this information, an operator can detect which neighboring cells causes interferences and optimize inter-cells functionality. The network calculates automatically the interference matrix and allows the operator to improve the networks view and the frequency planning. See impact of this feature in the following location: added the interfer enceMatrixRunningOnBts and interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc parameters.

MS location E911 (20365)


This feature introduces a standard BSS based solution for MS location. Each operator is now able to choose its configuration, in accordance with the network architecture. See impact of this feature in the following location:

modified the lcsType and pcmType parameters eotdAgpsTimer has been renamed agpsTimer added semantic controls to the following parameters: bssSccpConnEst, bssSccpInactRx, bssSccpInactTx, bssSccpRelease, bssSccpSubSysTest, pcmType, lcsType, signallingLinkId, lsaPcmList

Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure (22810)


This feature improves the BTS behavior upon an Abis link failure. When the TRXs of a BTS detect an Abis PCM failure, the BTS turns off the power amplifier. The broadcasting on BCCH and SACCH is stopped. As soon as the TRXs of the BTS detect the Abis PCMre--activation, the BTS turns on the power amplifiers.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

Features

35

See impact of this feature in the following location: added the new channelReleaseOnAbisFailure parameter.

Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS (22859)


This feature is an extension of the GPRS/EDGE standard. When NACC is activated, the network is able to assist the MS for cell re-selection during ongoing TBF. See impact of this feature in the following location: added the nACCActivation and packetSiStatus parameters.

BSS Packet Flow Context (22860)


PFC provides QoS classification of flows in the BSS. This sharp QoS description is common to GSM and UMTS. See impact of this feature in the following location:

added the following new parameters:

packetFlowContext pfcActivation pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection pfcFlowControlActivation pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold pfcPreemptionRatioGold pfcPreemptionRatioSilver pfcRtDowngradeAllowed pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold pfcT6 pfcT8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

36

New in this release

pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl

removed the following parameters:

admissionCtrlBronze admissionCtrlGold admissionCtrlSilver dwQoSCriterion minTargetThroughput minThroughputBronze minThroughputGold minThroughputSilver peakThroughputLimitation preemptionRatioGold preemptionRatioSilver targetThroughputStep upQoSCriterion voicePreemptionBronze voicePreemptionGold voicePreemptionSilver EGPRS Uplink Incremental Redundancy (24498)
Incremental redundancy (IR) defines the retransmission process of data blocks that were not successfully decoded after the first transmission, combining them until they are properly decoded. See impact of this feature in the following location: added the eGPRSIrUlActivation parameter.

Edge one phase access (24620)


This feature reduces the uplink TBF establishment time, and consequently increases the data throughput from an end-user point of view. See impact of this feature in the following location: modified the onePhaseAccess parameter.

BSC 3000 Support of BTS SW BCKGRND DWNLDG (25316)


This feature allows operators to download new software to a BTS while this BTS carries GSM/GPRS calls on a live network.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

Features

37

See impact of this feature in the following location: added the bckDLLayer3WindowSize parameter.

PCUSN : MSA32 (single slot) board introduction (E1 & T1) (26742)
An evolution of the data configuration is needed because of the increase of the BSC 3000 Agprs connectivity. See impacts of this feature in the following locations: modified the bscPcuPcmRefList, gprsPcuCrossConnectList and bscRefList parameters.

Optimized Agprs cell allocation (26828, 26953)


This feature provides a better control on cell distribution on Agprs PCM, and maximized performances. See impact of this feature in the following location: Added the privilegedCell parameter.

EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS (26954)


This feature allows to reserve Joker bandwidth on the Agprs for a given TDMA. See impact of this feature in the following location: added the minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain parameter.

GPRS/EDGE TDMA configuration improvements (27731)


This feature aims at a better monitoring and better diagnoses (Edge and GPRS). See impact of this feature in the following location: modified the following degradedCause parameter of the transceiver object.

BTS/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement for IN and TCU (29718)


This feature adds information on specific objects (trm, lsa) in order to enhance the customer visibility on IN and TCU nodes. See impact of this feature in the following location:

added the trmArchipelagoCalls and aterLapd parameters modified the following parameters: coderPoolList, coderPoolConfigurati on, CTU cable, numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts removed the lapdLinkCallPLoad parameter

MSS7480 platform ROHS compliance (29915)


This feature describes the impacts of the introduction of the increased Agprs connectivity between each BSC3000 and PCUSN.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

38

New in this release

See impact of this feature in the following location: updated the bscPcuPcmRefList, gprsPcuCrossConnectList and bscRefList parameters.

Tx power offset for signaling channels (30293)


This feature improves the downlink robustness of signalling channels (FACCH and SACCH). New parameters define dedicated power control targets for uplink and downlink AMR CODEC. See impact of this feature in the following location: added the following new parameters: facchPowerOffset, sacchPowerOffsetSelection, sacchPo werOffset, hrPowerControlTargetModeDl and frPowerControlTargetModeDl

Repeated Downlink FACCH (30296)


This feature secures the handover procedure in poor radio conditions by retransmitting the FACCH frames in DL after 40 ms, that is, without waiting for the mobile acknowledgement. See impact of this feature in the following location: added the enableRepeatedFacchFr parameter.

PCUSN MSA32 E1 board introduction (30377)


An evolution of the data configuration is needed because of the increase of the BSC 3000 Agprs connectivity. See impact of this feature in the following location: modified the bscPcuPcmRefList, gprsPcuCrossConnectList and bscRefList parameters.

Differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40 Watts (30713)
This feature allows operators to remotely identify Radio Module types for service purposes (BTS output power configuration). Three types of RM are available: Radio Module (RM), Medium Power Radio Module (MPRM) and High Power Radio Module (HPRM). See impacts of this feature in the following locations: modified the following parameters: hardware configuration, bts equipment name.

BTS18000 4-way Tx coupler (H4) introduction (32300)


This feature provides configurations for the 4-way Tx coupler (the H4 module). See impact of this feature in the following location: updated the bts equipment name parameter.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

Other changes

39

BTS18000 HPRM3T differentiation (33657)


This feature introduces 60W Radio Modules with three TRX per modules, in the 850 MHz and the 900 MHz bands. See impact of this feature in the following location: added the value High Power Radio Module with 3 TRX per module to the description of hardware configuration parameter.

Frequency independent high speed enhancements (34756)


This features describes the high speed enhancements to all frequencies of Nortel GSM Access portfolio (900, 1800, 850 and 1900 MHz) for GSM-R. See impact of this feature in the following location: added the highSpeedUplinkDistortionRemoval parameter.

Other changes
See the following sections for information about changes that are not feature-related:

Removed information on BSC 12000 due to EOL (End Of Life) (v16.01) Replaces all occurrences toBSC 2G with BSC 12000HC (v16.01) Updated availabilityStatus parameter(v16.01) Updated operationalState parameter (v16.01) Updated pcmCircuitId parameter (v16.01) Updated timeSlotNumber parameter updated (v16.01) Removed hoCombination parameter and updated Section A.2 New V14 parameters (v16.01) Removed allocBitmap and dLPwrValue parameters (v16.01) Added tcu2gGroup and pcuCellstate parameters (v16.01) Removed extUplinkTbActivation parameter (v16.01) Removed lapdLinkResources parameter (v16.01) Updated monitoredObjectClass parameter (v16.01) Updated parameters (v16.02)

bsTxPwrMax mobileCountryCode early classmark sending

Updated parameters (v16.03)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

40

New in this release

signallingLinkSet dtxMode nUsfExt

Added Attention precaution to show parameter range evolution for amrReserved1 (v16.04) Added sigPowerOverboost parameter (v16.04) Added uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA parameter (v16.04) Updated parameters (v16.05)

siteName cRC pcmType bscName cellName radioSiteName pcuSNName

Updated parameter availabilityStatus with value range "unknown" (v16.07) Added detail about semantic checks to description about parameter gsmToUmtsReselection (v16.08) Removed Class 2 identifier that was in the parameter description about bscRefList (v16.08) Modified teiTranscoder class 2 parameter checks to differentiate between 2g and 3g (v16.08). Added information on external alarms for the BTS 6000 in external alarm configuration class 2 parameter (16.09). Added note about configuration information in the microCellCaptureTim er and microCellStability parameters (16.09).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

41

Introduction
The Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference is a guide that describes all GSM BSS network element parameters that the user can access using the OMC-R.

ATTENTION
For a BSC 3000, there are no class 1 parameters; all these parameters are now class 0. For a BSC 12000HC, the class 1 parameters have not changed.

Prerequisites
Users must be familiar with networking principles. They must also be familiar with the following manuals: < 00 > : Nortel GSM BSS Documentation roadmap < 01 > : Nortel GSM BSS Overview < 06 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Fundamentals < 07 > : Nortel GSM BSS Fundamentals Operating Principles < 16 > : Nortel GSM TCU 2G Fundamentals < 22 > : Nortel GSM BSC 12000HC Fundamentals < 32 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting < 34 > : Nortel GSM BSS Configuration Operating Procedures < 125 > : Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management Observation Counters Dictionary < 128 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference Objects and Fault menus

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

42 Introduction

< 129 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference Configuration, Performance, and Maintenance menus < 130 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference Security, Administration, SMSCB, and Help menus <133>: Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management Observation Counters Fundamentals

Navigation
Chapter 1 Introduction (page 43) contains general information on BSS operating parameters. Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order (page 53) describes all the operating parameters listed in alphabetical order, and explains their use. Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution (page 535) lists new configuration parameters and objects by release. Appendix B Parameters per feature (page 543) presents BSS parameters per feature.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

43

Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Network conguration objects and their parameters
This dictionary summarizes all the GSM BSS parameters used to define all the objects managed on the OMC-R. An object model is used to describe each managed network element. Each object is defined in terms of its parameters (also called attributes), and its relationships with other objects. A containment tree is used to depict the relationships among these objects (see Figure 1 "Object main tree structure" (page 43) to Figure 4 "Network subtree objects" (page 45)). For more information on objects and parameters, refer to NTP < 07 >, for parameters listed per object, refer to NTP < 128 >.

ATTENTION
For a BSC 3000, there are no more class 1 parameters; all these parameters are now class 0. For a BSC 12000HC, the class 1 parameters have not changed. Figure 1 Object main tree structure

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

44 Chapter 1 Introduction

Figure 2 omc subtree objects

Figure 3 md subtree objects

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters

45

Figure 4 Network subtree objects

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

46 Chapter 1 Introduction

Figure 5 bsc 2G subtree objects

Figure 6 bsc 3000 subtree objects

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters

47

Figure 7 bsc 3000 subtree objects

Figure 8 btsSiteManager subtree objects

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

48 Chapter 1 Introduction

Users can create, modify, and delete objects using commands and actions displayed in the menus of the OMC-R Browser window (see Figure 9 "Menus in the OMC-R browser window" (page 48)). Parameters are widely used in all commands and actions. For more information on commands, refer to NTPs < 128 > to < 130 >.
Figure 9 Menus in the OMC-R browser window

For CT2000 and datafill purposes, the following remarks must be taken into consideration:

If not indicated, the parameters are considered mandatory in all cases. For example, if a parameter is marked as Not Mandatory at the OMC-R level, the user does not need to employ it in CT2000, there will not be any value in the command files to create the associated object. A parameter is dependant of an OMC feature only when indicated. For any parameter associated with an OMC feature, if the feature is

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

1.2 Different types of configuration parameters

49

active at OMC-R then the parameter is mandatory at object creation otherwise it is not. Example: a parameter marked as "cell Tiering" dependant will only be used when the cellTiering feature is active at the OMC-R level.

A parameter is considered product-dependant only when indicated and to be used only when the product is used in the network. For example, a parameter marked "BSC 3000" dependant is mandatory when the object to create/modify belongs to the "BSC 3000" architecture. CT2000 is an offline, multi-release CM OAM tool. The CT2000 V3 phased with BSS V15 can also configure sub-BSS releases V14.2 and V14.3. Throughout this document, the user will be able to distinguish whether a parameter present in CT2000 DRF interface needs to be filled or not, depending upon the actual network configuration.

1.2 Different types of conguration parameters


There are two types of configuration parameters: customer and manufacturer parameters.

Customer parameters:

addressing parameters, which are relative to objects (for example:


bsc number)

design parameters, which are relative to contract characteristics


(for example: configRef, SiteName)

optimization parameters, which are relative to network tuning (for


example: cellReselectHysteresis)

operating parameters, which are relative to network operation (for


example: cellBarred)

Manufacturer parameters:

system parameters, which can seriously affect system operation,


and which must be under the control of the manufacturer (for example: runPwrControl)

product parameters, which are incompatible with the current system


release (for example: sWVersionbackup) New configuration parameters are summarized in Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution (page 535).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

50 Chapter 1 Introduction

1.3 Description of dictionary entries


Each parameter is described separately and arranged in alphabetical order. Dictionary entries fall into two parts:

the header line the main body, composed of several fields

1.3.1 Header line


The header line contains some or all of the following information (see following figure):


Figure 10 Header line

the name of the OMC-R parameter the class of the parameter (if any) the BSS version from which it applies

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

1.3 Description of dictionary entries 51

1.3.2 Main body of entries


The main body contains up to nine fields:

Description: parameter definition Value range: displayed in square brackets and the unit if any Example: [2 to 300] seconds Object: object name(s) in which the parameter is defined Default value: value which allows to deactivate the function Type: parameter type. The five accepted values are the following:
type meaning is handled by the Configuration Management application X X X X X X (7) X (6) is handled by any other applications (4) X (5)

DD DI DP DS Id

Dynamic data (1) Internal data (2) Permanent data (3) Static data Identifier

(1) : Dynamic parameters (DD) are not stored in databases. They are managed by the BSC applications, and they can be consulted on operator request. (2) : Internal parameters (DI) are stored in the OMC-R operation database (BDE) and are not sent to Network Elements. They supply additional information on how an object is configured at a given time. They can be consulted on operator request and some of them can also be modified. (3) : Permanent parameters (DP) are stored in the application database (BDA) and in the operation database (BDE). Most of them are mandatory and they are defined with the object that uses them. They are managed by the operator. (4) : Fault Management, Performance Management, Command Functions, etc. (5) : parameter displayed in command output (6) : parameter entered by users (7) : parameter which is either entered by users, or displayed in command output

Condition: It indicates the necessary conditions in which the parameter can be used. Checks: Semantic checks performed by the OMC-R are indicated with the Create [C], Set [M], Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

52 Chapter 1 Introduction

Feature: Field introduced from V12. It indicates the reference of the Feature that impacts the parameter description. Restrictions: Applicable restrictions are indicated with the Create [C], Set [M], Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands. Remark: optional field containing comments.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

53

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


For a BSC 3000, there are no more class 1 parameters; all these parameters are now class 0. For a BSC 12000HC, the class 1 parameters have not changed.

A
abisSpy Class 3
Description : Whether measurement reports from the BTS and the mobiles are forwarded to the BSC in order to spy on the Abis Interface. The number of measurement reports on SICD and SICD8v is limited only for BSC 2G. Value range : Object : Default value : Type: [in progress / not in progress] bts not in progress DP

absoluteRFChannelNo Class 2
Description : Radio frequency used in the network frequency band by a radio time slot that does not obey frequency hopping laws. Setting this attribute forbids the radio time slot to obey frequency hopping laws. The frequency of the radio time slot that carries a cell BCCH in a TDMA frame (channelType = "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH") is not managed by users. When the parent bts object is

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

54 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

unlocked, the system automatically assigns the cell bCCHFrequency to the concerned channel object and updates it whenever it is changed. Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network), [955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R), [975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network), [128 to 251] (GSM 850 network), [955 / 1023] / [0 / 55] (GSM-R). channel To define if the TDMA does not hop DP

Object : Condition : Type : Checks :

[C/M] :

The attribute is undefined when the radio time slot is authorized to hop or its channelType is "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHC ombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH". The attribute is defined when the radio time slot is not authorized to hop and its channelType is "tCHFull", "sDCCH", "sdcch8CBCH", or "cCH". When defined, the frequency is one of those allotted to the parent bts object (cellAllocation list). Concentric cell: When defined, the frequency is not used by the channel objects related to the transceiver objects allotted to the other cell zone. If the frequency hopping is not used, the absoluteRFChannelNo attribute indicates a radio frequency number which is located between [0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] when the standardIndicator attribute is equal to Rgsm.

[C/M] :

[C/M] :

[M] :

[C/M]:

access time end


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Time of the day after which the user is not allowed to log in. It is after access time start. [<time> (18:00)] user profile DP

[C/M] :

access time end is after access time start.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

55

access time start


Description : Value range : Type : Checks : Time of the day after which the user is allowed to log in. [<time> (09:00)] DP

[C/M] :

access time start is before access time end.

accessClassCongestion Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : List of access classes that are not authorized in a cell during TCH congestion phase (class 10 not included). [0 to 9] User classes [11 to 15] Operator classes bts DP V9

accessibilityState
Description : Value range : MSC accessibility state [reachable / congested / unReachable]


Object : Type : DD

reachable................. congested.................

The remote signaling point is within reach. 80% of the BSC pool of buffers handling outgoing MSC messages is full. The remote signaling point is out of reach.

unReachable......

signallingLinkSet

acknowledged by
Description : To select alarms acknowledged by a given user. Enter the users name as defined in the users profile. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [case sensitive] Alarm logs - Filter DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

56 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

acknowledgment time
Description : Value range : To select messages acknowledged at that time. [<date>,<time>] Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Object : Type : Alarm logs - Filter DP

activationObject
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMC-R. [bscId range] callPathTrace DP

[C]: [C]:

The bsc object is created. The callPathTrace object is not created for the bsc object. The Call path tracing function is unique in a given BSS. This attribute cannot be modified.

Restrictions :

[M]:

activationObject
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMC-R. [bscId range] traceControl DP

[C]: [C]:

The bsc object is created. The traceControl object is not created for the bsc object. The Call tracing function is unique in a given BSS. This attribute cannot be modified.

Restrictions :

[M]:

active (passive) chain disk state


Description : Value range : Object : Chain disk state [Working, Degraded, Partially degraded, Not significant] bsc

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

57

Type : Release : Note :

DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain Dmux state


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : State of passive equipment of chain controlled by ECI board via alarm loops. [working, fault] bsc DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain ECI board state


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : Chain ECI board state [working, fault] bsc DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain REM link state


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : Used BSC/OMC-R link state [Working / Degraded / Partially degraded / Not significant] bsc DD V11 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain Sic board state


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Chain SIC board state [Number, card type (CCS7, SICD, SICX), internal state (working, fault)] bsc DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

58 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Release : Note :

V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain sic channels state


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : Chain SIC channel state (LAPD and SS7 channel state) [num card / type Card (Lapd sic, ss7 sic, X25 sic) / sic board port number / state Card (working/fault)] bsc DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain sls board state


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : SLS board state [working, fault] bsc DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain state


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : Chain state [nominal state, deteriorated state] bsc DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain switching capacity


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : Chain switching capacity [working, fault] bsc DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

59

active (passive) chain tcu accessibility


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : Chain TCU state [working, fault] bsc DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain ute board state


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : DDTI, BSCB, TSCB, and ALA board state [working, fault] bsc DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active rem link


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : BSC/OMC-R link used. [rem link 0, rem link 1] bsc DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

activeChain
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Identifier of the BSC active chain. [chainA / chainB] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

60 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Description:

Allows a return to the initial receiver processing for either peculiar cell configurations or both of them. In a first step, the parameter is a simple switch, but more than one bit should be allocated to handle later extensions (automatic recognition of configurations requiring the initial receiver processing). 0/1 (0 : disabled, 1: enabled) transceiver disabled DP V17 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000. It is visible only in GPRS.

Value range: Object: Default value: Type: Release: Note:

additional supervised PCM 0 Class 2


Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs:


Value range :

BTS 18000 S12000 S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS e-cell

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 0 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)

Object : Feature :

btsSiteManager GSM-R V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

61

Type : Release :

DP V12

additional supervised PCM 1 Class 2


Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs:


Value range :

BTS 18000 S12000 S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS e-cell

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 1 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)

Object : Feature : Type : Release :

btsSiteManager GSM-R V12 DP V12

additional supervised PCM 2 Class 2


Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs:

BTS 18000 S12000 S8000 BTS with BCF

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

62 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


Value range :

S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS e-cell

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 2 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)

Object : Feature : Type : Release :

btsSiteManager GSM-R V12 DP V12

additional supervised PCM 3 Class 2


Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs:


Value range :

BTS 18000 S12000 S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS e-cell

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 3 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)

Object : Feature : Type : Release :

btsSiteManager GSM-R V12 DP V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

63

additional supervised PCM 4 Class 2


Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs:


Value range :

BTS 18000 S12000 S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS e-cell

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 4 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)

Object : Feature : Type : Release :

btsSiteManager GSM-R V12 DP V12

additional supervised PCM 5 Class 2


Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs:

BTS 18000 S12000 S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

64 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


Value range :

S2000 H/L BTS e-cell

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 5 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)

Object : Feature : Type : Release :

btsSiteManager GSM-R V12 DP V12

additional unmasked users alarms Class 2


Description : Configuration of the new user (unprotected) external alarm loops controlled by the BTS (added to the already existing unprotected external alarms, see parameter "unmasked users alarms"). These additional alarms are detected by the RECAL board of the main cabinet. When an alarm is unmasked, it means the relevant equipment is monitored by the BTS. There are 24 additional user (unprotected) alarms on the S8002 BTS, 14 alarms on the S8000 Outdoor BTS, and 20 alarms on the S8000 Indoor BTS. A user alarm is used when an external item of equipment is inserted in the BTS (a microwave terminal for instance) and does not require a new DLU. Value range : [All alarms masked Alarm 1 unmasked Alarms 1 to 2 unmasked Alarms 1 to 3 unmasked Alarms 1 to 4 unmasked Alarms 1 to 5 unmasked Alarms 1 to 6 unmasked Alarms 1 to 7 unmasked Alarms 1 to 8 unmasked Alarms 1 to 9 unmasked Alarms 1 to 10 unmasked Alarms 1 to 11 unmasked Alarms 1 to 12 unmasked Alarms 1 to 13 unmasked Alarms 1 to 14 unmasked Alarms 1 to 15 unmasked

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

65

Alarms 1 to 16 Alarms 1 to 17 Alarms 1 to 18 Alarms 1 to 19 Alarms 1 to 20 Alarms 1 to 21 Alarms 1 to 22 Alarms 1 to 23 Alarms 1 to 24 Object : Feature : Type : Release : GSM-R V12 DP V12

unmasked unmasked unmasked unmasked unmasked unmasked unmasked unmasked unmasked]

btsSiteManager

addresses
Description : Definition of the OMC-R user(s) to whom the message is addressed. Select the all option to send the message to all OMC-R users. Select the users option to send the message to selected OMC-R users. Enter their names as defined in their profiles [case sensitive], separated by the "&" character. Object : Type : user message - Answer / New message DP

adjacent cell umbrella ref Class 3


Description : Identifier of the adjacentCelHandOver object that describes the neighbor cell towards which a directed retry will be triggered in BSC mode. [0 to 31] bts DP

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C/M]: [C/M]:

The preferential umbrella cell must refer to an existing adjacentCellHandOver object instance. When the function "directed retry" is made by interrogation of the BTS, the preferential umbrella cell must not be indicated.

Release :

V9

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

66 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

adjacentCellHandOver
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellHandOver object that defines a neighbor cell of a serving cell for handover management purposes. A bts object may reference up to thirty-two objects of this type. [0 to 31] adjacentCellHandOver Id

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C]:

The associated bts object is created and the adjacentCellHandOver object is not created for that object. The number of adjacentCellHandOver objects created for a bts object is limited to maxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configuration data). The (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. If the related BSC application database is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. The parent bsc object is unlocked. The adjacentCellHandOver object is created. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No mdScanner object refers to the adjacentCellHandOver object (no observation is running on that object). At least one adjacentCellHandOver object should be created for the bts object.

[C]:

[C/M]:


Release : V8

[C/D]: [M]: [M/D]: [D]:

[D]:

[D]:

adjacentCellHandOverId
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellHandOver object that defines re-selection management parameters for a serving cell. A bts object may reference up to sixty-four objects of this type. [0 to 63] adjacentCellHandOver

Value range : Object :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

67

Type : Release :

DP V14

adjacentCellReselection
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellReselection object that defines re-selection management parameters for a serving cell. A bts object may reference up to thirty-two objects of this type. [0 to 31] adjacentCellReselection Id

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C]:

The bts object is created and the adjacentCellReselection object is not created for that object. The number of adjacentCellReselection objects created for a bts object is limited to maxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configuration data). The parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. The adjacentCellReselection object is created. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

[C]:


Release : V8

[M]: [C/D]: [M/D]: [D]:

adjacentCellReselectionId
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellReselection object that defines re-selection management parameters for a serving cell. A bts object may reference up to sixty-four objects of this type. [0 to 63] adjacentCellReselection DP V14

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

68 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

administrativeState
Description : Activation state of an alarm criteria. An alarm criteria is created in unlocked state. The OMC-R Fault Management function ignores the inactive criteria when processing notifications. Value range : Object : Type : [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)] alarm criteria DP

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] atmRm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A bsc object is created in locked state. Object : Type : Checks : bsc DP

[M]:

If mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkC ode are defined for the bsc object, they match those of all dependent bts objects. The lapdLinkOMLRef attributes of all dependent transcoder objects refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber in the BSC.

[M]:

The following check is only performed when the bsc object is unlocked:

The dependent software object is created and its sWVersionRunning attribute defines a software version downloaded to the BSC disk.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

69

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A bscMdInterface object is created in unlocked state. When the object is locked, the BSC involved in the BSS/OMC-R link described by this object cannot communicate with the OMC-R. Object : Type : Checks : bscMdInterface DP

[M]:

The concerned bsc object is unlocked.

administrativeState
Description : ISO state A bts object is created in locked state. When the object is unlocked, the described cell will be working if the carrier TDMA frame (or BCCH frame) is successfully configured in the BTS and at least <minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames (including the carrier frame) are operating. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)] bts DP

[M]: [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked. It is not possible to change from "shuttingD own" to "unlocked" or from "locked" to "shuttingDown". It is not possible to change to "shuttingDown" if the application database of the related BSC is not built.

[M]:

The following checks are only performed when the bts object is unlocked:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

70 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

The associated handOverControl and powerControl objects are created for the bts object. The mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCode attributes match those of the parent bsc object when they are defined for that object. The frequencies in the cellAllocation list comply with the standardIndicator attribute value. The minNbOfTDMA attribute value is less than or equal to the number of transceiver objects created for the bts object. Cavity cell: The number of dependent transceiver objects equals the number of frequencies in the cellAllocation list. Eight channel objects are created for each dependent transceiver object if the cell works in normal mode, four channel objects are created for each dependent transceiver object if the cell works in extended mode.

The following apply:

Only one of them has a channelType equal to "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH". If the smsCB attribute of the bts object is "used", one of them has a channelType equal to "sdcc8CBCH" or "bcchSdcch4CBCH". Concentric cell: Two transceiverZone objects are created for the bts object. Each dependent transceiver object refers to a transceiverZone object (transceiver zone Ref is defined). All channel objects describing the cell BCCH or common channels (channelType = "cCH") depend on transceiver objects allotted to the outer zone. If frequency hopping is allowed in a zone (zone frequency hopping), it is allowed in the cell (btsIshopping). The frequencies used by the transceiver objects in a zone are separate from the frequencies used by the transceiver objects in the other zone.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

71

Releasing a bts object by shutting down sustains the calls supported by the described cell. The system actions are as follows:

Radio resources remain allocated until the calls end. Once a TDMA frame is released, a CLEAR CONFIG REQUEST message is sent to the partnered TRX/DRX. When all calls are terminated, the cell is released (administrativeState = "locked" and operationalState = "disabled") and the concerned TRX/DRXs and TDMA frames are unreachable (availabilityStatus = "{dependency}". It is recommended to bar direct access to the cell before initiating a soft release (cellBarred = "barred"), to prevent off-call mobiles from listening to the cell during the soft release phase, so they can immediately re-select another cell for receiving or sending calls. It is recommended also to forbid incoming handovers in the cell (incomingHandOver = "disabled"), to remove the cell from the list of eligible cells and, thus, avoid its selection if the BTS receives such a request. In order to speed up the soft release process, the Force HandOvers command can be used first to redirect the traffic currently handled by the serving cell towards its neighbor cells. If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase, all the calls supported by the cell are immediately released by the BSC. If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked and the availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status is undetermined. You must request the status of the bsc object on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

Notes :

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A btsSiteManager object is created in locked state. Object : Type : btsSiteManager DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

72 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks :

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

The following checks are only performed when the btsSiteManager object is unlocked:

The scheduled time slot (pcmTimeSlotNumber) is masked in the btsSiteManager object radioSiteMask. The radioSiteMask of all btsSiteManager objects sharing a same PCM link in the BSS are dissociated and their scheduled time slots are different and masked in their radioSiteMask. The bscSitePcmList list includes at least two items if the btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attribute is "true". All pcmCircuit objects referenced in the list (pcmCircuitBsc components) are created for the parent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface. One of them identifies a PCM link with a pcmCircuitBt sSiteManager reference in the range [0 to 3] for clock synchronization. The greatest bts object identifier must be lower than the maxNbOfCells value of the parent btsSiteManager object. The configRef attribute defines a DLU file downloaded to the BSC disk. The dependent software object is created and its sWVersionRunning attribute defines a software version downloaded to the BSC disk. If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked and the availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status is undetermined. You must request the status of the bsc object on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of data and the generation of the associated messages. [locked / unlocked] A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlock the object to start collecting data in the related BSC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

73

In that case, data collecting is stopped in the related BSC. However, current messages are stored by the BSC and notified to the OMC-R agent. Object : Type : Notes : callPathTrace DP

If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object, the BSC continues to send the current trace messages to the OMC-R agent, but no notifications are issued. If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object or on reaching the end-of-session criterion, it is automatically restarted whenever the callPathTrace object is unlocked. For instance, if the end-of-session criterion defines a period of time that elapsed, data collecting will restart for the entire period.

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] cc BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] cem BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : ISO state [locked / unlocked] controlNode BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

74 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DP V13

administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the transmission of the associated messages to the OMC-R manager. The administrativeState of an efd object is set by the user at object creation time and can be changed with the Modify command. Value range : Object : Type : [locked / unlocked] efd DP

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] g3BscEqp BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] hardware transcoder 3G BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] iem BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

75

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] interfaceNode BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Activation state of a repeated job A job object is created in unlocked state. When a job is set inactive, it is not run. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)] job DP

[M]:

The job is not running.

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state. It is set by the OMC-R agent. [locked (= restored log) / unlocked (= current log)] An unlocked log object describes a current log on the OMC-R agent disks. A locked log object describes a log restored on the disks. Object : Type : Note : log - Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] lsaRc BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

76 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the generation of processed alarms when out-of-range conditions are met. The administrativeState of an mdWarning object is set by the user at object creation time and can be changed with the Modify command. A change of state is effective when the OMC-R is restarted. Whatever the state of the object, the related notifications are always forwarded to the OMC-R manager. Value range : Object : Type : [locked / unlocked] mdWarning DP

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] mms BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] omu BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A pcmCircuit object is created in locked state. Object : pcmCircuit

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

77

Type : Checks :

DP

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A pcu object is created in locked state. Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Release : pcu GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A signallingLink object is created in locked state. Object : Type : Checks : signallingLink DP

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] sw8kRm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : ISO state [locked / unlocked] tmu BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

78 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DP V13

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of data and the generation of the associated messages. [locked / unlocked] A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock the object to start collecting trace data in the related BSC. Object : Type : Notes : traceControl DP

If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object, the BSC continues to send the current trace messages to the OMC-R agent, but no notifications are issued. If traced calls are not terminated when the object is locked, all trace information related to those calls will be lost, unless partial record generation was requested. In that case, only data that are not yet recorded will be lost. Trace data collecting is automatically restarted in the BSC whenever the traceControl object is unlocked.

administrativeState
Description : Value range :

ISO state [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)] A transceiverEquipment object is created in locked state.

Object : Type : Checks :

transceiverEquipment DP

[M]: [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked. It is not possible to change from "shuttin gDown" to "unlocked" or from "locked" to "shuttingDown". It is not possible to change to "shuttingDow n" if the application database of the related BSC is not built.

[M]:

The following checks are only performed when the transceiverEquipment object is unlocked:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

79

The lapdLinkOMLRef and lapdLink RSLRef attributes of the transceiverEquipment object refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber in the parent BSC. The related software object is created and its sWVersionRunning attribute defines a software version downloaded to the BSC disk.

Releasing a transceiverEquipment object by shutting down sustains the calls supported by the described TRX/DRX and the partnered TDMA frame. The system actions which may be carried out are the following:

To carry out a soft release. This action does not automatically cause a handover. By carrying out this action, the operator must wait for the end of the coms before the TRX/DRX changes to "blocked". To carry out a forced handover. A forced handover on the bts object will cause the DRX/TRX to change to "blocked" more quickly. If the TDMA frame affected by this operation has priority over other frames in the BSS, the BSC re-configures that frame on a different TRX/DRX and immediately transfers the current calls handled by the TRX/DRX being released. When all calls are transferred or terminated, the TRX/DRX is released (administrativeState = "locked" and operationalState = "disabled"), and the partnered TDMA frame is unreachable if it has not been reconfigured (availabilityStatus = "{dependency}".

Note :

If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase, all the calls handled by the TRX/DRX are immediately released by the BSC. If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked and the availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status is undetermined. You must request the status of the bsc object on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A transcoder object is created in locked state.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

80 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Type : Checks :

transcoder DP

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

The following checks are only performed when the transcoder object is unlocked:

All transcoder objects created for the same parent bsc object refer to lapdLink objects that use the same lapdTerminalNumber in the BSC. <maxTranscdBPerTransed> dependent transcoderBoard objects are created for the transcoder object.

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A transcoderBoard object is created in locked state. Object : Type : Checks : transcoderBoard DP

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

The following check is only performed when the transcoderBoard object is unlocked: The related software object is created and its sWVersionRunning attribute defines a software version downloaded to the BSC disk.

administrativeState
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : ISO state [locked / unlocked] trm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

81

administrativeState
Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)] An xtp object is created in locked state. Object : Type : Checks : xtp DP

[M]: [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked. It is not possible to change from "shuttin gDown" to "unlocked" or from "locked" to "shuttingDown". It is not possible to change to "shuttingDown" if the application database of the related BSC is not built.

[M]:

The BSC will refuse to unlock a terrestrial traffic circuit that could break the OMC channel connection down. Releasing an xtp object by shutting down sustains the call supported by the described terrestrial traffic circuit. The system actions are as follows:


Notes :

Any further attempt of the MSC to allocate the terrestrial circuit is refused. When the call is completed, the terrestrial circuit is released (administrativeState = "locked" and operationalState = "disabled"). All terrestrial circuits supported by a given PCM link can be softly released at the same time. If the PCM link supports a signaling link, it remains operating. If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase, the call supported by the terrestrial circuit is immediately released by the BSC.

agprsFilterCoefficient Class 3
Description : The load of each cell considered in dynamic AGPRS algorithm is filtered with a forgetting factor given by agprsFilterCoefficient. [0 to 100] % bts 0 (deactivates the feature in the cell at the PCU level).

Value range : Object : Default value :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

82 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DP V14

agprsHysteresis Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Note : Type : Release : Not used. [0 to 100] bts 0 For a BSC version later than V15, agprsHysteresis is not available at the OMC-R. DP V14

agprsThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Note : Type : Release : Not used. [not used] bts 0 For a BSC version later than V15, agprsThreshold is not available at the OMC-R. DP V14

agprsTsSharingProtection Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Note : Note : Protection Timer in case of BSC overload. [0 to 255] seconds pcu 0. Values from 0 to 9 are assimilated by PCU like 10. For a BSC version later than V15, agprsTsSharingProtect ion is not available at the OMC-R, and PCU automatically set it to 10. DP V14

Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

83

agpsTimer Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Duration of an A-GPS location. [0 to 255] seconds bsc 0 second DP V15 This parameter is optional.

aLAIntState
Description : Value range : The internal state of the BSC ALA board. [working / fault]


Object : Type : Note : DD

working .... The board is correctly configured. fault ... The board configuration was unsuccessful.

bsc and hardware BSC 12000HC

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

alarm criteria
Description : Value range : Active alarm configuration. [day configuration / night configuration / specific configuration / reference configuration] The active configuration is the alarm criteria configuration currently used by the OMC-R Fault Management function for fault processing. The names given to the alarm operating configurations (day / night / specific) only serve to identify them. Any configuration may be activated at any time by users, but only one can be active at a time. Object : omc

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

84 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Notes :

DP

When the OMC-R is started up or the active server is switched over, the OMC-R activates the configuration the name of which corresponds to the time of the day that start-up or switchover occurs. The following apply: The daytime configuration is activated when the event occurs between 9:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. (static configuration data). The nighttime configuration is activated when the event occurs between 6:00 p.m. and 9:00 a.m. (static configuration data).

The active configuration can be forced by users at any other time. If a problem occurs while loading the selected configuration, the OMC-R uses the reference configuration and sends a warning message to the user.

alarm criteria
Description : Value range : Identifier of an alarm criterion on the OMC-R. [0 to 99 999] (manufacturer configuration) Users can lock / unlock alarmcriteria which IDs are lower than 100 000. Users can create / modify / delete criteria, which IDs are greater than or equal to 100 000. Object : Type : Checks : alarm criteria Id

[C]: [C]: [M/D]:

The alarm criteria identifier is in the range [100 001 to 2 147 483 646]. The alarm criteria does not exist in the operator configurations. The alarm criteria exists in the operator configurations.

alarm number
Description : To select alarms with a given number. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm logs - Filter DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

85

alarm severity
Description : To select alarms according to the severity. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [critical / major / minor] Alarm logs - Filter DP

alarm state
Description : To select alarms according to the acknowledgement state. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [acknowledged / unacknowledged] Alarm logs - Filter DP

alarmDuration
Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Alarm hold duration when a counter is involved. [0 to 345600] second alarm criteria To define if a counter is associated with the criterion. DP

alarmListConverter
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : State of the TCU converters [working / failed] transcoder DD This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

alarmListFan
Description : Value range : Type : Note : State of the TCU fans [working / failed] DD This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

86 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

alarmListFanBoard
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : State of the TCU fan boards [working / failed] transcoder DD This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

alarmListVCOTension
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : State of the TCU VCO voltage. [working / failed] transcoder DP This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

alarmPriority
Description : Value range : Alarm processing priority. [CLEARED / critical / indeterminate / major / minor / warning] There are six defined priority levels which provide an indication of how it is perceived that the capability of the managed object has been affected. The following definitions are used:

CLEARED: ......

The cleared severity level indicates the clearing of one or more previously reported alarms. This alarm clears all alarms for this managed object that have the same type, probable cause, and specific problems. The critical severity level indicates that a service affecting condition has occurred and an immediate corrective action is required. The indeterminate severity level indicates that the severity level of the service affecting condition cannot be determined.

critical: .........

indeterminate: ....

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

87

major: ..........

The major severity level indicates that a service affecting condition has developed and a deferred corrective action is required. The minor severity level indicates the existence of a non-service affecting fault condition and that a corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more serious fault. The warning severity level indicates the detection of a potential or impending service affecting fault, before any significant effects have been felt. An action should be taken to further diagnose and correct the problem in order to prevent it from becoming a more serious service affecting fault.

minor: ..........

warning: .........

Object : Type :

mdWarning DP

algoId class 2
Description : Definition of the speech algorithms used in a TCB. This parameter is a component of the algorithm Used attribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [full rate / enhanced full rate] transcoderBoard full rate DP V8

algorithm Used Class 2


Description : Value range : Speech processing algorithm parameters used in the SPU processors of a TCB. algoId = [full rate / full rate & enhanced full rate], powerDownLink = [-15 to +15] dB, powerUpLink = [-15 to +15] dB.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

88 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


Object : Type : Checks : DP

algoId .......... powerDownLink ... powerUpLink .....

speech algorithms used power gain on the downlink power gain on the uplink

transcoderBoard

[C/M]: [C/M]:

The algoId component contains "full rate". The algoId component also contains "enhanced full rate" if the parent transcoder object version attribute value is "TCB_2".

Release :

V8

allocationState
Description : Value range : TDMA frame allocation state [available / not available / not significant]

available .................

The SACCH FILLING messages containing the SYS INFO 5 and 6 have been acknowledged by the BTS. The SACCH FILLING messages containing the SYS INFO 5 and 6 have not been acknowledged by the BTS. The SACCH FILLING messages containing the SYS INFO 5 and 6 have not been sent to the BTS by the BSC.

not available ....

not significant ....

Object : Type :

transceiver DD

allocPriorityTable Class 3
Description : Table of conversion of the 18 external priorities (14 are GSM external priorities) to 13 internal priorities. (See Default value below.) [0 to 7] (BSS V14 and V12) "0" defines the highest priority, [0 to 12] (BSS V15) "0" defines the highest priority. bts WPS queuing management (22463)

Value range : Object : Feature :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

89

Default value : Type :

BSS V15: 0 8 9 10 11 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BSS V12 or V14: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DP

allocPriorityThreshold Class 3
Description : Number of free TCHs needed for processing a TCH allocation request with an internal priority higher than 1. These channels are reserved to allocation requests with a maximum internal priority (priority 0). The TCH allocation is performed according to this algorithm: Number of free TCH = 0 TCH re quest of priority 0 TCH re quest of priority > 0 - queueing if defined or - reject - queueing if defined or - reject 1 Number of free TCH allocPriorityThreshold TCH allocated Number of free TCH > allocPriorityThreshold TCH allocated

- queueing if defined or - reject

TCH allocated

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

[0 to 2147483646] bts 0 DP

allocPriorityTimers Class 3
Description : Table of timers defining the maximum queuing time of TCH allocation requests (public and WPS requests), according to the internal priority. [List of 8 elements for BSS V12 and V14]: [0-255] seconds [List of 13 elements for BSS V15]: [0-255] seconds bts WPS queuing management (22463) For BSS V15: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 28 28 28 28 28 For BSS V12 and V14: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DP

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

90 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

allocWaitThreshold Class 3
Description : Table of thresholds defining the maximum number of TCH allocation requests queued (public and WPS), according to their internal priority. [List of 8 elements for BSS V12 and V14]: [0-63] [List of 13 elements for BSS V15]: [0-63] bts WPS queuing management (22463) For BSC V15: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 For BSS V12 and V14: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DP

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type :

allOtherCasesPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of TCH allocation requests with cause "other cases". This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

amrAdaptationSet Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for the adaptation mechanism. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the bts object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Int [0 to 3] bts 0 DP V14

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

91

Note : Note :

This parameter is available for all BSCs 3000 and applicable to versions earlier than V15.1.1. For a V15.1.1 BSC, amrAdaptationSet is replaced by the following parameters: amrDlFrAdaptationSet, amrDlHrAdaptationSet, amrUlFrAdaptationSet, and amrUlHrAdaptationSet. Refer to these entries in this dictionary. amrAdaptationSet is however present at the OMC-R.

amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL Class 3
Description : Downlink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocation in the inner zone. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Int [-110 to -47] handOverControl -80 to -79 dB DP

057CO01

- amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL >= concentAlgoIntRxLev where concentAlgoIntRxLev is intRxLev in the ConcentAlgoData sequence of concentAlgoData attribute.

Release : Note :

V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrDirectAllocIntRxLevUL Class 3
Description : Uplink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocation in the inner zone. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Int [110 to 48] handOverControl -80 to -79 dB DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

92 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Release : Note :

V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrDirectAllocRxLevDL Class 3
Description : Downlink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocation. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Int [-110 to -47] handOverControl -80 to -79 dB DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrDirectAllocRxLevUL Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the downlink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocation. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Int [-110 to -47] handOverControl -80 to -79 dB DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrDlFrAdaptationSet class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for the downlink AMR full rate adaptation mechanism. bts [0 to 3] DP AMR Optimizations

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

93

Default value : Release : Note :

0 V15 This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

amrDlHrAdaptationSet class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Release : Note : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for the downlink AMR half rate adaptation mechanism. bts [0 to 3] DP AMR Optimizations 0 V15 This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

amrFRIntercellCodecMode Class 3
Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intercell quality handover from a RR channel. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [12.2 / 10.2 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75] handOverControl 4.75 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrFRIntracellCodecMode Class 3
Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intracell quality handover FR to FR. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

94 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

[12.2 / 10.2 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75] handOverControl 4.75 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrHRIntercellCodecMode Class 3
Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intercell quality handover from an HR channel. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [7.4 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75] handOverControl 4.75 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrHRToFRIntraCodecMode Class 3
Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intracell quality handover from AMR HR to FR. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [7.4 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75] handOverControl 6.7 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

95

amriRxLevDLH Class 3
Description : This attribute is the downlink RxLev threshold in case of AMR FR intracell handover. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [-110 to -47] handOverControl -75 to -74 dB DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amriRxLevULH Class 3
Description : This attribute is the uplink RxLev threshold in case of AMR FR intracell handover. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance in unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Int [-110 to -47] handOverControl - 75 to - 74 dB DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrReserved1
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note 1: See information contained in the Attention paragraph below. [0 to 2] handOverControl 0 DP V16 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

96 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

ATTENTION
Parameter range evolution for amrReserved 1 is as follows:

0: RATSCCH procedure enabled (default value) 1: RATSCCH procedure disabled - initial Full Rate ACS is optimistic 2: RATSCCH procedure disabled - initial Full Rate ACS is pessimistic

amrReserved2 Class 3
Description : AMR L1m deactivation for: AMR FR intracell handover and AMR quality inter-cell handover and AMR power control mechanism. This parameter is available at the OMC-R level, managed by all NRPs, except the AMR activation NRP and this parameter is not managed by the CT2000 and the SDO. Value range : [0 to 3] Deactivations for this parameter are: Value 0 (default): AMR L1m algorithms are used. Value 1: AMR FR intracell handover and AMR quality inter cell handover are deactivated, but the AMR power control is activated. Value 2: AMR FR intracell handover and AMR quality inter cell handover are activated, and the AMR power control is deactivated. Value 3: AMR FR intracell handover, AMr quality inter cell handover and the AMR power control are deactivated. Object : Type : Release : Note : handOverControl DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrUlFrAdaptationSet class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for the uplink AMR full rate adaptation mechanism. bts [0 to 3] DP AMR Optimizations 0

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

97

Release : Note :

V15 This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

amrUlHrAdaptationSet class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Release : Note : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for the uplink AMR half rate adaptation mechanism. bts [0 to 3] DP AMR Optimizations 0 V15 This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1

answerPagingPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of TCH allocation requests with cause "reply to paging". This priority is used in signaling mode on TCH only. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

architecture
Description : Architecture of the OMC-R agent in terms of servers. It is provided by the OMC-R agent. The standard configuration is "one active with one passive" and the basic configuration is "one active without passive". Value range : [dual servers but passive not running dual servers running single server running] md - Display DP

Object : Type : Checks :

[M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

98 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

assignRequestPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of TCH allocation requests with cause "immediate assignment". This priority is used when radio resource allocation queueing is not requested by the MSC or not authorized in the BSS (refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in the Dictionary). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

associatedInterface Class 0
Description : Value range : Interface on which a LAPD link is used. [Abis / Ater / Agprs] A LAPD link used on the Abis interface carries BTS signaling. A LAPD link used on the Ater interface carries TCU signaling. A LAPD link used on the Agprs interface carries PCU signaling. Object : Feature : Type : Checks : lapdLink GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP

[C]:

The value is whether "Abis" or "Agprs" if the lapdConcentration attribute value is "disabled". The value is whether "Abis" or "Ater" if the lapdConcentration attribute value is "enabled". The "Agprs" value is only allowed for PCU lapdLink interface from V12 BSCs. This attribute cannot be modified.

[C]:

[C]: [M] :

Restrictions : Note :

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

99

associatedLog
Description : Identifier of the log object that describes the associated records on the OMC-R agent disks. For an mdScanner object, this attribute is displayed provided mdLog = "logged". Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions : [0 to 2147483646] callPathTrace, mdScanner, traceControl - Display DI

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

associatedTMUPosition
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Gives the number of the TMU hosting the active associated core process (hardware slot position). [Shelf Number (0 or 1) and Slot Number (from 1 to 15) of the TMU] btsSiteManager, signallingLinkSet, transcoder and pcu BSC 3000 cell group management/load balancing - stage 1 (139111). None DD V13 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

aterLapd
Description : Value range : ATER LAPD distribution and status. List of ATER LAPD descriptions [pcmAterId, tsAterId, lapdIsPresent, lapdIsOpened], with: pcmAterId: 0 to 65535 tsAterId: 0 to 65535 lapdIsPresent: yes / no lapdIsOpened: yes / no lsaRc BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement DD V16

Object : Feature : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

100

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

atmRm
Description : The ATM RM (ATM Resource Module), which provides a SONET OC-3c (Optical Carrier level 3c) interface to allow direct connection between the Interface Node and the Control Node. [0 to 2147483646] atmRm DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

atmRmId
Description : Identifier of the atmRm object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. [0 to 2147483646] atmRm DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

attenuation Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Attenuation due to coupling system losses. This value depends on the BTS configuration. [0 to 14] dB btsSiteManager Depends on the equipment. DP V9 If the attenuation parameter is set [0 to 14], then the DLU attenuation is replaced by the OMC attenuation parameter.

auditBdaStatus
Description : Value range : Synthetic result of a BDA audit [no difference / some differences (see list below) / many differences (see partial list below)] The information is stored in sessions logs.

no difference ......

Object instances in BDA and BDE are identical.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

101

some differences ...

Less than ten object instances are different in BDA and BDE (they are listed in the session logs). More than ten object instances are different in BDA and BDE (the first ten are listed in the session logs).

many differences ..

Object : Type :

bsc DI

auditState
Description : Whether an audit is in-progress in the BSC. Access to a BSC are blocked whenever an audit of its application database is in-progress (Audit BDA command). This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directly modified by users. When an audit is in-progress in a BSC, all configuration commands involving the BSS are forbidden. Value range : Object : Type : [inProgress / notInProgress] bsc DI

authorised user
Description : List of the users authorized to copy, display and run the command file. Enter their names as defined in their profiles and use the "&" character to separate them. commandFile DP

Object : Type :

availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state Refer to the operationalState entries in the Dictionary for a description of possible state parameter combinations for these objects: administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState. Value range : Object : [{} / {disabled} / {failed} ] bsc, bscMdInterface, lapdLink, pcmCircuit, signallingLink, transcoder transcoderBoard.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

102

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Note :

DD The availabilityStatus parameter is only available for lapdLink OML and lapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC.

availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state Refer to the operationalState entries in the Dictionary for a description of possible state parameter combinations for these objects: administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [{} / {disabled} / {failed} / {unknown}] btsSiteManager, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, DD If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked and the availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status is undetermined. You must request the status of the bsc object on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state The "enabled" state for a bts object is a transitory state that follows a soft release request. Refer to the administrativeState entry related to the bts object in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [{} / {dependency} / {failed} /{unknown}] bts DD If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked and the availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status is undetermined. You must request the status of the bsc object on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

availabilityStatus
Description : Value range : Object : Type : ISO state {notInstalled}/{}/{failed}/{dependency}/{}] atmRM, cc, cem, controlNode, iem, interfaceNode, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

103

availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state The "logFull" state applies to a log object that describes an observation or trace log, and indicates that the saving message directory on the OMC-R agent disks is full. Refer to the capacityAlarmThreshold entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : [{} / {logFull}] log DD

availabilityStatus
Description : Value range : Object : Type : ISO state [{} (the associated observation is running) / {offDuty} (the associated observation has ended)] mdScanner DD

availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary for a description of possible state parameter combinations: administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}] pcu GPRS (SV407 - V12) DD V12

availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary for a description of possible state parameter combinations: availabilityStatus and operationalState. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}] pcusn GPRS (SV407 - V12) DD V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

104

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary for a description of possible state parameter combinations: administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState, and usageState. A state change notification is issued after the soft release. Value range : Object : Type : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}] xtp DD

available synchronization sources


Description : Available synchronization sources gives all the synchronization signals detected by the BTS, regardless of the BTS current synchronization mode and of the synchronization mode selected at the OMC. This parameter is used in response of the "Display Data Information" (normal) action. Value range : [Abis synchronization only / Abis + external synchronization source coming from a master BTS / Abis + GPS connection detected] bts BTS synchronization

Object : Feature :

averagingPeriod Class 2
Description : Number of SACCH multi-frames over which the interference levels are averaged. This averaging will be performed immediately before the transmission of the RESOURCE INDICATION message. This attribute, together with the "thresholdInterference" attribute, allows users to manage interferences in radio cells. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 255] SACCH frame (1 unit = 480 ms on TCH, 470 ms on SDCCH) handOverControl 20 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

105

B
backup manager addresses
Description : Object : Type Restrictions : Backup addresses of the OMC-R manager that receives the messages. They are provided by the manager. efd - Display DI

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

backupServer
Description : Name of the backup OMC-R agent server if any. It is provided by the OMC-R agent. In a mono-server configuration with redundancy, this attribute is not filled in. Object : Type : md - Display DP

baseColourCode Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Base station Color Code assigned to a neighbor cell. The (BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC. [0 to 7] adjacentCellHandOver DP

[M]:

Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

baseColourCode Class 2
Description : Base station Color Code assigned to a serving cell. It is broadcast on the cell SCH and is used to distinguish cells that share the same BCCH frequency. The (BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC. The information is broadcasted on the cell SCH. Several BCCs may be assigned to a same BTS. Hence, different codes can be allotted to cells that may have overlapping areas (adjacent cells).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

106

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a 6-bit code: bits 6-5-4 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 3-2-1 = BCC (Base station color code). At cell level, the NCC bits can be used to increase BCC color possibilities when the NCC is not needed. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 7] bts DP

[M]:

Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFreq uency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. Modification of bCCHFrequency, baseColourC ode and networkColourCode is forbidden while interference matrix is running.

[M]:

batteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2
Description : Value range : Whether BRC (Battery Remote Controller) board is present or not. [0, 1]


Object : Default value : Type : Release : 0 DP

0: Not present 1: present

btsSiteManager

V15

bCCHFrequency Class 3
Description : Radio frequency allocated to a neighbor cell BCCH in the network frequency band. The information is broadcast on the serving cell SACCH. Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network), [955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R), [975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network), [128 to 251] (GSM 850 network), [955 / 974] for GSM-R, [975 / 1023] / [0] for GSM-R (EGSM BCCH), [1 / 55] for GSM-R (PGSM BCCH).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

107

Note : Object : Type : Checks :

The standardIndicator for GSM-R values is Rgsm. adjacentCellHandOver DP

[M]:

Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. The bCCHFrequency value must be set according to the standardIndicator attribute. For an adjacentCellHandOverNortel object instance, the bCCHFrequency can take one of the following values: [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network), [0 to 124] or [975 to 1023] (E-GSM), [128 to 251] (GSM 850 network), [0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] (GSM-R).

[M]: [C/M]:

[C]:

Cannot create a new instance of adj acentCellUTRAN if the number of different bCCHFrequency parameters in adjacentCellHandOver object is equal to 32. The purpose of this check is to forbid UTRAN neighbour cell creation if 32 different BCCH frequencies are already declared for GSM neighbour cells. Cannot set the bCCHFrequency parameter on an adjacentCellHandOver object to a 32nd different value in the subset of adjacentCellHandOver instances belonging to the same upper bts if at least one instance of adjacentCellUTRAN is created. The purpose of this check is to forbid existence 32 different BCCH frequencies on the GSM neighbour cells under the same GSM cell if at least one UTRAN neighbour cell is declared.

[C]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

108

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[M]:

Modification of bCCHFrequency, baseColourC ode and networkColourCode is forbidden while interference matrix is running. Customer should not validate IM activation on a cell with 32 instances of adjacentCell (existing IM control) or with 31 instances of adjacentCell with 31 different values of bCCFFrequeny parameter if at least one instance of adjacentCellUTRAN is created. The purpose of this check is to warn customer on IM activation if at least one UTRAN neighbour cell is declared and the cell already has real neighboring cells with 31 different BCCH.

[C]:

bCCHFrequency Class 3
Description : Radio frequency used for selection and re-selection management. The information is broadcast on the serving cell BCCH. Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network), [955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R), [975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM network), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network), [128 to 251] (GSM 850 network), [955 / 974] for GSM-R, [975 / 1023] / [0] for GSM-R (EGSM BCCH), [1 / 55] for GSM-R (PGSM BCCH). The standardIndicator for GSM-R values is Rgsm. adjacentCellReselection DP

Note : Object : Type : Checks : Checks :

[M]: [C/M]:

The bCCHFrequency value must be set according to the standardIndicator attribute. For an adjacentCellReselection object instance, the bCCHFrequency can take one of the following values: [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network), [0 to 124] or [975 to 1023] (E-GSM), [128 to 251] (GSM 850 network), [0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] for GSM-R.

Note :

An adjacentCellReselection object can use the same BCCH as the serving cell to which it is associated. This allows a mobile to immediately recover the cell on which it was

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

109

"camping" after being switched off, then switched back on, and is especially useful in the selection process.

bCCHFrequency Class 2
Description : Radio frequency allocated to a cell BCCH (Broadcast Control CHannel) in the network frequency band. The information is broadcast on the cell SACCH. The BCCH frequency is automatically assigned to the radio time slot carrying the cell BCCH when the cell is brought into service (absoluteRFChannelNo attribute of the channel object describing the carrier TDMA frame TS0). It is broadcast to the radio time slot whenever modified. The BCCH is used by the BTS for broadcasting cell related system information to MS, such as frequency band and list of frequency channels used, authorized services and access conditions, list of neighbor cells, and radio parameters (maximum transmission strength, minimum reception strength, etc.). Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network), [955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R), [975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM network), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network), [128 to 251] (GSM 850 network), [955 / 974] for GSM-R, if at least one of the cell allocation ERFCN is in the [955 / 974] range, the BCCH must be also included within this range. [975 / 1023] / [0] (GSM-R (EGSM BCCH)), [1 / 55] (GSM-R (PGSM BCCH)). The standardIndicator for GSM-R values is Rgsm. bts DP

Note : Object : Type : Checks :

[M]: [M]:

The BCCH frequency is included in the cellAllocation list. Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. For a dualband cell, the bCCHFrequency attribute must be in the primary band of frequencies.

[M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

110

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

bckgDLLayer3WindowSize Class 3
Description : Anticipation window size to be used in the context of BTS background downloading. It is used by SPR for BTS Abis downloading. [1..8] bsc 1 BSC 3000 support of BTS background downloading DP V16 This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only.

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note :

bdaNewBscState
Description : Value range : Current bsc state related to the new BDA [ready for on-line reset / running on-line reset / waiting for on-line build / waiting for software change / waiting for Bda change / running software change / running Bda change / waiting for end of probative phase / { }] bsc DI This attribute is modified by the OMC-R agent when processing "end of probative phase", "Activate New BDA", "On line reset BDA", or "On-line reset cancel" actions or receiving an unsolicited message sent by the BSC. This attribute is NULL { } as long as the BSC has not been connected to the OMC-R agent. Note : For a V10 BSC, this attribute is always NULL { }. The different states are obtained according to the following:

Object : Type : Remark :

"ready for on-line reset": This state is reached after the following occurrences: BSC complete restart "end of probative phase" or BDA "new" activation or reset on-line cancel succeeded

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

111

partial or complete spontaneous BSC restart BSC operating command aborted


Release :

"running on-line reset": BSC reset on-line is being executed "waiting for on-line build": BSC reset on-line has succeeded "waiting for software change": "BDA version" reset on-line has succeeded "waiting for Bda change": "BDA edition" reset on line has succeeded "running software change": BSC Type 5 EFT activation is being executed "running Bda change": BSC BDA "new" activation is being executed "waiting for end of probative phase": BSC Type 5 EFT activation has succeeded

V11

bdaSelected
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Remark : Current BSC Application Database (BDA) [running / new] bsc DI This attribute is modified by the MD-R when processing "On line reset BDA" actions or receiving a BSC spontaneous event. This attribute is set "running" at the bsc object instance creation For a V10 BSC, this attribute is never modified and its value is "running". Note : The different states are obtained according to the following:


Release :

"new": BSC upgrades with prototype BDA change "running": BSC upgrades without prototype BDA change

V11

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

112

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

bdaState
Description : Whether the BSC application database (BDA) is built. No transactions with a BSC can be implemented prior to building its application database. When a bsc object is created or following a user Off line reset BDA command, the value of this attribute is "not built". This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directly modified by users. It is updated by the system after a user Build BDA command. Value range : Object : Type : [built / not built / inconsistency] bsc DI

bdaVersionBuild
Description : Version number of the BSC application database for rebuilding purposes. When the BSC is initialized or following a user Off line reset BDA command, the value of this attribute is "0" (BDA not built). The BSC then sends a "build database request" message, indicating that its database is defective and needs rebuilding. By issuing a Build BDA command, the user informs the OMC-R that the BSC database must be regenerated. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [1 to 254] bsc - Build BDA DP

[A]:

If the command follows a BSC architecture change, the new architecture complies with the information in the last "build database request" message received from the BSC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

113

bdaVersionNumber
Description : Current version number of the BSC application database. "0" means that the BDA is not built. Once the user has built or rebuilt the BDA, this attribute is assigned the bdaVersionBuild value sent with the user build command. If the BDA is being regenerated following an On line reset BDA command, this attribute gives the user the version number of the BDA currently used by the BSC. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 254] bsc DD

beacBatteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Whether the optional equipment Battery Remote Controller (BRC) is present or absent in S8000 outdoor or S8002. [Present, Absent] btsSiteManager DP V15

beginning date
Description : To select call monitoring data recorded on that date and thereafter. Do not fill in if information produced from the start is displayed. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss] Call monitoring - Display SDO DP

[A]:

beginning date is on or before end date.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

114

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation reports to cumulate. Observation data accumulating starts with the information contained in the last observation message collected in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date> , <time>] Display custom report DP

[A]: [A]:

beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime. The defined period is less than or equal to six hours.

beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation report to edit default is the current date and time). The report displays the information contained in the last observation message generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Note : [<date>,<time>] Display raw report DP

[A]:

beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.

If no permanent observation has been received within the specified period, a message is displayed.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

115

beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the available permanent observations to list (default is the current date and time). The first listed report is the last observation report generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date> , <time>] List available permanent observations DP

[A]:

beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.

beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the available temporary observations to list (default is the current date and time). The first listed report is the last observation report generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date> , <time>] List available temporary observations DP

[A]:

beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.

beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation messages to list (default is twelve days before beginSearchTime). The last listed message is the first observation message generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : [<date> , <time>]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

116

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Type : Checks :

List observation messages DP

[A]:

beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.

bEPPeriod Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : When EDGE is activated in the cell, the field is present and indicates the BEP filter averaging period to the MS. 0 to 15 bts EDGE traffic management (20231) 0 DP V15 Values 11 to 15 are reserved in tge 3GPP specification and shall not be used. 10 is the recommended value.

biZonePowerOffset Class 3
Description : Power offset between the inner TRXs and the outer TRXs of the adjacentCellHandOver object of a dualband, dualcoupling, or concentric cell. Offset added in calculation formula to draw up the list of eligible cells for handover towards a dualband, dualcoupling, or concentric cell inner zone to take into account the difference of propagation models between the two bands of the cells and the difference of transmission power between TRXs of the two zones due to either BTS configuration or coupling. Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note : [-63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver If main band = 850MHz 3dB If main band = 1900MHz -3 dB Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12) DP V12 This parameter is only available for S8000 or e-cell BTS DRX transceiver architecture.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

117

biZonePowerOffset Class 3
Description : Power offset between inner and outer TRXs of the handOverControl object of a dualband, dualcoupling, or concentric cell. [-63 to 63] dB handOverControl Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12) If main band = 850MHz 3 dB If main band = 1900MHz -3 dB DP This parameter is only available for S8000 or e-cell BTS DRX transceiver architecture.

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Note :

Release : V12

zoneTxPwrMaxReduction (inner zone)

bsc2GEqpt
Description : Identification and dynamic data describing the hardware configuration of BSC 12000HC, as well as an external alarm and actions on equipments related to it. [1 to 255] bsc2GEqpt DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

bsc2GEqptId
Description : Identifier of the bsc2GEqpt object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The only value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 12000HC. [1 to 255] bsc2GEqpt DP V13

Value range : Object : Type Release :

bsc3GEqpt
Description : Value range : Identification and dynamic data describing the hardware configuration of a BSC 3000 (global point of view). [0 to 0]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

118

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Type : Release :

bsc3GEqpt DP V13

bsc3GEqptId
Description : Identifier of the bsc3GEqpt object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The only value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. [0 to 0] bsc3GEqpt DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

bsc
Description : Identifier of a bsc object on the OMC-R. The bsc reference is part of all BSS configuration object identifiers. In all MMI commands, a bsc object can be referenced by name (bscName). When a bsc object is created and the referenced bscMdInterface object is unlocked, the system attempts to establish the BSS/OMC-R link connection. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [1 to 255] bsc Id

[C]:

The number of BSCs managed by an OMC-R is limited to maxBscPerNetwork (static configuration data). The referenced bscMdInterface object (bscMdInterfaceRef) is created. The BSC application database has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command (bdaState = "not built"). No mdScanner, traceControl, or callPathTrace object refers to the bsc object (no observation or trace function is active in the BSC).

[C]: [D]:

[D]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

119

bsc
Description : Identifier or name of a bsc object on the OMC-R. It defines the parent bsc object. Value range : Object : [1 to 255] adjacentCellHandover, adjacentCellReselection, bts, btsSiteManager, channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl, lapdLink, multiple site, pcmCircuit, powerControl, signallingLink, signallingLinkSet, signall ingPoint, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone, transcoder, transcoderBoard, xtp Id

Type : Checks :

[C]:

The bsc object is created.

bsc equipment name


Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BSC or TCU processor. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : [ddti / ala / eci / sicx / sicd / swm / cpue / O.M.N. communication / cabling and PCM cross connect / css7 / cpu486Se / sup / LAPD channel / signalling link / sls / tdti / tuc / internal PCM--TCU/ tcb / swe / swc / sw16 / tscb / msw / sic lapd (8 channels) / 2nd generation of TCB board / bscb / CPUE pentium 120 / mmu / mmu ide / cpum133 / cpue133 / sup2 / sls2 / pcu element/] Alarm and notification logs - Filter GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP "css7" identifies the BSC CCS7 boards; "signalling link" identifies the SS7 signalling links defined in the BSS and controlled by the CCS7 boards.

Object : Feature : Type : Remark :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

120

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

bscList
Description : List of the BSCs simultaneously monitored for further data processing by the SDO machine. Fill in the list with BSC reference numbers or names, up to maxBscPerNetwork. Do the following to create the list:

To add a BSC, fill in the bscNumber field with the reference number of the BSC on the OMC-R and click Add. To remove one or more BSCs, select the lines that display their reference numbers and click Remove.

When the list is complete, click the option matching the desired command, as follows:

Start: ........... Stop: ............ Transfer: ......... Processing: .......

starts collecting call monitoring data in the selected BSCs. stops collecting call monitoring data in the selected BSCs. transfers the BSC selected data files to the OMC-R. copies and processes the selected data files in the SDO machine. A set of resultant ASCII data files is produced, it is identified as the Level 1 set.

Value range : Object : Type Checks :

[1 to 255] Call monitoring - Commands (SDO) DP

[A]:

The number of BSCs in the list is limited to maxBscPerNetwork (static configuration data). Each BSC occurs once in the list.

[A]:

Notes :

The user must make sure that the BSCs in the list are created on the OMC-R since no checks are performed by the system. Processing: The call monitoring data files are meant to exist in the "/MD/ftam/bsc" directory on the OMC-R agent disks. For each BSC in the list, all files saved in that directory whose name begins with "SDO_CM_BSCnnn" will be processed: "nnn" is the

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

121

BSC reference number on the OMC-R (if bsc = 5, then nnn is read "005"). See NTP < 07 >.

The bscList needs not be defined when selecting the Query command which displays the activity state of the Call monitoring function in all the BSCs connected to the OMC-R.

bsc model
Description : Value range : To select messages issued by a given model of BSC. [bsc 12000 / bsc 3000] Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Object : Type : Note : Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP bsc30000 is the value that must be used for this parameter in case of a BSC 3000.

bscNumber
Description : Identifier [1 to 255] or name of a BSC to add to the bscList. Fill in this field and click Add to add the BSC to the list. Refer to the bscList entry in the Dictionary. Object : Type Call monitoring - Commands (SDO) DP

bscAlarmMask Class 3
Description : Configuration of the eight external alarm loops managed by the BSC ALA board. The alarm loop number "32+n" is monitored (not monitored) when the nth bit is set to 1 (0). 8 bit register numbered 0 to 7 bscAlarmMask = x x x x x x x x || alarm 39 alarm 32 Object : Default value : Type : Note : bsc 11111111 DP This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Value range :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

122

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

bscArchitecture Class 0
Description : Architecture of the BSC This attribute, together with the bsc object bscType attribute and the related software object sWVersionRunning attribute, defines the dimensioning constraints. Value range : [bsc6000 / bsc12000 / bsc30000]

Object : Type :

bsc30000 is the value that must be used for this parameter in case of a BSC 3000.

bsc DP

bscCapacityReduction Class 3
Description : This attribute allows to reduce the traffic on the BSC in order to protect the MSC against high traffic load. This attribute can only be modified if the bsc object instance is unlocked Value range : Object : Type : Release : Int [0 to 9] bsc, signallingPoint DP V14

bscChainId
Description : BSC processing chain(s) to reset. The consequences are as follows:

activeChain: ......

The active chain is reset and becomes passive, and the passive chain becomes active. Class 1 DPs are not re-configured. The passive chain is reset if it can be reached. Both chains are reset and the BSC is restarted. Class 1 DPs are re-configured.


Value range :

passiveChain: ..... bothChain: .......

[activeChain / passiveChain / bothChain]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

123

Object : Type

bsc - Kill chain Id

bscCounterList
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Identifier of the bscCounterList object defined with regards to the bsc object. [0 to 2147483646] bscCounterList Id V11

bscDateTime
Description : Current BSC reference date and time. This attribute is set by a user Synchronize bsc clock command, which broadcasts the current OMC-R agent date and time to the concerned BSC. It is also updated by the OMC-R agent in the following conditions:

A user Set command on the md object is run, which changes its externalTime attribute. The BSS/OMC-R link is established. The BSS/OMC-R link is reestablished after a breakdown. The statutory time is modified.

The OMC-R agent sends an alarm notification to the OMC-R manager when the time difference with a BSC drifts too much. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>,<time>] bsc DD

bscGprsActivation Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Flag used to activate the GPRS at BSC level. [disabled / enabled] bsc

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

124

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

GPRS (SV407 - V12) disabled DP V12

bscHighSwitchingCapacity Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : This parameter on the BSC enables the DS512 feature. [disabled / enabled] bsc BSC 3000 switching increase capacity (24436) disabled DP V15

bscHopReconfUse Class 1
Description : Whether frequency hopping reconfiguration is authorized in BTSs that use cavity coupling. When frequency reconfiguration is authorized, it allows to automatically reconfigure the hopping sequence whenever a frequency is lost or recovered in the BTS. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [true / false] bsc True DP

V8

[M]:

It can be "true" provided the btsHopReconfR estart of one of the related bts objects is also "true".

Release :

bscIPFirstAdr Class 2
Description : Indicates the first BSC IP address used for a bscMdInterface object instance. IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on the network used. This attribute is modified by the Manager.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

125

Value changes are notified to the Manager. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [7 to 15] String bscMdInterface DP

[C/M]:

The IP address must not already be used in a first address for another bscMDInterface object instance. The IP address must not already be used in a second address for another bscMDInterface object instance.

[C/M]:

Release : Note :

V13 For a BSC 12000HC, this parameter is available but it is not used.

bscIPSecondAdr Class 2
Description : Indicates the second BSC IP address used for a bscMdInterface object instance. IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on the network used. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [7 to 15] String bscMdInterface DP

[C/M]:

The IP address must not already be used in a first address for another bscMDInterface object instance. The IP address must not already be used in a second address for another bscMDInterface object instance.

[C/M]:

Release : Note :

V13 For a BSC 12000HC, this parameter is available but it is not used.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

126

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

bscList
Description : This attribute indicates for which BSC(s) the units of software has been downloaded. This attribute is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. This attribute cannot be modified by the Manager. This attribute is updated by the MD-R when a "sWDownload" command is performed successfully. Value changes are notified to the Manager. Value range : Object : Type : Release : [0 to 41] executableSoftware DP V13

bscLog
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : bscLog modelizes the management of the BSC internal log files. [bscVers13 +Inf] bscLog DP V13

bscLogId
Description : Identifier of the bscLog object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. Value range : Object : Type : Release : [bscVers13 +Inf] bscLog DP V13

bscMdInterface
Description : Value range : Object : Identifier of a bscMdInterface object defined with regard to the md object. [0 to 255] bscMdInterface

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

127

Type : Checks :

Id

[D]:

No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterface object.

bscMdInterfaceRef
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Restrictions : Identifier of the bscMdInterface object that describes the BSS/OMC-R link involving the BSC. [0 to 255] bsc DP

[C]: [M]:

No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterface object. This attribute cannot be modified.

bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber
Description : Release number of the BSC/OMC-R interface. It is provided by the BSC when the BSS/OMC-R link is physically established. If the release number does not match the software version running in the BSC (sWVersionRunning attribute of the related software object), the BSC issues a start-of-fault message. Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions : [11 to 99] bsc - Display DI

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Enables or disables dynamic barring of access class at the bsc level. [enabled / disabled] bsc disabled DP V9

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

128

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

bscName
Descriptio n: Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Release : Note : Reference name of a bsc object on the OMC-R. It begins with a letter and is case sensitive. [30 characters max.] bsc DP

[C/M]:

The name of a BSC is unique to the OMC-R.

V13 Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited. The valid symbols are: - letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z - digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 - minus sign: - undescore: _ - space

bscPcuPcmRefList Class 2
Description : Value range : List of BSC-PCU PcmCircuit. BSC 12000HC: [1 to 12] values in the range [0..167] BSC 3000 V15: [1 to 24] values in the range [0..167] BSC 3000 V16, E1 PCM: [1 to 32] values in the range [0..167] BSC 3000 V16, T1 PCM: [1 to 36] values in the range [0..167] pcu 18749 (PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC), (step 1: up to one full PCUSN shelf per BSC). DP

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

[C/M]: [C/M]:

All the referred pcmCircuit object instances of this attribute must exist. The referred pcmCircuit object instances must be of pcmAgprs type (pcmType attribute).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

129

Release :

[C/M]:

The referred pcmCircuit object instances must not be already referred to another pcu object instance on the same BSC.

V12

bscQueueingOption Class 1
Description : Whether radio resource allocation requests are queued in the BSC when no resources are available. If no resource is available when an allocation request is received and queueing is not allowed, the allocation request is refused immediately. Value range : [allowed (MSC driven) / forced (O&M driven) / not allowed]

allowed ..........

Resource allocation request queueing depends on the type of operation and indicative items provided with the messages received from the MSC. Resource allocation request queueing depends on the type of operation only. Resource allocation request queueing is forbidden.


Object : Default value : Type : Note :

forced ...........

not allowed .......

signallingPoint forced DP Allocation requests for immediate assignments and inter-bss, intra-bss, and inter-bts handovers are never queued. Only TCH resource requests (assignments request and intraCell handover) are queued depending on the priority of the demand and the number of request present in the queue.

bscRefList
Description : Value range : List of the bsc objects managed by a pcuSN object. V15: [0 to 12] values in the range [1 to 255] V16, E1/T1 PCM: [0 to 18] values in the range [1 to 255] The BSS system does not take into account the value range [17 to 18] for an E1 configuration. pcusn DP

Object : Type :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

130

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Feature : Release :

GPRS (SV407 - V12) V12

bscReset
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Requests a control node reset. [0 to 1] bsc3GEqpt DP V13

bscSitePcmList Class 2
Description : List of the PCM links allotted to a site on the Abis interface, up to maxPcmCPerBtsSM. Each link is identified by a (pcmCircuitBsc, pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager) pair that defines it on BSC end and BTS end. The Abis interface connects a BTS to a BSC through PCM links that are identified by the boards to which they are connected on both ends of the interface, that is DDTI boards on BSC end and DTI boards on BTS end. The following rule is applied:

A PCM link connected to DDTI board no.i in the BSC has a pcmCircuitBsc reference equal to "2i" or "2i+1" with regard to the BSC (each board manages two links at a time). Refer to Nortel GSM BSC Reference Manual. The same PCM link connected to DTI board no.j in the BTS has a pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager reference equal to "j" with regard to the BTS (each board manages one single link). Refer to Nortel GSM BTS Reference Manuals.

The number of pairs in the list sets the number of links allotted to the radio site. Value range : list (1..6) of (pcmCircuitBsc, pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager) pairs. Refer to pcmCircuitBsc and pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager entries for more information on their value ranges. Object : Type : btsSiteManager DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

131

Checks :

[C]:

The number of PCM links allotted to a site is limited to maxPcmCPerBtsSM (static configuration data). The list contains at least one pair, two if the btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attribute is "true". Each pair is unique in the list. Each pcmCircuitBsc reference matches a pcmCircuit object created for the parent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface (pcmType = "pcmAbis"). If a pcmCircuitBsc reference is changed, the current link is not used by any dependent transceiverEquipment object.

[C/M]:

[C/M]: [C/M]:

[M]:

bscTimeSlot
Description : PCM link (pcmCircuitId) and timeslot (timeSlotNumber) used by the radio timeslot on the Abis interface. The PCM link is identified on BSC end [0 to 47]. The information is displayed provided that the parent transceiver object is working. Refer to the operationalState entry for this object in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : pcmCircuitId [0 to 47] timeSlotNumber [1 to 31 (E1 PCM) or 24 (T1 PCM)] channel DD

bscType Class 0
Description : Type of the BSC. It defines the BSC configuration in terms of equipment boards. See the table listing BSC configuration types in NTP < 07 >. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [type1 / type2 / type3 / type4 / type5] bsc type5 DP

[M]:

number of SICD(8V) ports available in the BSC: See NTP < 07 >.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

132

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[M]: [M]: [M]:

number of PCM links connected to the BSC: See NTP < 07 >. number of sites managed by the BSC: See btsSiteManager entry in the Dictionary. The lapdTerminalNumber attributes of the dependent lapdLink objects comply with the number of SICD(8V) ports available in the BSC.

Note :

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

bscUsedAdr
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : BSC address actually used. This attribute is managed by the MD-R. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. [X25 / IP] bscMdInterface DP V13

bsCvMax Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Remark : Release : Number of packets left to transmit divided by the number of UL TS allocated to the MS. [1 to 15] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 1 DP bsCvMax is broadcasted in the system information. V12

bscX25PrefAdr Class 2
Description : X.25 priority address used by the BSC. It corresponds to the subscribers number in the X.25 network. [15 decimal figures max.] bscMdInterface $BSC{bscId}_X25P DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

133

Checks :

[C/M]:

The X25 address must not already be used in a preferential address for another bsc object instance. The X25 address must not already be used in a secondary address for another bsc object instance.

[C/M]:

Note :

For a BSC 3000, this parameter is available and visible on the OMC-R MMI, but it is not used.

bscX25SecAdr Class 2
Description : X.25 address used by the BSC as backup. It is identical to the priority address when there is no redundancy. It corresponds to the subscribers number in the X.25 network. [15 decimal figures max.] bscMdInterface $BSC{bscId}_X25S DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[C/M]:

The X25 address must not already be used in a secondary address for another bsc object instance. The X25 address must not already be used in a preferential address for another bsc object instance.

[C/M]:

Note :

For a BSC 3000, this parameter is available and visible on the OMC-R MMI, but it is not used.

bscX25UsedAdr
Description : X.25 outgoing address currently used by the BSC. This dynamic attribute allows the user to know the address selected by the system when the connection is established by bringing the link into service. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [15 decimal figures max.] bscMdInterface DD This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

134

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

bsPowerControl Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Whether BTS transmission power control is allowed at cell level. [enabled / disabled] powerControl disabled DP

bssMapT1 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. It is started on transmission of BLOCK or UNBLOCK by the BSC and canceled on receipt of BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE or UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [2 to 300] seconds bsc 5 DP

bssMapT4 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. It is started on transmission of RESET and canceled on receipt of RESET ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. On elapse, the BSC sends RESET. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [5 to 600] seconds bsc 60 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

135

bssMapT7 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. It is started on transmission of HANDOVER REQUIRED and canceled on receipt of HANDOVER COMMAND, RESET, RESET CIRCUIT, CLEAR COMMAND or HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [2 to 120] seconds bsc 7 DP

bssMapT8 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. It is greater than t3103 for all BTS object instances attached to the BSC. It is started on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND and canceled on receipt of CLEAR COMMAND sent by the MSC or HANDOVER FAILURE sent by MS. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 255] seconds bsc 15 DP

[C/M]:

bssMapT8 > t3103 for all BTS objects dependent on the BSC object.

bssMapT12 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. This timer is used with a Phase I MSC only. It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT by the BSC and canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [2 to 300] seconds bsc 5 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

136

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

bssMapT13 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. It is started on receipt of RESET sent by the MSC. On elapse, the BSC sends RESET ACKNOWLEDGE to the MSC. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [2 to 300] seconds bsc 32 DP

bssMapT19 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. This timer is used with a Phase II MSC only. It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT by the BSC and canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [2 to 300] seconds bsc 32 DP V8

bssMapT20 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. It is started on transmission of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK or CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK by the BSC and canceled on receipt of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE or CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [2 to 300] seconds bsc 32 DP V8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

137

bssMapTchoke Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handover management procedure. It is started by the BSC when the last neighbor cell in the list is rejected. On timer elapse, the BSC asks the MSC to provide a new list of eligible cells. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [1 to 255] seconds bsc 4 DP

bssSccpConnEst Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handover management procedure. It is set on transmission of CONNECTION REQUEST and canceled on receipt of CONNECTION CONFIRM or CONNECTION REFUSED. Value range : Object : signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14) signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15) Default value : Type : Checks : 5 DP [5 to 360, by steps of 5] seconds

[C/M]:

bssSccpConnEst parameters must have the same values for both A and Lb signallingLinkSet instances.

bssSccpInactRx Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(iar) triggered by the BSC in the SCCP inactivity detection procedure. It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTION CONFIRM or on receipt of any other message during the connection and canceled on receipt of any message. Value range : [2 to 30] minutes

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

138

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14) signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15) Default value : Type : Checks : 11 DP

[C/M]:

bssSccpInactRx parameters must have the same values for both A and Lb signallingLinkSet instances.

bssSccpInactTx Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(ias) triggered by the BSC in the SCCP inactivity detection procedure. It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTION CONFIRM or on transmission of any other message during the connection and canceled on transmission of any message. Value range : Object : [1 to 15] minutes signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14) signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15) Default value : Type : Checks : 5 DP

[C/M]:

bssSccpInactTx parameters must have the same values for both A and Lb signallingLinkSet instances.

bssSccpRelease Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(rel) triggered by the BSC in the SCCP management procedure. It is set on transmission of RELEASE and canceled on receipt of RELEASED COMPLETE or RELEASED. Value range : Object : [1 to 20] seconds signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14) signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15) Default value : 10

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

139

Type : Checks :

DP

[C/M]:

bssSccpRelease parameters must have the same values for both A and Lb signallingLinkSet instances.

bssSccpSubSysTest Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(state info) triggered by the BSC in the SCCP management procedure. It is set on transmission of SST and canceled on receipt of SSA. Value range : Object : [5 to 60, by steps of 5] seconds signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14) signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15) Default value : Type : Checks : 30 DP

[C/M]:

bssSccpSubSysTest parameters must have the same values for both A and Lb signallingLinkSet instances.

bsTxPwrMax Class 3
Description : Maximum theoretical level of BTS transmission power in a cell. The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the Abis CELL MODIFY REQUEST message.

For concentric cells, dualband cells and dualcoupling cells: The value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifier is equal to the value of bsTxPwrMax added to the value of DLU attenuation (depending on the coupling equipment type, that is for instance D, H2D, H4D, etc.) or Attenuation on the btsSiteManager (if Attenuation has a value), and reduced of the value of Zone Tx power max reduction of the transceiverZone. For PA: the value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifier must be between 31dB and 44dBm. This value range is valid for Radio Module (RM). For HePA: the value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifier must be between 34dB and 47dBm. This value range is

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

140

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

valid for High Power Radio Module (HPRM). For MePA: the value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifier between 33dB and 46dB. This value range is valid for Medium Power Radio Module (MPRM).

For mono zone cells:

Value range : Note : Object : Type : Checks :

The value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifier is equal to the value of bsTxPwrMax added to the value of DLU attenuation (depending on the coupling equipment type, that is for instance D, H2D, H4D, etc.) or Attenuation on the btsSiteManager (if Attenuation has a value). [2 to 51] dB The recommended value is 43 dB. powerControl DP

[M]:

For a normal cell, the use of the block edge channels must induce a cell power limitation to 40 dB for PCS networks, and 42 dB for GSM 850 networks. For a concentric cell, the use of the block edge channels in the large zone and in the small zone must induce a cell power limitation to 40 dB for PCS networks and 42 dB for GSM 850 networks (bsTxPwrMax zoneTxPwrMaxReduc) For a dualband cell and, the use of the block edge channels in the large zone and in the small zone must induce a cell power limitation to 40 dB for PCS - GSM850 networks and 42 dB for GSM850 - PCS networks (bsTxPwrMax zoneTxPwrMaxReduc) For a dualcoupling cell, the use of the block edge channels in the large zone and in the small zone must induce a cell power limitation to 40 dBm for PCS networks and 42 dBm for GSM850 networks (bsTxPwrMax - zoneTxPwrMaxReduc bizonePowerOffset)

[M]:

[M]:

[M]:

Note :

Some bsTxPowerMax values are not compatible with the effective power output by the BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

141

Remark :

For a GSM 1900 network (standardIndicator of bts object set to pcs1900), the MD-R checks the following: bsTxPwrMax < 32 (dB) when an edge frequency is defined for the cell (i.e. if the value is included in the cellAllocation attribute values). The use of edge frequencies leads to a cell power reduction. The list of edge frequencies is described in the MD-R configuration file, MD/base/config/boundEdge.cfg. This file is can be configured off-line. To update the database according to the list of edge frequencies, use the shell /MD/install/shell/cm_configBde.sh.

bts
Description : Identifier of a bts object defined with regard to a btsSiteManager object. All channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipment objects in a BSS are identified with regard to a bts object that defines the covering cell. In all MMI commands, a bts object can be referred to by the sequence "siteName.cellName" where siteName and cellName identify the covering site and the cell respectively by name. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 5] bts Id

[C]:

The number of cells managed by an OMC-R is limited to maxBtsPerNetwork (static configuration data). The maximum number of cells controlled by a BSC is as follows:

[C]:

BSC 12000HC T1 120 T2 120 T3 160 T4 160 T5 160

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

142

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[C]:

The number of cells attached to a radio site is limited to maxNbOfCells (attribute of the parent btsSiteManager object). The software object related to the parent btsSiteManager object is created. The mobileCountryCode and mobileNetwork Code attributes match those of the parent bsc object if they are defined for that object (cell CGIs must comply). The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute is defined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) and directed retry handovers are processed in BSC mode (directedRetryModeUsed). If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent btsSiteManager object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent btsSiteManager object is locked, and the bts object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No adjacentCellHandOver object refers to the bts object (the described cell is not used as a neighbor cell of another serving cell). No mdScanner object describing a temporary observation refers to the bts object (no observation is running on the described cell). No traceControl or callPathTrace object refers to the bts object (no tracing is running on the described cell).

[C]: [C]:

[C/M]:

[C]:

[D]:


Note :

[D]:

[D]:

[D]:

[D]:

All cells covered by a given radio site must be created in numerical ascending order and deleted in the reverse order.

bts
Description : Value range : Object : Identifier or name of a bts object. It defines the associated bts object. [0 to 5] adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection, channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl, powerControl, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

143

Type : Checks :

Id

[C]:

The bts object is created.

bts equipment name


Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BTS equipment. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : [[BTS main power / converterB/ converter C/ converterA/CSW1 / CSW2 / CSW1M/ TX / SYN / SYNO /ALAT / ALATO / DCC / DTI / RX splitter / TX splitter / antenna / column system RX / converter D / column system TX / door contact / door contact (S4000/S2000E) / fan system / RX fan / TX fan / cabinet fan / fans rack / MWT system / exchanger system / rectifier system (S4000/S2000E) / rectifier system 1 (S4000/S2000E) / rectifiers groups / distribution system / fuses system / breakers / battery system / temperature system / smoke detector / CSWM/SYNC/ALCO/DSC/PCMI / GTW / PCM0 / PCM1 / rectifier 48V / converter F / converter BCF / battery disconnected switch /cooler system /LNA / VSWR / user system / distribution box / battery cabinet / main breaker / diu / external alarm / external alarm (S4000/S2000E) /VGA/ DLNA/MNU/DCU/RX/ DBF / AMNU / DCU4 / DRX / FPRX / Lightning Protection / BCF Cabinet door / BCF Cabinet fan / SBCF / PA / AC power supply / DC power supply / transmit antenna / cabinet high temperature alarm/ cabinet low temperature alarm / EXTERNAL CONTACT ACCESS / drxmain reception chain / drx diversity reception chain / splitter output / high power module / splitter / low power RF module / rf supply module / CMCF / PCM / CPCMI / RECAL / rx splitterM / rx splitter D / combiner h4 lna / combiner h4 vswr / txFilter / combiner rx filter lna / combiner d vswr / rxMainConnector / rxDivConnector / dacsCooler / compact dacs cooler / compact distribution / PMNU / RDRX / PMOD / BTS Synchronisation / PSU / Heatsink / Preventive lightning protection / Battery / External Environment / SLTI / SALCO / not protected alarm / internal temperature / external temperature / Remote Tunable Cavity Combiner / Cavity /battery monitored / blower tray / S12000 rectifier / smoke detector (S4000/S2000E) / S12000 smoke detector / S12000 lightning protection / S12000 battery disconnected / S12000 cooler / Edge High PA / Edge DRX / Edge PA / CMCF phase 1 /CMCFphase2 /CMCFphase 3 /DRXND3/ ICM/ IFM/ABM / RM/ RM_PA / RM_TRX / HPRM / HPRM PA / HPRM TRX / MPRM / MPRM_TRX / MPRM_PA / TRX MAIN RECEPTION CHAIN / TRX DIV RECEPTION

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

144

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

CHAIN / DDM / DDM MAIN LNA / DDM DIV LNA / DDM 1 VSWR / DDM 2 VSWR / DDM_H2 / DDM_H2 MAIN LNA / DDM_H2 DIV LNA / DDM_H2 1 VSWR / DDM_H2 2 VSWR / TX FILTER / TX FILTER VSWR / TX FILTER H2 / TX FILTER H2 VSWR / SICS / ECU / TRX / H4] Object : Type : Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

bts list
Description : List of the cells involved in broadcasting the short message. Enter the (bsc, btsSiteManager, bts ) reference of each bts object. short message - Start broadcast DP

Object : Type : Checks :

[A]: [A]:

Each bts object in the list is created. Each bts object in the list is assigned a CBCH, that is there is one channel object in the set of transceiver objects dependent on the bts object whose channelType is "bcchSdcch4CBCH" or "sdcch8CBCH". No more than five short messages are being broadcast in the cells at that time.

[A]:

btsSMSynchroMode Class 2
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Checks : Type of site synchronization. btsSiteManager [normal / master / slave / gpsBurstSync, gpsTimeSync / masterGpsBurstSync / masterGpsTimeSync] DP Network Synchronization normal (synchronized on Abis link)

[C/M]:

slave, gpsBurstSync or gpsTime Sync values are allowed only if btsModel is S8000 CBCF, S12000, or BTS 18000. master, masterGpsBurstSync or masterGpsTi meSync values are allowed only if btsModel is S8000 CBCF or S12000.

C/M]:

Release : Note :

V15 This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000 V.15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

145

bts time between HO configuration Class 3


Description : Whether the HOPingpongTimeRejection timer can be used at bts level when processing handovers. Refer to bts object btstimeBetweenHOConfiguration and adjacentCellHandOver object hoPingpongTimeRejection attributes in this Dictionary of Parameters. Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : [0 / 1] bts General protection against ping-pong handovers (TF821 - V12) 0 DP V9

btsDescription
Description : BTS configuration description (BTS type, configuration, coupling system, etc.) corresponding to the transcription of configRef attribute. [chain of characters] btsSiteManager DI V10 It designates the maximum configuration of the configRef file loaded on one of the BTSs. But it does not necessarily corresponds to the configuration of the btsSiteManager object concerned.

Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note :

btsHopReconfRestart Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether hopping frequency reconfiguration is authorized on TX restart in a cell. [true / false] bts true DP

V8

[C/M]:

If the attribute value is "true", the bscHopReco nfUse attribute of the parent bsc object is also "true".

Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

146

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

btsIsHopping Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether frequency hopping is allowed in a cell. [hopping / noHopping / hoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8) / noHoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8)] bts Hopping DP

[M]:

If frequency hopping is allowed, the GSM "fhMgt" function is defined in the siteGsmFctList attribute of the parent btsSiteManager object. If it is disabled, no channel object dependent on the bts object is authorized to obey frequency hopping laws.

Note :

[M]:

The "xxxWithCarrierFilling" configuration means that the BTS covering the cell must use a TX for BCCH filling purposes. The following apply:

The BSC sends the information to the BTS in the Abis CELL CONFIGURATION REQUEST message. If the BTS does not have a redundant TRX/DRX, one of the operating TRX/DRXs is assigned to that purpose and the partnered TDMA frame is unreachable (refer to the operationalState entry for the transceiver object in the Dictionary). When this TRX/DRX is malfunctioning, the BTS re-configures the other TRX/DRXs. Users are then warned by the system, by means of a notification.

The "noHoppingWithCarrierFilling" configuration can be used in all BTSs, regardless of the coupling mode. The following apply:

Hybrid coupling: All cell TX configurations provide BCCH filling. Cavity coupling: Only the TX that transmits the cell BCCH frequency is configured to provide BCCH filling.

The "hoppingWithCarrierFilling" configuration can only be used in BTSs that use cavity coupling. The following apply:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

147

Hybrid coupling: The BTS refuses the configuration. Cavity coupling: All cell TX configurations provide self-frequency filling.

btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Enable or disable dynamic barring of access class at the bts level. [enabled / disabled] bts disabled DP V9

btsReserved3 Class 3
Description : Mean number of logical channels belonging to the large frequency reuse pattern and used at the same time for data communications. [-16 to +16] bts Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12) 0 DP V12

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

btsReserved4 Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Attribute reserved for future use. [-32768 to 32767] bts DP V12

btsSensitivity Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Target power needed for BTS decoding. This parameter has an influence on the power control efficiency. [0 to 255] bts

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

148

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note :

0 GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP V12 The power control function used is the Open Loop Control.

btsSensitivityInnerZone Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Minimum power needed for BTS decoding in the inner zone of a dual-band cell. [0 to 255] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 0 DP V12

btsSiteManager
Description : Identifier of a btsSiteManager object defined with regard to a bsc object. All bts, channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipment objects in a BSS are identified with regard to a btsSiteManager object that defines the covering radio site. In all MMI commands, a btsSiteManager object can be referred to by name (siteName). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] btsSiteManager Id

[C]:

The maximum number of radio sites controlled by a BSC depends on its type and architecture (numbers in ordinary brackets apply to a BSC that does not concentrate BTS LAPD signaling).

BSC 12000HC T1 28 (7) T2 60 (15) T3 92 (23) T4 124 (31) T5 147 (39)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

149

[C]: [C]:

The software object related to the parent bsc object is created. The referenced lapdLink object (lapdLinkOMLRef) is created for the parent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the referenced pcmCircuit objects (bscSitePcmList) are created for the parent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface (pcmType = "pcmAbis"). The bscSitePcmList list contains at least two pairs if the btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attribute is "true". If one of the pcmCircuit objects in the list describes a PCM link that is shared with another site in the BSS, the radioSiteMask of the two btsSiteManager objects are dissociated. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

[C]:

[C/M]:

[C]:

[C]: [D]:

[D]:

btsSiteManager
Description : Identifier or name of a btsSiteManager object. It defines the parent btsSiteManager object. It defines the parent btsSiteManager object. By definition, a radio site (btsSiteManager object) is related to a BSC, a radio cell (bts object) is related to a radio site, a TRX/DRX (transceiverEquipment object), a TDMA frame (transceiver object) and its radio time slots (channel objects) are related to a radio cell. In all MMI commands, the objects dependent on a btsSiteManager object can be identified at BSC or site level, whichever is the most convenient to users. Value range : [0 to 499]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

150

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object :

adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection, bts, channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl, po werControl, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone. Id The maximum number of sites supported by a BSC 3000 is 500. The system accepts values between 0 and 499 (inclusive).

Type : Note :

btsSiteManager model
Description : To select messages issued by a given model of BTS. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : [s2000 inDoor / s2000E inDoor / s2000E outDoor / s4000 inDoor / s4000C inDoor / s4000 outDoor / s4000 smart / s8000 inDoor / s8000 outDoor / s2000 Low Power O1 / s2000 Low Power O2 / s2000 Low Power S11 / s2000 High Power O1 / s2000 High Power O2 / s2000 High Power S11 / s8000 inDoor CBCF / s8000 outDoor CBCF / s2000 Low Power Enhanced Packaging O1 / s2000 Low Power Enhanced Packaging O2 / s2000 Low Power Enhanced Packaging 2O4 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging O1 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging O2 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging 2O4 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging S11 / e-CELL / s8002 outdoor CBCF O2 / s12000 inDoor / s12000 outDoor / BTS18000 inDoor / BTS18000 outDoor] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

Object : Type :

btsSiteManagerList Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : List of btsSiteManager objects attached to a multiple site object [0 to 146] multiple site DP

[C/M]:

Each btsSiteManager object is unique in the list and created for the parent bsc object.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

151

Note :

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the referenced btsSiteManager objects are locked.

The order in which the btsSiteManager objects are entered in the list must match the BTS chaining order, beginning with the BTS closest to the BSC.

btsThresholdHopReconf Class 2
Description : Minimum number of frequencies working in a cell to allow frequency hopping reconfiguration. If this attribute defines the nominal number of cell frequencies, the reconfiguration process is deactivated. Refer to the btsHopReconfRestart entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Release : [1 to 64] bts 1 DP

V8

[M]:

This number is less than or equal to the number of transceiver objects created for the bts object.

btsWithCavity Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Whether the bts object instance uses a transceiver equipment with cavity. [true / false] bts false Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs (PR1179 - V12) DP V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

152

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

buildState
Description : Whether BSC application database building is in-progress. Commands on all objects related to the bsc concerned object are refused while the BDA is being built. When the bsc object is created, the value of this attribute is enforced to "notInProgress". It is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directly modified by users. It is changed to "inProgress" by the system after a user Build BDA command on the bsc object as long as database building is in-progress. It is then changed back to "notInProgress" when the operation is complete. Value range : Object : Type : [inProgress / notInProgress] bsc DI

C
callClearing Class 3
Description : Maximum distance between MS and BTS before a call is cleared. It is greater than msRangeMax. This distance defines the cell maximum coverage area. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 135] km (non-extended mode), [2 to 120] km (extended mode). bts 35 in non-extended mode, 90 in extended mode DP

[C/M]:

callClearing > msRangeMax (attribute of the handOverControl object associated with the bts object). The maximum distance is 35 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is "false". The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is "true".

[C/M]:

[C/M]:

7 km for urban 35 km for rural

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

153

callDropActivation class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Checks : Activation of cell call drop data retrieval of cell call drops at OMC-R. bts [Disabled (0) / traffic drops (1) / signaling drops (2) / traffic + signaling drops (3)] DP Call drop analysis 0

[C/M]:

callDropActivation parameter cannot be set to a value different from 0 in more than 80 cells per BSC. Call drop analysis feature cannot be activated on more than 80 cells at a time Call drop analysis feature cannot be activated on the cell if interference matrix is still running on this cell. This semantic checks forbids activation of interference matrix and call drop analysis features at the same time on a cell.

[C/M]:

Release : Note :

V15 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

callPathObservationArea Class 2
Description : List of up to thirty-one same-type objects observed. Enter each object reference according to the type (bts, transceiverEquipment, xtp). [list of objects belonging to the same class] callPathTrace DP

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C/M]: [M]:

All observed objects belong to the same class. The callPathTrace object is locked.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

154

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

callPathTrace
Description : Identifier of a callPathTrace object defined with regard to the md object. This object describes the Call path tracing function of a BSS (follow-up of calls using one or more common resources in the BSS). A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlock the object to start collecting trace data. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] callPathTrace Id

[C]: [C/M/D]: [C/M/D]:

The callPathTrace object is not created for the md object. The application database of the related BSC is not being built. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the BSS/OMC-R link is established and no audit is running in the BSC. The callPathTrace object is created.

[D]:

Release :

V8

callPathTraceType Class 2
Description : Type of information stored by the BSC. The information stored with respect to the type is detailed in NTP < 07 >. If the request cannot be fulfilled, the BSC attempts to store another type of information, using the following rule: radio >>> hand over >>> radio. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [basic / hand over / radio] callPathTrace DP

[M]:

The callPathTrace object is locked.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

155

callReestablishment Class 3
Description : Whether call re-establishment in a cell is allowed when the radio link is broken off for propagation reasons. The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH. On receipt of a CHANNEL REQUIRED message with cause "call re-establishment", the BSC attempts to allocate a TCH in one of the cells where call re-establishment is allowed. Then, if no TCH is available the BSC attempts to allocate a SDCCH. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [allowed / not allowed] bts not allowed DP

callReestablishmentPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of TCH allocation requests with cause "call reestablishment". This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

capacityAlarmThreshold
Description : Filling threshold of the message saving partition on the OMC-R agent disks, beyond which a notification is triggered. The size of the saving partitions is indicated in the system commissioning files. This attribute is significant when the object describes a current log; it has no meaning when the object describes a restored log.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

156

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

When the threshold is reached, the OMC-R agent initiates the following actions:

A notification is sent to the OMC-R manager. For a current alarm log, old messages are deleted to make room in the partition. If all saved messages are of todays date, further notifications are not saved and the operationalState of the log object is forced to "disabled". For a current observation or trace log, the operationalState of the log object is forced to "disabled" and its availabilityStatus is forced to "logFull".

Value range : Object : Type : Note :

[0 to 2147483646]. "2147483646" defines a 100% threshold (the partition is full). log - Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.

capacityTimeRejection Class 3
Description : Minimum time between one intracell HO and the next capacity intracell HO. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Int [0 to 120] seconds handOverControl 0 DP V1 4 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

cause
Description : To select messages according to one or more causes associated with a fault number. Refer to Nortel GSM BSS and OMC Maintenance Manuals. This parameter is a component of the specific problems filter. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. Value range : [0 to 19070980]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

157

Object : Type :

Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

cCCHGprsAtBtsLevel Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Used to activate the CCCH management at BTS level. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled DP V14

cc
Description : The Communication application module Controller, which is the ATM switch implementing the ATM network used as the Control Node backplane. This board also provides ATM on OC-3 (Optical Carrier level 3) connectivity towards the Interface Node. [0 to 2147483646] cc DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

ccId
Description : Identifier of the cc object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. [0 to 2147483646] cc DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

158

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

cellAllocation Class 2
Description : List of no more than 64 frequencies allotted to a cell in the network frequency band. By definition, all cells covered by a given radio site use the same frequency band defined by the type of the network (standardIndicator). All cells declared as neighbor cells of a serving cell use the same frequency band as the serving cell. Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (PCS 1900 network), [0 to 124 / 955 to 1023] (GSM-R network), [0 to 124 / 975 to 1023] (extended GSM network), [128 to 251] (GSM 850 network), [99 / 1023] / [0 / 55] (GSM-R network). The standardIndicator for GSM-R values is Rgsm. bts DP

Note : Object : Type : Checks :

[C/M]:

Each frequency occurs once in the list and complies with the type of the network (refer to the standardIndicator entry in the Dictionary). GSM 900 / GSM-R / Extended GSM networks: The number of frequencies in the list is limited to 64. GSM 1800/1900/850 network: The number of frequencies in the list depends on the gap between the lowest and the greatest defined frequencies.

[C/M] :

[C/M] :

Maximum gap between frequencies between 257 and 512 between 129 and 256 between 113 and 128 between 1 and 112

Number of frequencies [2 to 18] [2 to 22] [2 to 29] [2 to 64]

[C/M]: [C/M]:

The cell BCCH frequency (bCCHFrequency) is part of the list. For dualband networks, the number of frequencies must be inferior or equal to 64 by frequency band.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

159

[M]:

The frequencies allotted to the radio time slots (channel objects) of the set of TDMA frames related to the cell are part of the list. An element of the list of cellAllocation parameter can take one of the following values: [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network) [512 to 810] (GSM 1900), [0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] (GSM-R network), [0 to 124 or [975 to 1023] (E-GSM network) [128 to 251] (GSM 850 network).

[C/M]:

cellBarQualify Class 3
Description : Cell selection priority used in the C2 algorithm in Phase II. The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [true (low priority) / false (normal priority)] bts False DP V8

cellBarred Class 3
Description : Whether direct cell access are barred to mobiles. The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH. During a call, it is transmitted on a signaling link. If the attribute value is changed to "barred", all in-progress calls can continue but the BSC will direct further mobile calls to another cell. Value range : Object : Default value : [barred / not barred] bts not barred

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

160

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Remark :

DP Even when cell access are barred to MSs, the cell may be indirectly accessible if incoming handovers are allowed (incomingHandOver attribute of the associated handOverControl object).

cellDeletionCount Class 3
Description : Number of consecutive "Measurement Result" messages which, if not received from a given neighbor cell, will cause all previously stored information related to that cell to be deleted. From V12, this number corresponds to the number of missing measurement reports after which this neighbor cell is no more eligible. The measurements related to this neighbor cell are not deleted as far as less than 10 consecutive measurements are missing. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Note : [0 to 31] bts 5 in rural environment, 2 in microcell environment DP Any entered value superior than 10 is taken into account as 10 value.

cellDtxDownLink Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Remark : Whether the use of discontinuous transmission in BTS-to-MS direction is allowed in a cell. [enabled / disabled] bts enabled DP The dtxMode attribute allows users to control the use of discontinuous transmission on the uplink. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

cellIdentity Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Cell Identity code (CI) that identifying in a location area, a neighbor cell of the current cell. [0 to 65535] adjacentCellHandOver

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

161

Type : Checks :

DP

[C/M]:

A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

cellIdentity Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Cell Identity code (CI) identifying in a location area, a neighbor cell of the current cell. [0 to 65535] adjacentCellReselection DP

[C/M]:

A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

cellIdentity Class 2
Description : Cell Identity code (CI) identifying a serving cell in a location area. A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a location area. It identifies a cell in the PLMN and includes four fields: cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode (MNC). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 65535] bts DP

[C/M]:

A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

cellName
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Reference name of a bts object on the coverage site. It is case sensitive. [30 characters max.] bts DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

162

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks : Note :

[C/M]:

The name of a cell is unique to the covering radio site.

Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited. The valid symbols are: - letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z - digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 - minus sign: - undescore: _ - space

cellPagingState
Description : Value range : Processing mode of the paging requests in the cell. [allowed / not allowed / not significant] This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSC.

allowed ..........

The operationalState of the transceiver object describing the TDMA frame no.0 carrying the BCCH is "working" and SYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 have been acknowledged by the BTS. The operationalState of the transceiver object describing the TDMA frame no.0 carrying the BCCH is "working" and SYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 have not been acknowledged by the BTS. If no message has been acknowledged by the BTS, the notification 1256 "Non response to SYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 or 2bis" is issued.

not allowed .......

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

163

not significant ....

The operationalState of the transceiver object describing the TDMA frame no.0 carrying the BCCH is not "working".

Object : Type :

bts DD

cellReselectHysteresis Class 3
Description : Hysteresis to re-select towards a cell:

when the MS is in GSM - IDLE mode and re-selects a cell with a different LA (Location Area) when the MS is in GMM stand by state and re-selects a cell with a different LA (Location Area) or a different RA (Routing Area) when the MS is in GMM ready state and re-selects a different cell

A mobile can select a cell in another location area provided the re-selection parameter value of that cell oversteps the re-selection parameter values of all the cells in the same location area as the current camping cell by at least cellReselectHysteresis dB. The information is broadcast on the cell BCCH. The re-selection criterion (C1) formula is: C1 = (A - Max (B,0)) where A and B are as follows: A = average level of the received signal - rxLevAccessMin B = msTxPwrMaxCCH - Maximum RF output power of the MS The re-selection criterion (C2) formula is given with the cellReselectOffset entry. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Note : [0 to 14, by steps of 2] dB bts 6 dB DP The greater the value of cellReselectHysteresis, the later a new cell in another location area is selected. This prevents from switching back and forth two location areas.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

164

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

cellReselectOffset Class 3
Description : Encouragement to re-select a cell (C2 criterion) for phase 2 MS. The re-selection criterion (C2) formula is: C2 = C1 + cellReselectOffset - temporaryOffset x H (penaltyTime - T)

C1 is defined with the cellReselectHysteresis entry. T is a timer that is started when the cell is placed by the MS on the list of most suitable cells to receive the calls, and is stopped when the cell is no longer on the list. H(penaltyTime - T) equals 0 when penaltyTime < T and penaltyTime T.

In the case when penaltyTime = 640, re-selection criterion formula becomes: C2 = C1 - cellReselectOffset Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [0 to 126, by steps of 2] dB bts AR 264 4 DP V8 The value given to this attribute allows to more or less encourage the mobiles to re-select the cell.

cellReselInd Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Whether cell re-selection criterion (C2) use is authorized. [true / false] bts True DP V8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

165

cellThreshold Class 2
Description : Needed number of transceiver object instances that must be in enabled state so that the cell is working. The value of this attribute must be less than or equal to the number of TDMA frames created for this cell This attribute can be modified only if the bts object instance is locked. This attribute can be modified only if the bsc object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [f1 to 16] bts 1 DP

cellType Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Type of the adjacent cell. [normalType / umbrellaType / microType] adjacentCellHandOver normalType DP

cellType Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Type of the serving cell. [normalType / umbrellaType / microType] bts normalType DP

[C/M]:

The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute is defined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) and directed retry handovers are processed in BSC mode (directedRetryModeUsed).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

166

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

cemId
Description : Identifier of the cem object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU 3000. [0 to 2147483646] cem DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

chain
Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain. It identifies the chain whose software markers are displayed. Value range : Object : Type : [A / B] software-bsc - Display markers DD

chain
Description : To select messages originating from a BSC processing chain. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [chainA / chainB] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

chain
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Managed object class representing the Display chain information. [chain A / chain B] Display chain information - bsc Id The action that leads to this response parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

167

chainId
Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain. It identifies the chain whose characteristics are displayed. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [chainA / chainB] bsc - Display chain information Id The action that leads to this response parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

chainId
Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain. The consequences of the command are as follows:

If the chain is active at the time the BSC receives the order, it is reset and the operations are switched over to the passive chain. If the chain is passive when the BSC receives the order, it is reset if it can be reached.

To determine which chain is currently active in a BSC, run a Display all command on the concerned bsc object: the activeChain attribute identifies the active chain. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [chainA / chainB] bsc - Suicide chain Id The action that leads to this response parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

chainId
Description : Identifier of the chain object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The value allocated by the MD-R is located between 0 and 1. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 12000HC. [0 to 1] chain DP The action that leads to this response parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Value range : Object : Type : Note :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

168

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

channel
Description : Identifier of a channel object (radio time slot). In all MMI commands, a channel object can be referred to by the sequence "siteName.cellName.transceiver.channel", where siteName and cellName respectively identify the covering site and cell by name. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 7] channel Id

[C]: [C/M]:

The number of channel objects dependent on a transceiver object is limited to eight. If the channel object does not obey frequency hopping laws, the absoluteRFChannelNo is defined unless it carries the parent cell BCCH, and fhsRef and maio are undefined. If the channel object obeys frequency hopping laws, the absoluteRFChannelNo is undefined, and fhsRef and maio are defined. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

[C/M]:

[C/D]:

[D]:

channel state
Description : Value range : Type: [BCCH / RACH / PCH AGCH / SDCCH/4 / SDCCH/8 / TCH (full rate) / CCH], [not created / disabled / working / free / busy / blocking / working, blocked / blocking, removing / disabled, blocked / free, blocked / removing / available / working not CBCH / disabled not CBCH / working CBCH / disabled CBCH] The channel is allocated, not blocked, and free. Type and resource state of the logical channels multiplexed on the radio time slot.

Resource state:

available ........

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

169


Object : Type : Notes : DD

busy ............ disabled ......... working, blocked .. disabled, blocked..

The channel is allocated, not blocked, and busy. The channel is not configured. The channel is allocated and blocked. The channel is not allocated and blocked.

channel - Display channel state

The types of logical channels that can be multiplexed on a radio time slot depend on its channelType. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. The resource state of SDCCH no.2 is "disabled" if a CBCH is defined. A radio channel is blocked or released by means of a user Modify channel state command. A radio channel is allocated when the TDMA frame is configured (in the Abis way) and its radio time slots are mapped onto an Abis interface PCM link.

channelReleaseOnAbisFailure
Description : Channel Release on Abis Failure feature is enabled or disabled. The Channel release policy feature is allowed on the BTS S8000 CBCF and BTS S12000. The feature is allowed for BTS model which contains the string:


Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : bts

8000 12000

except for BTS model: BSS_btsModelS8000inDoor (CBCF) BSS_btsModelS8000outDoor (CBCF)

[disabled / enabled]

Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure disabled

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

170

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Note :

DP

The recommended value is disabled. This parameter is mandatory. [C/M]: A spare of the TRX container (IEI TDMATranspAttr2 = 0x52) is used on bts object to activate the feature.

Spare 5 attribute ofTDMACONFIGCONTAINERofTDMA CONFIG message 8 IEI = TD_S PARE 5_IEI High part of spare 5 Low part of spare5 0 0 0 7 1 0 0 6 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 4 1 0 0 3 1 0 0/1 1 0 0 n/a

Default value = 0x0000 Bit 2 (from1 to 8) of the lowpart of spare 5 parameter can take the values: 0: Channel release policy after the ABIS failure is not activated 1: Channel release policy after the ABIS failure is activated.

channelType Class 2
Description : Value range : Type of logical channel supported by a radio TS. [tCHFull / sDCCH / mainBCCH / mainBCCHCombined / bcchsdcch4CBCH / sdcch8CBCH / cCH (V12) / pDTCH (V12)]. An SDCCH is only allocated to a mobile during call setup. Once the call is established, the SDCCH is released and a TCH supports the call, serving traffic and signaling needs. A CBCH (Cell Broadcast CHannel) configuration enables use of the Short Message Service -Cell Broadcast (SMS-CB) in a cell when a radio time slot of a TDMA frame related to the cell supports that type of channel. The CBCH can be combined with an SDCCH/8 or a BCCH+SDCCH/4. It takes the place of SDCCH no.2 in all cases.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

171

If the time slot carries a cell BCCH, its type sets the cell BCCH configuration (combined or not combined). Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : channel Extended CCCH (TF184 - V12) GPRS (SV407 - V12) None DP

[C/M]:

If the type is "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombin ed", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH", the channel object identifier is [0] and the object is not authorized to hop. The type "cCH" can only be used if TS 0 carries a BCCH logical channel ("main BCCH", "main BCCH combined"). The only allowed association of (BCCH + CCCH) timeslots are (0), (0, 2), (0, 2, 4), (0, 2, 4, 6). If the type is "sdcch8CBCH", the channel object identifier is in the range [0 to 3] if the covering cell works in normal mode, and it equals 0 or 2 if the cell works in extended mode (extended cell attribute of the parent bts object). If the type is "sdcch8CBCH", the noOfBlksForA ccessGrant attribute of the parent bts object has a value greater than 0. If the type is "bcchSdcch4CBCH" or "sdcch8CBCH", use of the SMS-CB service is authorized in the parent bts object (smsCB = "used"). Concentric cell: If the parent transceiver object belongs to the cell inner zone, the only authorized types are "bcchSdcch4CBCH" and "sdcch8CBCH". The "pDTCH" channelType is only allowed from V12 BSCs for GPRS.

[C/M]:

[C/M]: [C/M]:

[C/M]:

[C/M]:

[C/M]:

[M]:

A radio channel is identified by an 8-bit code built up by the OMC-R from the channel type and the number of the time slot that supports it: 8 C5 7 C4 6 C3 5 C2 4 C1 3 < TN > 2 1

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

172

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


00001 0001T 001TT 01TTT 10000 10001 10010

TN bits (bits 3 to 1) indicate the radio time slot number [0-7]. C bits (bits 8 to 4) describe the type of the channel:

ACCH with a TCH/FR (SACCH/FACCH) ACCH with a TCH/HR ACCH in an SDCCH/4 configuration ACCH in an SDCCH/8 configuration BCCH RACH (Uplink CCCH) PCH + AGCH (Downlink CCCH) The T bits indicate the subchannel number [0 to 7]:

00100 00101 00110 00111

There are four subchannels [0 to 3] in an SDCCH/4 configuration:

SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.0 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (combined CBCH) SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.2 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.3

01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 01110 01111

There are eight subchannels [0 to 7] in an SDCCH/8 configuration:

SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.0 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (CBCH) SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.2 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.3 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.4 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.5 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.6 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.7 The logical channels that can be multiplexed on a radio time slot depend on its channelType. They are described in the following table.

channelType tCHFull sDCCH

Bits C5-C1 BM + ACCH (SACCH/FACCH) SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 7] (SACCH/FACCH)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

173

channelType mainBCCH

Bits C5-C1 BCCH RACH (Uplink) PCH + AGCH (Downlink) BCCH RACH (Uplink) PCH + AGCH (Downlink) SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3] BCCH CBCH (= SDCCH No2) RACH (Uplink) PCH + AGCH (Downlink) SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3] CBCH (= SDCCH No2) SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3] (SACCH/FACCH) BCCH RACH (Uplink) PCH + AGCH (Downlink)

mainBCCHCombined

bcchSdcch4CBCH

sdcch8CBCH

cCH

Remark :

Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of short messages are managed by two independent OMC-R functions. When a short message broadcast is started in a cell, the presence of a channel object with a CBCH dependent on the concerned bts object is checked. On the contrary, the SMS-CB function is not aware of changes made to that attribute. Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from a cell configuration will implicitly stop any short message broadcast in the cell without the SMS-CB function knowing.

Note :

The following counters have been multiplexed on TSs 0, 2, 4, and 6 for the Extended CCCH feature: C1026, C1027, C1028, C1029, C1030, C1031, C1033, C1604, C1605. No recommended value is specified since this parameter depends on the strategy of the operator.

Comments :

chanState
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Whether or not, the radio channel is blocked. [locked / unlocked] channel - Set channel state DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

174

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks :

[A]: [A]:

A BCCH or a CBCH, whether combined or not, cannot be blocked. The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects are unlocked.

Notes :

When a CBCH is defined for a cell, it always uses SDCCH no.2. Run a Display channel state command to check that the channel has switched to the specified state. Refer to the channel state entry in the Dictionary.

chosenChannelAsscomp Class 1
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in the ASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8 If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT (Table OFCVAR) is set to ON (see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSC parameter chosenChannelAsscomp needs to be set to TRUE.

chosenChannelCompL3Info Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in the COMPLETE LAYER 3 INFORMATION messages (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8 If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT (Table OFCVAR) is set to ON (see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSC parameter chosenChannelCompL3Info needs to be set to TRUE.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

175

chosenChannelHoPerf Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8 If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT (Table OFCVAR) is set to ON (see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSC parameter chosenChannelCompL3Info needs to be set to TRUE.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

chosenChannelHoReq Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8 If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT (Table OFCVAR) is set to ON (see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSC parameter chosenChannelCompL3Info needs to be set to TRUE.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

cic Class 0
Description : Circuit Identity Code = numbers of the PCM link and time slot used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface, defined with regard to the MSC (cic = 32xmscPcmNumber + mscPcmTsNumber). The cic is coded into 16 bits, as follows: xxxxxxxxxxxnnnnn = (32xmscPcmNumber) + mscPcmTsNum ber

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

176

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Bits x identify the PCM link involved in the BSC/MSC link with regard to the MSC (mscPcmNumber), bits n identify the time slot used on that PCM link with regard to the MSC (mscPcmTsNumber). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 65535] xtp DP

[C]: [C]:

A cic is unique to the parent bsc object. The PCM TS used by the terrestrial circuit on the A interface is identical on MSC end (mscPcmTsNumber component) and BSC end (timeSlotNumber), and is not allotted to another xtp or signallingLink object dependent on the parent bsc object. If PCM link no.3 is used on the A interface (pcmCircuitId), the TS number is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four TSs on that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they cannot be used. Refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary. This attribute cannot be modified.

[C]:

Restrictions :

[M]:

circuitGroupBlock Class 1
Description : Whether the CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK and CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK messages are used (Phase II compliance). If these messages are unused, the BLOCK and UNBLOCK messages are used. Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : [false / true] signallingPoint Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 V12) False DP V8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

177

circularFileId
Description : Identifier of a BSC circular file. BSC circular files are automatically created by the system: the FAULT files are created with the BSC, the PERF (observations) and TRACE (trace data) files are created when the BSC application database is built. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [majorFault / minorFault / observation (permanent and temporary) / instrumentPanel] bscMdInterface - Circular file Id

[A]:

The circular file is created.

circularFileState
Description : State of a circular file. When a circular file is closed, the spontaneous messages stored are not forwarded to the OMC-R agent. This attribute is set by the system following a user Close circular file or Open circular file command. When a circular file is closed, the messages are stored until the file is reopened. Some messages may be lost if the capacity of the file is reached. Value range : Object : Type : [closed / opened] bscMdInterface - Display circular file state DP

clear time
Description : To select alarms cleared at that time. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>,<time>] Cleared alarm log - Filter DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

178

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

cleared by
Description : To select alarms ceased by a given user. Enter the users name as defined in the users profile. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Object : Type : Cleared alarm log - Filter DP

clearing cause
Description : To select alarms according to the cause of ceasing. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : [user command / object enabled / object deleted / clear event received / automatic purge / cleared on low threshold crossing / circular file saturation] Cleared alarm log - Filter DP

Object : Type :

cn
Description : The Control Node, which provides the GSM protocol processing (CallProcessing, SS7 and LAPD), as well as BSS OA&M. A logical point of view and a sub-track (hardware) point of view are managed. The SIM modules are also managed. [0 to 0] controlNode DP

Value range : Object : Type :

control Node Id
Description : Identifier of a controlNode object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The only value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. [0 to 0] controlNode DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

179

coderPoolConfiguration Class 2 for a BSC 12000HC V12, a BSC 12000HC V15 and a BSC 3000 V15, and class 3 for a BSC 3000 V14
Description : This attribute indicates enumerated speech coding algorithms supported by the TCU. Note that TCU2G does not support AMR. List of [coderAlgo, minimumCall, powerULI, powerDLI], with: coderAlgo (BSC version: up to V15): fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder / phase1DataCoder / amrFullHalfRateCoder coderAlgo (BSC version: from V16): fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder / ctmEnhancedFullRateCoder / amrFullHalfRateCoder minimumCall: 0 to 65535 powerULI: -15 to +15 powerDLI: -15 to +15 transcoder DP V13

Value range :

Object : Type : Release :

coderPoolList
Description : Current partitioning of the coder pool. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. It is set to NULL at object creation. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for TCU 3000. for a V15 BSC, list of [coderAlgo, archipelagoes, maximumCall, currentCall] with : coderAlgo: fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder / phase1DataCoder / amrFullHalfRateCoder archipelagoes: 0 to 65535 maximumCall: 0 to 65535 CurrentCall: 0 to 65535 for a V16 BSC, list of [coderAlgo, archipelagoes, emptyArchipelago, maximumCall, currentCall, minimumCallsRespected] with: coderAlgo: fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder / ctmEnhancedFullRateCode / amrFullHalfRateCoder archipelagoes: 0 to 65535 emptyArchipelago: 0 to 65535 maximumCall: 0 to 65535 currentCall: 0 to 65535 minimumCallsRespected: yes / no hardware transcoder 3G DD V13

Value range :

Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

180

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

codingScheme Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Channel coding scheme (CS) used for data in GPRS mode (UL and DL). [cs1, cs2] transceiver GPRS (SV407 - V12) cs1 DP V12 cs1 is used for control blocks. Depending on the codingScheme parameter, cs1 or cs2 is used for data blocks in UL and DL.

command classes
Description : List of no more than twenty-five authorized command classes that define a users command domain. MMI commands grant access to OMC-R functions. Each class defines a subset of commands (one of them provides access to all MMI commands). The comprehensive list of MMI commands, together with their class(es), can be displayed using the Display command classes command. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 2147483646] user profile DP

command line
Description : Command associated with the job. Follow the Line mode syntax. If the job is meant to run a simple command, enter the sequence describing the command and its parameters. If the job is meant to run a command file, enter the following: Run-commandFile: object=(commandFile=/<directory>/<fil ename>); The command file must be created in the specified directory.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

181

The Line mode syntax is detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : [case sensitive] job DP

command number
Description : Serial number of the command to abort. It is assigned by the system and is registered in session logs. Every MMI command launched by the user is identified by a serial number assigned by the system. Open the user session log consultation window and search for that number. Value range : Object : Type : [1 to infinity] commandFile - Abort DP

commandFile
Description : Identifier (name) of a command file in the saving directory. Enter the file name only. If the file exists in the selected directory, the user can either overwrite its contents with the commands newly recorded or append the new commands to the existing file (see NTP < 130 >). Value range : Object : Type : [case sensitive, 14 characters max.] commandFile - Create file Id

commandFile
Description : Saving name of the command file after being edited. Enter the file name only. If the file is a new one, preselect the saving directory in the "Command file manager" window. If the file exists, it is saved in the same directory as the source file. Value range : [case sensitive, 14 characters max.]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

182

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Type :

Command file editing - Save Id

comment
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Text comment. [256 characters max.] report template DP V11

comment
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Additional information coming with the short message. It is not broadcast. [60 characters max.] short message DP

comments
Description : Object : Type : Additional information (such as creation date). software - Display markers DD

computeSyntheticCounters
Description : Whether synthetic counters are included in the observation report. This parameter is significant only for permanent bsc and instrument panel observation report display requests. Value range : Object : Type : [enabled / disabled] Display xxx report DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

183

concentAlgoExtMsRange Class 3
Description : MS to BTS distance below which a handover is requested from the large zone to the small zone if the level criteria is verified. [1 to 34] km (non-extended mode), [1 to 120] km (extended mode). Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks : handOverControl 1 km To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric, dualband or dualcoupling cell DP concentAlgoExtMsRange concentAlgoIntMsRange The maximum distance is 34 km if the extended cell attribute of the associated bts object is "false". The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is "true".

Value range :

[C/M]: [C/M]:

[C/M]:

Release :

V9

concentAlgoExtRxLev Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks : Release : The level of the MS signal strength from below which a handover is requested from the large zone to the small zone. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48] dB handOverControl - 95 to - 94 To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric, dualband or dualcoupling cell DP

V9

[C/M]:

concentAlgoExtRxLev > concentAlgoIntRxLev

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

184

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

concentAlgoIntMsRange Class 3
Description : MS to BTS distance from which a handover from the small zone to the large zone will be requested. The following inequality, that is not checked by the system, must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary). concentAlgoIntMsRange msRangeMax Value range : [1 to 34] km (non-extended mode) [1 to 120] km (extended mode) Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks : handOverControl 34 km To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric, dualband or dualcoupling cell. DP concentAlgoIntMsRange concentAlgoExtM sRange The maximum distance is 34 km if the extended cell attribute of the associated bts object is "false". The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is "true".

[C/M]: [C/M]:

[C/M]:

Release :

V9

concentAlgoIntRxLev Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks : Release : Level of the MS signal strength below which a handover is requested from the small zone to the large zone. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48] dB handOverControl less than -110 To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric, dualband or dualcoupling cell. DP

V9

[C/M]:

concentAlgoIntRxLev < concentAlgoExtRxLev

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

185

concentric cell Class 2


Description : Whether the cell is monozone, concentric, dualband or dualcoupling: A concentric, dualband, or dualcoupling cell describes a combination of two transmission zones, the outer (or large) zone and the inner (or small) zone. The inner zone is entirely included in the outer zone. A dualband cell is a particular type of concentric cell for which GSM 900 and GSM1800 or GSM850 and GSM1900 TRXs/DRXs coexist and share the same BCCH. A dualcoupling cell is a particular type of concentric cell for which the TRXs/DRXs are combined with two types of combiners. For concentric configurations (concentric, dualband or dualcoupling), a TDMA frame belongs to one zone or the other, but never to both, and the frequencies used in each zone are separated. Value range : [monozone / concentric / dualband / dualcoupling]

monozone ....... concentric....... dualband.........

normal cell two concentric transmission zones two concentric transmissions zones with GSM 900 and GSM 1800 TRXs/DRXs for the one or GSM 850 GSM 1900 TRXs/DRXs for the other two concentric transmission zones with TRXs/DRXs combined with a one type of combiner for the one and with another type of combiner for the other

dualcoupling..

Object : Feature : Default value : Type :

bts Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12) dualband DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

186

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Note :

Dualband cells are only available for S8000 DRX transceiver architecture. Dualcoupling cells are only available for BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

Release :

V9

condition
Description : Condition for calling the counting mechanism when a counter is involved. The following fields can be combined in the logical expression:

Parameter administrativeState availabilityStatus bsc equipment name bsc model cause btsSiteManager model bts equipment name equipment processor number faultNumber operationalState perceived severity postMortem usageState

Notification type state change state change alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm state change alarm alarm state change

Operators = = = = <=> = = <=> <=> = = = =

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

187

The "postMortem" field can take two values, either "before BSC restart" or "after bsc restart". They have the following meaning:

before BSC restart means that the notification issued by the BSC was received by the OMC-R agent without the BSC having restarted (nominal conditions). after BSC restart means that the notification was issued by the BSC and the BSC was restarted before the OMC-R agent received the notification. These notifications do not trigger alarms.

The following logical operators can be used in the logical expression:


Value range : Object : Condition : Type :

& stands for the logical AND. | stands for the logical OR. ! stands for the logical NOT.

[logical expression] alarm criteria To define if a Counter is associated with the criterion. DP

configRef Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Note : Reference name of a DLU (Data Loading Unit) configuration file. Check BSS upgrade file. [1 to VVV] btsSiteManager DP

[C/M]:

The attribute value must be set according to a static configuration file.

If the attribute is nonzero, the user must check that the DLU configuration file exists on the concerned BSC disk, since no check is performed by the OMC-R. The configRef is an ASCII-coded integer in base 32 that allows to code the version of the DLU configuration file as seven characters (xxaYYYz). The btsDescription parameter gives the transcription of the configRef parameter.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

188

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

configRefList
Description : This attribute identifies the list of available configRef for a btsSiteManager delivery. For another object class instance, this attribute is empty. This attribute is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. This attribute cannot be modified by the Manager. [0 to 150] executableSoftware DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

configurationType
Description : Type of configuration the alarm criterion belongs to: The manufacturer configuration is known as the reference configuration. The operator configurations are known as the daytime configuration, the nighttime configuration, and the specific (or particular) configuration. Refer to the alarm criteria entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [manufacturer / operator] alarm criteria DP

[M]:

This attribute cannot be modified.

confusion Class 1
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : Release : Whether the CONFUSION messages are used (Phase II compliance). [false] signallingPoint False DP

[C/M]:

The only accepted value is "false".

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning. V8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

189

counter list
Description : Value range : Type of the counter list displayed. [default / all]


Object : Type : Release : DP

"default": "all":

the default counter list the whole counter list

report template

V12

counter list filename


Description : Object : Type : Release : Full pathname of the counter list file. bscCounterList DP V11

counterId
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Q3 name of a permanent BSS observation counter. See NTP < 07 >. [50 characters max., case sensitive] mdWarning - detection function = "outOfRangeCounter" DP

counters
Description : Object : Type : Release : List of the Q3 names of the counters eligible for observation, which are in the counter list filename. bscCounterList DP V11

counters
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Release : List of counters (Q3 names) chosen for observation. report template [list of Q3 counter names] DP V11

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

190

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

cpueNumber Class 0
Description : Gives the number of the cellgroup to which the object will be mapped. Allows to by-pass the BSC algorithm which distributes the sites into Cell Groups.

BSC BSC 12000 "HC", 12000 types 3, 4, 5

CPUE 0 BIFP0

CPUE 1 BIFP 1

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : btsSiteManager CPU/BIFP load sharing (AR874 - V12) 0 DP

[C]: [C]:

The btsSiteManager object is limited according to the cpueNumber attribute value. The transceiverEquipment object instance number is limited according to the cpueNumber attribute value.

Notes : Release :

to modify this parameter the bdaState must be "not built" V12

cpueOccurrence
Description : Gives the number of the cell-group to which the site has been mapped at site creation. This mapping is not modifiable, except by deleting the site. Depends on system release:

Value range :


Object : Type : DD

before V15.1: [0 to 95] from V15.1: [0 to 53]

btsSiteManager

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

191

cRC Class 0
Description : Whether the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) test on PCM links is used by the CTMx board controlling the PCM link, whether it is a pcmCircuit object dependent on a bsc object (Abis or Ater interface) for a BSC 3000 or dependent on a transcoder object (A interface) for a TCU 3000. [used / not used] pcmCircuit not used DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

cRC Class 2
Description : Whether the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) test on PCM links is used by the DDTI board controlling the PCM link. pcmCircuit object dependent on a bsc object (Abis or Ater interface) for BSC 12000: If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI board in the BSC and the DTI board in the BTS to which the PCM link is connected must be appropriately configured, as follows:

DDTI board: CS17 or CS18 jumper is ON (see NTP < 22 >). DTI board: CS17 jumper is ON (see Nortel GSM BTS Reference Manuals). PCMI board: SW2 or SW3 jumper is ON (see Nortel GSM BTS Reference Manuals)

pcmCircuit object dependent on a transcoder object (A interface) for TCU 2G: If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI board in the TCU to which the PCM link is connected must be appropriately configured: CS17 and CS18 jumpers are ON (see NTP < 16 >). In case of mismatch, the DDTI configuration takes precedence over the CRC state and a fault message is sent to the OMC-R. Value range : [used / not used]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

192

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Default value : Type :

pcmCircuit not used DP

creator
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Report template creator name. [30 characters max.] report template DP V11

criteriaEventType
Description : Type of the notifications handled by the alarm criterion. Selecting "alarmNotification" includes all Q3 alarm notifications such as communicationAlarm, equipmentA larm, environmentalAlarm, processingError-Alarm, and qualityOfServiceAlarm. Selecting "stateChangeNotification" includes all Q3 state change notifications. Value range : Object : Type : [alarmNotification / stateChangeNotification] alarm criteria DP

cSS7LocalSubSystemNumber Class 0
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Notes : SS7 local subsystem number for the BSSMAP application. [2 to 254] signallingPoint (BSC 3000 V14) or signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15) DP

The recommended value is 254 (0x00FE). This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Release :

V15

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

193

cSS7RemoteSubSystemNumber Class 0
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : Note : SS7 remote subsystem number for the BSSMAP application. [2 to 254] signallingPoint (bsc 3000 V14) or signallingLinkSet (bsc 3000 from V15) DP V15 The recommended value is 254 (0x00FE). This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

CTU cable
Description : The CTU (cable transition unit) provides the physical interface to the customers spans in the BSC 3000 and the TCU 3000. [true / false] True value: No break in the copper connection from the CTU to the IEM module of the LSA. False value: The cable is improperly installed from the CTU to the IEM module of the LSA or some break in the copper connection from the CTU and the IEM module of the LSA. Object : Feature : Type : Release : iem (up to V15), lsaRc (from V16) AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

Value range :

current log size


Description : Object : Type : Remark : Current log size expressed in bytes. log - Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

194

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

current synchronization mode


Description : Current synchronized mode gives the current synchronization mode of the BTS according to the synchronization mode received in the set external contact message (if received) but regardless of the synchronization signals available. This parameter is used in response of the "Display Data Information" (normal) action. Value range : [normal Abis synchronization / slave BTS correctly synchronized on master signal 1/ Abis synchronization due to master synchronization not available / slave BTS synchronized on master SY but master GSM time has been lost / Abis synchronization due to loss of master SY / hold over mode / Abis synchronization due to GPS synchronization unavailable or lack of accuracy / hold over mode due to a loss of GPS synchronization / hold over mode due to a GPS synchronization lack of accuracy / Network GPS Synchronized] bts BTS synchronization

Object : Feature :

currentChannelHorqd Class 1
Description : Whether the "Current channel" element is used or not in the HANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase II compliance). [false / true] signallingPoint true DP V12

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

cypherModeReject Class 1
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Whether the CYPHER MODE REJECT messages are used (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

195

D
dARPPh1Priority class 2
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Release : Note : Specifies the priority of SAIC (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation) mobiles on the TDMA. transceiver [high priority, low priority] DP Network Synchronization high priority V15 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

data mode 14.4 kbit/s Class 2


Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed. [disabled / enabled] transcoderBoard disabled DP

[M] : [M] : [M] :

Related software object release must be V11+ release. The version attribute of the parent transcoder object must be set at "TCB_2". The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoderBoard is unlocked.

Release :

V11

data non transparent mode Class 3


Description : Set of transmission rates used for data non transparent mode transmission on the Radio interface (MS BTS) and Abis interface (BTS BSC). [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s) bts 9.6 DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

196

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks :

[C/M] :

The only allowed configurations are the following:


Release : V11

"9.6" "9.6" and "14.4"

data non transparent mode Class 3


Description : Set of transmission rates used for data non transparent mode transmission on the Radio interface (MS BTS) and Abis interface (BTS BSC). [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s) signallingPoint 9.6 kbit/s DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[C/M] :

The only allowed configurations are the following:


Release : V9

"9.6" "9.6" and "14.4"

data transparent mode Class 3


Description : Set of transmission rates used for data transparent mode transmission on the Radio interface (MS BTS) and Abis interface (BTS BSC). ["1.2/0.075" / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s) bts DP

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C/M] :

The only allowed configurations are the following:


Release : V11

1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values) 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

197

data transparent mode Class 3


Description : Set of transmission rates used for data transparent mode transmission on the Radio interface (MS BTS) and Abis interface (BTS BSC). ["1.2/0.075" / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s) signallingPoint

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

DP

[C/M] :

The only allowed configurations are the following:


Release : V9

1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values) 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)

data14-4OnNoHoppingTs Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed at bts level on the non hopping TSs. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled DP V12

date
Description : Date on which the observation report was created. Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>] Display daily report DP

date
Description : Date on which data to archive were recorded. Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : [<date>] md - Archive

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

198

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Note :

DP Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible for the current day.

date
Description : Date on which data to restore were recorded. Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>] md - Restore DP

date
Description : Date on which data to archive were recorded. Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [<date>] omc - Archive/Restore DP Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible for the current day.

date
Description : Date on which data to restore were recorded. Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>] omc - Restore DP

day intervention
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in the daytime configuration. [noAlarm / critical / major / minor] alarm criteria DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

199

day to be purged
Description : Date on which the data to purge were recorded. Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Release : [<date>] omc - Data purge DP V10

dDTIIntState
Description : Value range : Internal state of the DDTI board controlling the PCM link. [working / fault]


Object : Type : Note : DD

working ......... fault ............

The board is correctly configured. The board configuration was unsuccessful.

pcmCircuit

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

degradedCause
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Gives the reasons of the degraded or enabled state. [Not significant, GPRS] bts DD V15

degradedCause
Description : Value range : Gives the reasons of the degraded or enabled state. [Lack of Abis resources / Site not supporting Edge / Site insufficient number of DS0 / TRX insufficient Edge capability / Site not supporting CS3 CS4 / TRX insufficient Packet capability / Site not supporting neither CS3 CS4, neither Edge / Site not supporting CS3 CS4, with insufficient number of DS0 / TRX insufficient Edge capability in a site not supporting CS3 CS4 / TRX insufficient Edge and packet capability / Not significant] transceiver GPRS

Object : Feature :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

200

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DD V15

delayBetweenRetrans Class 2
Description : Number of occurrences of a paging sub-group that separates two transmissions of the same paging message. The following inequality, that is not checked by the system, must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary): retransDuration (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) x nbOfRepeat Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [0 to 22] bts 0 DP V8

delivery
Description : Name of executable software package to download to the BSC disk. The name of the delivery identifies the type and version of the BSS software for which it is designed as follows:

BSC 3000 software format = "BSxabcdefghi"

Field BSx ab cd ef gh i

Meaning Name Version Subversion Number Edition Patch Level Revision Factor

Value x = [1 .. 4] [09 . .32] [01 . .99] [01 . .99] [01 . .99] C

BSC 3000 software format = "B3Gabcdefghi" TCU 3000 software format = "TC3abcdefgh"

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

201

Field ab cd ef gh i

Meaning Version Subversion Number Edition Patch Level Debug Delivery

Value [13 . .32] [01 . .99] [01 . .99] [01 . .99] D

TCB/BTS/TRX software format = "XXXabcdef"

BTS xxx BCF/ BC1/BC2/SBC/ CBC/PIC/IBC/ ICM [00 .. 32] A .. H [01 . .08] [01 .. 32]

TRX TRX/TR1/DRX/ CDR/EDG/ERM

TCB TCB/TC1/TC2

ab c d ef

[00 .. 32] A .. H [01 . .08] [01 .. 32]

[00 . .32] A .. H [01 . .08] [01 .. 64]

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

XXXabcdefghi (g, h and i are optional) software - Download DP

[A]:

Corresponding executableSoftware object must exist. That means that the software delivery must be previously installed from CD-ROM or gigatape on MD disk. The software being downloaded must be present on MD disk and accessible. There should be no downloading in progress of the same type of software. The software must match the architecture of BSC to which it is being downloaded. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

[A]: [A]: [A]: [A]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

202

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

deltaUtc
Description : Gap between the current OMC-R agent time and the GMT reference. Enter a positive value [+m] when the OMC-R agent is located east of the Greenwich meridian and a negative value [-m] when it is located west. [-1440 to +1440] minute The range of possible values allows to update the OMC-R reference time within 24 hours. Object : Type : Remark : md DP Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed in the system "Session informations" window which refers to the workstation internal clock. This parameter cannot be modified.

Value range :

Note :

detectionFunction
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Associated function. [excessiveAnomalyRate / outOfRangeCounter] mdWarning DP

directedRetry Class 3
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles to be granted access to the neighbor cell, used in processing directed retry handovers in BTS mode. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB adjacentCellHandOver >-48 dB DP V9

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

directedRetryModeUsed Class 3
Description : Specify how directed retry handovers are processed in a cell either directly by the BSC (microcells only) or by querying the BTS first. [bsc / bts] bts

Value range : Object :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

203

Default value : Type : Checks :

bts DP

[C/M]:

The BSC mode is authorized if the cell is a microcell (cellType) and the adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute is defined.

Note :

The micro cell should be entirely covered by the macro cell in order to use efficiently the bsc mode. The use of the bts mode is recommended in a hot spot when these are several micro cells under the umbrella. The bts mode allows the use of micro cells to rescue the umbrella cell and also avoids a saturation of the umbrella cell. The bts mode is also recommended for all other cases.

Release :

V9

directedRetryPrio Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : Defines the number priority for directed retry handovers. [0 to 17] bts General protection against ping-pong handovers (TF821 - V12) DP V12

directory
Description : Name of the directory created on the OMC-R agent disks for storing a delivery containing a BSS software version. The directory name identifies the type and version of the BSS software stored. Refer to the executableSoftware entry in the Dictionary. If the directory exists on the OMC-R agent disks, the user is warned. Value range : Object : Type : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] md - Create delivery dir DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

204

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

display Data Configuration


Description : Value range : Object : A command applied on btsSiteManager to configure the data display. normal EDGE Select the object instance and choose the command.

display Data Information


Description : Value range : Object : A command applied on btssiteManager to state required data display. normal EDGE Select the object instance and choose the command.

distHreqt Class 3
Description : Number of distance measurements, used to compute the weighted average MS-to-BTS distance in handover algorithms. [1 to 16] handOverControl 4 DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[C/M]:

distHreqt is equal to the number of weights in distWtsList (refer to the next entry).

distributionActivation Class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Checks : Activation of distributions for observation purpose. bts [0/1: disabled / enabled] DP Distribution on Radio measurements 0

[C/M]:

Measurement distribution cannot be activated if interference matrix is running on this cell. The purpose of this semantic check is to forbid activation of interference matrix and distribution features at the same time on a cell.

Release : Note :

V15 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

205

distributionDuration Class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Note : Type : Checks: Duration of the observation. bts [0..92] (1 unit = 15 minutes) 0 is interpreted as 1 DP

[C/M]

Measurement distribution cannot be activated if interference matrix is running on this cell. The purpose of this semantic check is to forbid activation of interference matrix and distribution features at the same time on a cell.

Feature : Default value : Release : Note :

Distribution on Radio measurements 0 V15 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

distributionTime Class 3
Description : Starting time of the observation period for distributions (OMC-R server current timer). bts [00:00 to 23:59] DP Distribution on Radio measurements 00:00

Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

206

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks:

[C/M]

Measurement distribution cannot be activated if interference matrix is running on this cell. The purpose of this semantic check is to forbid activation of interference matrix and distribution features at the same time on a cell.

Note :

This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1. The distributionTime parameter set by the operator is relative to the OMC-R server current timer, and not to the local BTS hour. In case of feature activation on all cells of a BSC, the time to compute all the corresponding TGEs can take up to 20 minutes. To ensure that the feature is not to be activated the day after, the operator must leave a margin of 30 minutes between activation time and distributionTime parameter.

Note :

Release :

V15

distributionQualityThreshold Class 3
Description : RxQual threshold for RxLev distribution. This parameter is used according to the following principles:

Uplink case: measurements are those given by the BTS. A measurement is taken into account in the uplink

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

207

RxLev distribution if the RxQual_UP is equal to or greater than distributionQualityThreshold.

Downlink case: measurements are those given by the MS. A measurement is taken into account in the downlink RxLev distribution if the RxQual_Dw is equal to or greater than distributionQualityThreshold. For RxQual distributions, all measurements are kept whatever their RxQual values are.

Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Release : Note : bts

[0 to 7] DP Distribution on Radio measurements 0 V15 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

distWtsList Class 3
Description : List of no more than sixteen weights, used to compute the average MS-to-BTS distance from distHreqt measurements. The L1M function balances distHreqt raw measurements with the weights defined in the distWtsList list. Each measurement is partnered with one weight in the list. Weight/measurement associations are set in the order which the weights are recorded. The latest received measurement is always partnered with the first weight in the list. Super-average = [ (measurement i x weighti)] / 100, i = 1 to distHreqt Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 100] % handOverControl 40 30 20 10 DP

[C/M]:

The number of weights in the list is equal to distHreqt and their sum equals 100.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

208

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

diversity Class 2
Description : Whether reception diversity is allowed in a cell. This parameter is used to control the diversity activation and the choice of the algorithm [enabled / disabled] disabled (0) / enabled (1) bts disabled DP

Value range : Value range: Object : Default value : Type :

dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS2 and the next code in the two DL GMSK Only Link Adaptation tables and the DL GMSK table. [0 to 255] bts 0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation tables) EDGE link adaptation (20219) DP V15

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release :

dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS3 and the next code in the two DL GMSK Only Link Adaptation tables and the DL GMSK table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS3 in the Link Adaption tables) DP V15

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

dlMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS2 and the next code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

209

Default value : Type : Release :

0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation tables) DP V15

dlMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS3 and the next code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS3 in the Link Adaptation tables) DP V15

dlMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS5 and the next code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS5 in the Link Adaptation tables) DP V15

dlMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS6 and the next code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS6 in the Link Adaptation tables) DP V15

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

210

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

dlMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS7 and the next code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS7 in the Link Adaptation tables) DP V15

dlMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS8 and the next code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS8 in the Link Adaptation tables) DP V15

drxTimerMax Class 3
Description : Value range : Maximum value allowed for mobile stations to request non-DRX mode after packet transfer mode. [0 (0s), 1 (1s), 2 (2s), 3 (4s), 4 (8s), 5 (16s), 6 (32s), 7 (64s)] The deactivation value for the sub-feature TF1220.3 transfer non DRX mode is 0. Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : bts GPRS (SV407 - V12, and TF1220 V12.4c) 0s DP V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

211

dtxMode Class 3
Description : MS control of the discontinuous transmission mechanism in a cell. Discontinuous transmission is designed to lessen MS battery consumption and diminish interference by breaking off the transmission when no data or speech are being transmitted. Value range :

For BSC 3000: [frmsMayUseDtx_hrmsShallNotUseDtx, frmsShallUseDtx_hrmsShallNotUseDtx, frmsShallNotUseDtx_hrmsShallNotUseDtx , frmsMayUseDtx_hrmsMayUseDtx, frmsShallUseDtx_hrShallUseDtx, frmsShallNotUseDtx_hrShallUseDtx]. For BSC 6000 and BSC 12000HC: [msMayUseDtx msShallUseDtx msShallNotUseDtx]

Object : Default value :

bts

For BSC 3000: frmsMayUseDtx_hrmsMayUseDtx For BSC 6000 and BSC 12000HC: msShallNotUseDtx

Type : Remark :

DP The cellDtxDownlink attribute allows users to control the use of discontinuous transmission on the downlink. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

duplex link state


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : Active/passive chain link state. [working, fault] bsc and hardware BSC 12000HC DD V10 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

212

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

duration
Description : Time delay before running the next command. The Sleep command can be inserted in a command file as many times as necessary. Value range : Object : Type : [1 to 3600] seconds commandFile - Sleep command DP

dwAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime)


Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Defines the DL TBF Keep-Alive timer. [1 to 64] steps 500 ms for downlink transfer transceiver GPRS (SV407 - V12 and TF1220 - V12.4c) 1 DP V12

dynamicAgprsAllowed Class 2
Description : Enables or disables the Dynamic Agprs feature on the whole PCU. Depending on BSC architecture and release:


Value range :

dynamicAgprsAllowed is a gprsPcuLockExtendedConf sub-parameter (BSC 12000HC V12 or BSC 3000 V14) dynamicAgprsAllowed is a stand-alone parameter (BSC V15)

Depending on BSC architecture and release:


Object : Default value : Release : Note :

[enabled / disabled] (BSC 12000HC V12 or BSC 3000 V14) [yes / no] (BSC V15)

pcu disabled or no (according to BSC architecture and release) V14 If EDGE is activated, enabling the dynamic Agprs feature is strongly recommended.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

213

E
early classmark sending Class 3
Description : Whether Early classmark sending procedure initiated by a multiband MS is allowed. The information is broadcasted to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH (SYS INFO 3). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Note : Release : [Not Allowed/Allowed] bts Not Allowed DP The recommended value is Allowed. V10

edgeDataServiceType Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Type of EDGE packet data service which can be managed by one TDMA. capability not requested / full capability requested transceiver capability not requested DP V15

edgeFavor Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter is used by PCU to configure the relative offer of an EDGE TDMA. 1 to 5 (by step of 0,04) transceiver EDGE traffic management (20231) 1 DP V15

eDGEMixity Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Limitation of GPRS mobiles allocation on EDGE TDMA. [0 to 100] bts EDGE dynamic allocation (20230)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

214

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Default value : Type : Release :

100 DP V15

efd
Description : Identifier of an efd object defined with regard to the md object. Seven efd objects are automatically created for the md object, an "efdAlarm" type object, an "efdConfiguration" type object, an "efdObs" type object, an "efdSpecificNotif" type object, an "efdStateChange" type object, an "efdTrace" type object, and an "efdClass" type object. Refer to the efdType entry. The administrativeState attribute of an efd object sets the conditions for forwarding the associated messages to the OMC-R manager. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [0 to 2147483646] efd Id An efd object should be created in unlocked state.

efdType
Description : Value range : Type of the messages processed by the efd object. [efdAlarm / efdConfiguration / efdObs / efdSpecificNotif / efdStateChange / efdTrace / efdClass] An "efdAlarm" type object tallies alarm notifications issued by the OMC-R agent. An "efdConfiguration" type object tallies object create and set messages issued by the users and attribute value change messages issued by the BSC. An "efdObs" type object tallies observation messages collected by the OMC-R agent. An "efdSpecificNotif" type object allows users to define sets of specific notification messages to process such as endOfArchival, endOfRestore, beginningOfBdeArchival, downloadEnd, endOfBdeArchival, endOfBdaBuiding, endOfMarkingConsultation, or endOfSoftwareChange.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

215

An "efdStateChange" type object tallies object state change notifications. An "efdTrace" type object tallies trace messages collected by the OMC-R agent. An "efdClass" type object tallies efd class objects creation and deletion messages. Thus these notifications enable to identify the external managers which are being connected to the MD-R. Object : Type : Restrictions : efd DP

[M]:

This attribute cannot be modified.

egprsIrULActivation Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether the uplink incremental redundancy feature is enabled or disabled. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled DP

[M] :

Uplink incremental redundancy can not be activated if EDGE feature is not activated on the cell. Refer to the egprsServices entry in this dictionary.

Release : Note:

V16 This parameter is mandatory.

egprsServices Class 3
Descriptio n: Activates EDGE in the cell. If 1, sets to 1 the EDGE presence bit in the GPRS CELL Options including BEP-PERIOD, EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL _REQUEST. If 0, sets to 0 the EDGE presence bit in the GPRS Cell Options omitting BEP-PERIOD and EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL_REQUEST. Disabled (value 0); Enabled (value 1) bts EDGE traffic management (20231) 0

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

216

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DP V15

emergencyCallPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocation request whose cause is "emergency call". This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

emergencyCallRestricted Class 3
Description : Value range : Whether emergency calls from mobiles are authorized in a cell. [not restricted / restricted]

not restricted .....

All emergency calls are accepted whichever is the mobile access class

restricted Emergency calls are forbidden for mobiles with access classes 0 to 9 For mobiles with access classes 11 to 15, emergency calls are forbidden for those whose classes are listed in the entries of the notAllowedAccessClasses attribute

Object : Default value : Type :

bts restricted DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

217

emergencyThreshold Class 3
Description : If the priority of a group call is equal or higher than emergencyThreshold, a notification is periodically sent. A mobile station entering a cell where such a high priority group call is ongoing is then notified. [none, priority 4, priority 3, priority 2, priority 1, priority 0, priority B, priority A] none is the lowest priority priority 0 is recommended signallingPoint ASCI priority 0 DP GSM-R V15

Value range :

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

eMLPPThreshold Class 3
Description : Defines the minimum value that the eMLPP Precedence of an incoming call must have to be taken into account by the BSS with inband signalling (paging and vbs/vgcs assignment request). [none / priority 4 / priority 3 / priority 2 / priority 1 / priority 0 / priority B / priority A] signallingPoint ASCI (GSM-R V12) none DP V12

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

enableRepeatedFacchFr Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Enables or disables the Repeated FACCH feature on AMR FR. [disabled / FR 4.75 kbps / FR 5.9 and lower / FR 6.7 and lower] bts Repeated Downlink FACCH disabled (0) DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

218

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Notes :

The recommended value is FR 6.7 and lower. This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.

Release :

V16

encrypAlgoAsscomp Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element is used in the ASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

encrypAlgoCiphModComp Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element is used in the CIPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

encrypAlgoHoperf Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element is used in the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

219

encrypAlgoHoreq Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element is used in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

encryptionAlgorSupported Class 0
Description : For BSC 3000. Type of ciphering capability supported by the BTSs of a BSS. When no ciphering capability is supported, users calls are not crypted.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Version :

[none / gsmEncryptionV1]

bsc none DP

[C/M]:

Only one type of ciphering capability is defined. V15-V16

encryptionAlgorSupported Class 1
Description : For BSC 2G. Type of ciphering capability supported by the BTSs of a BSS. When no ciphering capability is supported, users calls are not crypted.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[none / gsmEncryptionV1]

bsc none DP

[C/M]:

Only one type of ciphering capability is defined.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

220

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

end date
Description : To select call monitoring data recorded on that date and before. It is on or after beginning date. Do not fill in if information produced to the end should be displayed. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss] Call monitoring - Display (SDO) DP

[A]:

end date is on or after beginning date.

end date
Description : Date on which data were last recorded in the log (default is the current date). It is on or after start date. Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 1>. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>] System session log - Filter DP

[A]:

end date is on or after start date.

end of probative Phase Type


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Note : Whether the user validate or cancel the software change after new delivery activation. [validate software change / cancel software change] bsc - End of probative phase DP V11 This parameter only applies to BSC Upgrades with prototype BDA change (BSC Version Upgrade and BSC Edition Upgrade).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

221

end time
Description : Absolute time of final job run if the job is to be periodically run over a limited period of time. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP <130>. If date matches the date in start time, fill in time with a value after start time. Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] job To define when a job periodicity is defined and only if the job life is limited (users choice). DP

[A]:

end time is after start time.

end time
Description : End of system log reading on the requested end date (default is 24:00). Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP <130>. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<time>] System session log - Filter DP

[A]:

If end date and start date are identical, end time is after start time.

endAlarmFilter
Description : Condition for ceasing the alarm when no counter is involved. The fields that can be combined in the logical expression are described under the startAlarmFilter entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : [logical expression] alarm criteria

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

222

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Condition : Type :

To define if no counter is associated with the criterion. DP

endAlarmThreshold
Description : Minimum counting value in the reference period, below which an end-of-alarm message is sent if the corresponding start-of-alarm message was sent first. The value must be checked by users. This attribute defines a minimum value read at the end of the defined refPeriod. It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold. Threshold changes are effective when the OMC-R is restarted. Value range : Object : Type : [0.00 to 2147483646] mdWarning if detectionFunction = "excessiveAnomalyRa te" DP

endAlarmThreshold
Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresh oldHigh) counting value in the reference period, above/below which an end of "lower threshold/upper threshold" alarm message is sent if the corresponding start-of-alarm message was sent first. The value must be checked by users. If thesholdType is "thresholdLow", it defines a minimum value for a one minute reference period (or the counter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters), above which the end of "lower threshold" alarm message is sent. It must be greater than startAlarmThreshold "low". If thesholdType is "thresholdHigh", it defines a maximum value for a one minute reference period (or the counter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters), below which the end of "upper threshold" alarm message is sent. It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold "high". Threshold changes are effective when the OMC-R is restarted. Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

223

Object : Type : Remark :

mdWarning if detectionFunction = "outOfRangeCounter" DP


endCounterThreshold
Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type :

The threshold limits depend on the associated counter. The BSS counter threshold crossing detection mechanism is described in NTP < 07 >.

Maximum counting threshold when a counter is involved. [0 to 100] alarm criteria To define if a counter is associated with the criterion. DP

endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation reports to cumulate. It is six hours before beginSearchTime at the most. Observation data accumulating ends with the information contained in the first observation message collected in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type Checks : [<date> , <time>] Display custom report DP

[A]: [A]:

endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime. The defined period is less than or equal to six hours.

endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation report to edit (default is one hour before beginSearchTime). The report displays the information contained in the last observation message generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

224

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP <130>. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Note : [<date> , <time>] Display raw report DP

[A]:

endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.

If no permanent observation has been received within the specified period, a message is displayed.

endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the available permanent observations to list (default is twelve days before beginSearchTime). The last listed report is the first observation report generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP <130>. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date> , <time>] List available permanent observations DP

[A]:

endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.

endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the available permanent observations to list (default is twelve days before beginSearchTime). The last listed report is the first observation report generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP <130>. Value range : Object : [<date> , <time>] List available temporary observations

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

225

Type : Checks :

DP

[A]:

endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.

endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the available permanent observations to list (default is twelve days before beginSearchTime). The last listed report is the first observation report generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP <130>. Object : Type : Checks : List observation messages DP

[A]:

endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.

endSessionCriteriaDuration
Description : Value range : Type : Release : Definition of the criterion end a call path tracing session. [5 to 1080] mins DP V11

endSessionCriteriaType
Description : Value range : Definition of the criterion that will end a call path tracing session. [duration / number (of calls) / oam (locking the callPathTrace object)]

duration ......... number .......... oam ............

endSessionCriteriaDuration = [5 to 1080] minutes endSessionCriteriaNbCall = [1 to 2500] administrativeState = "locked"

Only one criterion is defined. When it is true, the call follow-up session is stopped in the BSS. Refer to the usageState entry related to this object in the Dictionary. Object : callPathTrace

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

226

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Checks : Note :

DP

[M] :

The callPathTrace object is locked.

The session is automatically restarted by unlocking the object, regardless of the end-of-session criterion.

enhancedTRAUFrameIndication
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Notes : Whether the BTS uses the Enhanced TRAU Frame (EFT = executable Software) for TCU. [notAvailable / available / active] bsc DI PCM error correction (FM660 - V12)

This attribute is set to "available" only if the transcoderBoards of all the related TCUs are of TCB2 board type and their software are V12. This attribute is set to "active" only if the pcmErrorCorr ection attribute of one bts object related to the BSC is set to "1". Only BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture can support the Enhanced TRAU Frame.

Release :

V12

enhCellTieringConfiguration
Description : This attribute allows to configure the cell tiering algorithm at BTS level instead of the cellTieringConfiguration attribute from V14 release BSC. This parameter is composed of the following five parameters: pcwiHreqave: Averaging window size for PwCI Value range: Int [0 to 16] numberOfPcwiSamples: Minimum number of PwCI samples required to reach a reliable distribution (representative of the real distribution in the whole cell) x 1000 Value range: Int [0 to 60]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

227

hoMarginTiering: Hysteresis between the uCirDLH and lCirDLH tiering thresholds to avoid ping-pong handovers, expressed in dB Value range: Int [0 to 63] dB selfTuningObs: Indicating that the bts is in charge of sending PwCI distribution onto Abis interface Value range: [notSentByBts / sentEveryTime / sentEveryHour] nbLargeReuseDataChannels: Mean number of logical channels belonging to the large frequency reuse pattern and used at the same time for data communications Value range: Int [-16 to 16] Object : Type : Note : handOverControl DP Available bits are the following: Bit N: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value X X 0 0 0 0 0 0 First bits (upper bits) indicate : - All bits set to 0 = PwCI distribution is gathered if tiering is activated (intracell attribute) but not sent onto Abis interface. Checks :

[C/M] 522DI01:

Only ten cells at OMC-R level can be observed with this mode Only 40 cells at OMC-R level can be observed with this mode Bit six and seven can not be set at the same time All the handoverControl object instances of the OMC-R must have the same value for the selfTuningObs field when a bit is different from 0

Checks :

[C/M] 522DI02:

Checks : Checks :

[C/M] 522CO01: [C/M] 522CO02:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

228

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Note :

The bit numbers 0 to 5 (six lower bits) are reserved for future use. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager.

Release :

V14

equipment identity
Description : This parameter is composed of the bts equipment name and the equipment processor number parameters. Refer to these entries in the Dictionary. mdWarning (create) DP V11 During the command "create mdWarning", the operator can define either "equipment identity" or "processor identity", but not both.

Object : Type : Release : Note :

equipment processor number


Description : To select a processor or an equipment in the preselected type Consult the corresponding notification messages ("Equipment number" field). Do not fill in if neither bsc equipment name nor bts equipment name is defined or if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 200] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

error concealment unit Class 2


Description : Whether the Error Concealment Unit (ECU) is used. The ECU provides a voice quality improvement on the uplink in bad radio propagation conditions. [not used, used] bts not used

Value range : Object : Default value :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

229

Type : Release :

DP V11

errorCorrectionMethod Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : Type of correction method used on the A interface. [basicRetr (only value accepted) / prevCyclRetr] signallingLinkSet basicRetr DP

[C/M]:

The only accepted value is 1"basicRetr".

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

estimatedSiteLoad Class 3
Description : This parameter is used

at site creation, in order to preset the Erlang consumption of the new Cell Group otherwise, in order to set the Erlang consumption of a site to a value either less or greater than the one calculated using the ERLANG_PER_N_TRX_CELL table

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

[0 to 1100] btsSiteManager 0 (the consumption is then calculated using the ERLANG_PER_N_TRX_CELL table) DP V15

exclusive interval of codano


Description : To select messages according to their fault number. The filter can contain one (or several) intervals defining the fault numbers not to be retrieved. For example, interval 5~8 enables to retrieve ALL the fault numbers except fault numbers 5, 6, 7, and 8. Value range : Object : [0 to 65535 - 0 to 65535] Alarm and notification logs - Filter

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

230

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DP V12

exclusive list of codano


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : To select messages that do not contain one (or several) given fault number(s). [0 to 65535] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP V12

executableSoftware
Description : An instance of this managed object class is used to represent a unit of software that is separately identifiable and is ready to be used by the system. [0 to 255] executableSoftware DP

Value range : Object : Type :

executableSoftwareId
Description : Identifier of a executableSoftware object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, if not given by the Manager. This attribute cannot be modified. [0 to 255] executableSoftware Id V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

executableSoftwareName
Description : Name of a software version. This attribute is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, if not given by the Manager. This attribute cannot be modified. [9 to 12] String executableSoftware DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

231

extCommsInt
Description : State of the X.25 links set up from the BSC chain X.25 ports [working / fault]. Each port is identified with regard to the mother SICX board:


Value range : Object : Type : Note :

working ......... fault ............

The X.25 link is correctly initialized. An error was detected (SLS board faulty, etc.).

[0 to 65535] bsc - Display chain information DD This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

extended cell Class 2


Description : Whether the cell is extended (up to 120 km large) or not. The cell working mode governs the upper limit of the following attribute values (refer to theses entries in the Dictionary):


Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

callClearing, msRangeMax, and rndAccTimAdvThres hold attributes of the bts object concentAlgoExtMsRange and concentAlgoIntMsRan ge attributes of the associated handOverControl object if the bts object describes a concentric cell

[true (extended) / false (normal)] bts false DP

[M]:

If the attribute is changed to "true" and a CBCH is defined for the cell, this channel is carried by a radio time slot with an even identifier number. Refer to the channelType entry in the Dictionary. It is not possible to unlock a BTS that has its extendedCell parameter set to true if the site is running software from one of Dual TDMA DLUs.

[M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

232

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Release : Note :

V9 In that mode, the radio time slots with odd identifier numbers are unknown to the BSC and the diversity functionality is not available in the cells.

extendedTimingAdvanceWindow
Descripti on : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks: This parameter is used to control the Extended Timing Advance Window feature. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled DP

[M]:

It is not possible to unlock a BTS that has its extendedTimingAdvanceWindow parameter set to disabled if the site is running software from one of Dual TDMA DLUs.

Release : Note :

V16 The recommended value is enabled. The feature will be enabled/disabled for all the TRXs of a given cell.

external alarm configuration Class 2


Description : Configuration of the external alarm loops controlled by a BTS. Alarm loop "n" is monitored (not monitored) when the nth bit is set to 1 (0) in the binary field. The alarm mask is immediately displayed in the hexadecimal field just below. The alarm mask can be set using the hexadecimal field as well as the binary field. The number of connectors per alarm board depends on the type of the alarm boards installed in the BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

233

BTS

Type of board

Number of protected external alarms per cabinet 4 6 4 4 4 16 16 16 8

S2000 S2000H/L S4000 Indoor S4000 Outdoor S4000 Smart S8000 S12000 BTS 18000 BTS 6000 (See note below.)

ALATO SBCF ALAT ALATO ALATO ALCO RECAL (CBCF) ALCO RECAL (CBCF) ABM ABM/RICAM

The correspondence between those 48 bits and the external alarms of each site directly depends on three factors: the type of BTS, the number of cabinets, and the convention for numbering those cabinets.

S4000:

24 external alarms max., 6 cabinets - 4 externals alarms per cabinet. Therefore 4 bits by cabinets placed on the mask on the same order of the numbering of the cabinets. Example: to unmask all the external alarms of S4000 Indoor S22 the alarm mask would be:

S8000/S12000/BT S 18000:

48 external alarms max., up to 3 cabinets in the future - 16 alarms per cabinet (16 bits per cabinet).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

234

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Note :

BTS 6000

24 external alarms max., up to 3 cabinets - 8 alarms per cabinet (8 bits per cabinet). 18 external alarms max., up to 3 cabinets in the future - 6 alarms per cabinet (6 bits per cabinet).

S2000H/L:

[48-bit register] btsSiteManager 48 bits equal to "0" DP If RICAM/ICAM is used instead in the BCF, the reduced connectivity leads to limitations in terms of ABMs. Then in term of total alarms:


Release : V9

BTS18000 with RICAM/ICAM max. configuration includes one full main cab + one half ext cab, that is 1 RICAM + 2 ABMs, so 24 DALE max. BT6000 with RICAM/ICAM max. configuration includes one main cab + one ext cab, that is 1 RICAM+ 1 ABM, so 16 DALE max.

external battery cabinet Class 2


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "ancillary battery cabinet" in S8000 Outdoor. [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager DP V9

externalTime
Description : Current OMC-R agent date and time. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : [<date> , <time>] md DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

235

Remark :

Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed in the system "Session informations" window which refers to the workstation internal clock. This parameter cannot be modified.

Note :

extUtbfNoData Class 3
Description : When this Extended UL TBF sub-feature is enabled, it makes possible that MSs do not send Packet Uplink Dummy Control Block during periods of inactivity. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled DP Extended UL TBF V15

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Release :

F
facchPowerOffset Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Default value : Note : Release : Power offset that applies to FACCH signalling [0..10]; step = 2 bts DP Tx power offset for signalling channels 0 (no power offset) This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher. V16

Family
Description : Family of counters in which are chosen the counters to be observed. The list of the available families depends on the Observed object class and the observation type selected in the report template definition of the observation. See Tables hereafter. Value range : Object : Type : [See tables below] report template DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

236

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks :

[M] :

Family is used to include counters in observation report. Family is not saved with the report template as it is reset every time the template editor is open. Counters from different families can be included in the same report template.

Observed object: bsc

Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS)

A interface, synthetic A interface, OMC interface Releases of communications in signaling phase, Channel mode, ASCI, NONE, BSC 3G, synthetic

Observed object: bts Observation real time (ORT) SDCCH allocations, Intra-bss handovers, Inter-bss handovers, TCH allocations, Establishment, Global handovers SDCCH allocations, TCH allocations, Channel mode, Inter-bss handovers, Intra-bss handovers, Intra-cell handovers, Dedicated channel assignment, Global handovers, Establishment, Releases of communications in signaling phase, Releases of communications in traffic phase, Layer One Management, Interferences, Directed retry, SMS, Abis Level 2, ASCI, NONE, GPRS, AMR, EDGE, WPS, synthetic

Observation fast statistic (OFS)

Observed object : transceiverZone Observation real time (ORT) SDCCH allocations on TrZone TCH allocations on TrZone

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

237

Observation fast statistic (OFS)

SDCCH allocations on TrZone, TCH allocations on TrZone, Layer One Management on TrZone, GPRS on TrZone, AMR on TrZone, EDGE, WPS -------------------------------------------

Observed object : transceiverEquipment Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS)

Observed object : btsSiteManager Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS) ---------------------BSC 3G - Abis Level 1

Observed object : pcmCircuit Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS) ----------------------PCM/synthetic

Observed object : adjacentCellHandOver Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS) Observed object : omu Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS) Observed object : tmu Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS) Observed object : cc Observation real time (ORT) --------------------------------------------BSC 3G ----------------------BSC 3G --------------------Neighbor cells, AMR

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

238

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Observation fast statistic (OFS) Observed object : cem Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS) Observed object : pcmPort Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS)

BSC 3G

----------------------BSC 3G

---------------------BSC 3G - PcmPort

Observed object : signalingLink Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS) Observed object : channel Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

faultNumber
Description : To select messages with a given fault number. This parameter is a component of the specific problems filter. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 40000] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

fERThreshold1 Class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Lowest threshold taken into account for Frame Erasure Rate (FER) evaluation. bts [0 to 100], steps of 0.1 % DP Distribution on Radio measurements

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

239

Default value : Note :

0 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

Checks :

[C/M]:

Following rule applies: fERThreshold1 <= fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <= fERThreshold4 The purpose of this semantic check is to check coherency between FER thresholds.

Release :

V15

fERThreshold2 Class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Note : Second threshold taken into account for FER evaluation. bts [0 to 100], steps of 0.1 % DP Distribution on Radio measurements 0 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

Checks :

[C/M]:

Following rule applies: fERThreshold1 <= fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <= fERThreshold4 The purpose of this semantic check is to check coherency between FER thresholds.

V15 Release :

fERThreshold3 Class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Note : Third threshold taken into account for FER evaluation. bts [0 to 100], steps of 0.1 % DP Distribution on Radio measurements 0 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

240

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks :

[C/M]:

Following rule applies: fERThreshold1 <= fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <= fERThreshold4 The purpose of this semantic check is to check coherency between FER thresholds.

Release :

V15

fERThreshold4 Class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Note : Highest threshold taken into account for FER evaluation. bts [0 to 100], steps of 0.1 % DP Distribution on Radio measurements 0 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

Checks :

[C/M]:

Following rule applies: fERThreshold1 <= fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <= fERThreshold4 The purpose of this semantic check is to check coherency between FER thresholds.

Release :

V15

fhsRef Class 2
Description : Identifier of the frequencyHoppingSystem object that defines the frequency hopping management parameters for the radio time slot. Setting this attribute and the maio attribute allows the time slot to obey frequency hopping laws. Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Checks : [0 to 63] channel To define if the time slot hops in frequencies. DP

[C/M]:

This attribute is undefined if frequency hopping is not allowed for the parent bts object (btsIsHopping = "no hopping") or the channelType of the channel object is "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH".

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

241

[C/M]:

If the attribute is defined, the following is checked:

The maio attribute is also defined. The referenced frequencyHoppingSystem object is created for the parent bts object. Each frequency occurs once in the mobileAllocatio n list and is allotted in the cellAllocation list of the parent bts object. The number of frequencies in the mobileAllocation list is greater than the maio attribute value. Concentric cell: The frequencies in the mobileAllocation list are not used in the zone to which the parent transceiver object does not belong.

filteredTrafficCoefficient Class 3
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Release : Filter coefficient which is taken into account in the cell load evaluation. bts [0 to 1, by step of 0.001] DP AMR based on traffic 0 V15

floor
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Floor number which identifies the localization in a building. [1 to 2 characters] transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardware transcoder 3G. DD

flowControlMaxDelay
Description : This attribute specifies the maximum time interval between two consecutive FLOW-CONTROL-MS messages sent to the SGSN. [5 to 6000] seconds pcusn

Value range : Object :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

242

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Default value : Type : Release :

300 DP V14

flowControlMaxRate
Description : This attribute specifies the minimum interval between sending consecutive Flow-Control PDU for a given BVC or for a MS. It represents the C timer in the ETSI GPRS specifications. [1001 to 9999] ms pcusn 2000 DP V14

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

fnOffset class 2
Description : Allows to specify and control Frame Number (FN) difference between BTSs in case of network synchronization by GPS. Refer also to the tnOffset entry in this dictionary. Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Release : Note : btsSiteManager [0..84863] DP Network Synchronization 0 V15 This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

forced handover algo Class 3


Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles to be granted access to a neighbor cell in case of forced handover. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48] dB handOverControl less than -110

Value range : Object : Default value :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

243

Type : Release :

DP V9

frAmrPriority Class 2
Description : This attribute defines the AMR FR priority of a TDMA. This attribute is modified only if the corresponding bts object instance is locked (objectMustBeLockedError). Value range : Int [0 to 2] Priority 0 is given to a high priority TDMA Priority 1 is given to a low priority TDMA Priority 2 disables this service on the TDMA transceiver 0 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

frequencyHoppingSystem
Description : Identifier of a frequencyHoppingSystem object that defines frequency hopping management parameters for radio time slots that obey frequency hopping laws. A bts object may reference up to sixty-four objects of this type. Refer to the hoppingSequenceNumber and mobileAllocation entries in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] frequencyHoppingSystem Id

[C]:

The associated bts object is created and the frequencyHoppingSystem object is not created for that object. The number of frequencyHoppingSystem objects created for a bts object is limited to sixty-four. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. The frequencyHoppingSystem object is created.

[C]:

[C/D]: [M]: [M/D]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

244

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[D]:

If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No channel object dependent on the bts object refers to the frequencyHoppingSystem object (fhsRef attribute).

[D]:

frPowerControlTargetMode Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the target codec mode for AMR FR power control. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute is modified if the powerControl object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [FR 12.2 / FR 10.2 / FR 6.7 / FR 5.9 / FR 4.75] powerControl FR 12.2 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

frPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Notes : Release : Downlink AMR codec target used to define the downlink power control threshold for FR AMR calls. [FR 12.2 / FR 10.2 / FR 6.7 / FR 5.9 / FR 4.75] powerControl Tx power offset for signalling channels FR 12.2 DP This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher. V16

fullDlKa Class 3
Description : Whether the Full DL Keep Active feature is enabled or not. This feature allows MSs that operate in a non-extended UL TBF mode to increase their uplink throughput. Value range : Object : [disabled / enabled] bts

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

245

Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

Extended UL TBF disabled DP

[C/M]:

The following flag combination is prohibited: nwExtUtbf = enabled and fullDlKa = disabled

Release :

V15

G
geographical coordinates
Description : Definition of the geographical coordinates of the equipment in the network. These coordinates are defined by a latitude and a longitude, each expressed by four fields. Value range : Latitude is expressed by the four following fields:


Object :

Deg Lat .......... Min Lat .......... Hundreth of sec Lat ........ Direction Lat ....

[0 to 90] degrees [0 to 59] minutes [0 to 5999] hundredth second

[North / South]

Longitude is expressed by the four following fields: Deg Lon .......... Min Lon .......... Hundreth of sec Lon ........ Direction Lon .... [0 to 180] degrees [0 to 59] minutes [0 to 5999] hundredth second

[East / West]

bsc btsSiteManager md transcoder DI V11

Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

246

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

geographical coordinates
Description : Definition of the geographical coordinates of the pcuSN equipment in the network. These coordinates are defined by a latitude and a longitude, each expressed by four fields. Value range : Latitude is expressed by the four following fields:


Object : Feature : Type : Release :

Deg Lat .......... Min Lat .......... Hundreth of sec Lat ........... Direction Lat ....

[0 to 90] degrees [0 to 59] minutes [0 to 5999] hundredth second

[North / South]

Longitude is expressed by the four following fields: Deg Lon .......... Min Lon .......... Hundreth of sec Lon ........... Direction Lon .... [0 to 180] degrees [0 to 59] minutes [0 to 5999] hundredth second

[East / West]

pcu, pcusn GPRS (SV407 - V12) DI V12

gprsAvgParam Class 3
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:


Release :

nAvgI nAvgT nAvgW

Refer to these entries in this dictionary. V12

gprsCellActivation Class 3
Description : Value range : This is a Flag used to activate the GPRS at cell level. [disabled / enabled]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

247

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) disabled DP V12

gprsNetworkModeOperation Class 3
Description : Value range : Indicates the network mode of operation. [0..2] with:


Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : bts

0 = NMO II 1 = NMO I (recommended value, activates the feature from the MSs point of view) 2 = NMO III (forbidden in this release)

GPRS (TF1134 - NMO I) 0 (NMO II) DP V15

gprsPcuCrossConnectList Class 2
Description : This parameter is a list of pairs of the following attributes:


Value range :

pcmNbr nbrTch

Refer to these entries in this dictionary. BSC 12000HC: [0 to 12] pairs of [pcmNbr, nbrTch], BSC 3000 V15: [0 to 24] pairs of [pcmNbr, nbrTch] BSC 3000 V16, E1 PCM: [0 to 32] pairs of [pcmNbr, nbrTch] BSC 3000 V16, T1 PCM: [0 to 36] pairs of [pcmNbr, nbrTch] PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC (18749) V12

Feature : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

248

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

gprsPcuLockExtendedConf Class 2
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:


Default value : Release :

dynamicAgprsAllowed agprsTSharingProtection

Refer to these entries in this Dictionary. [disabled / 0] V12

gprsPermittedAccess Class 3
Description : It defines the Routing Area Color (3-bit length) of the cell. If the MS receives different values of the Routing Area Color field in two different cells, it shall interpret the cell re-selection information as if the two cells belonged to different RA. [0 to 7] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP V12

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release :

gprsPreemption Class 3
Description : Set to yes, it allows the PCU to refuse GSM preemption over shared GSM/GPRS TS if GPRS resources are not sufficient to ensure the minimum bandwidth for each MS. In the case of lack of GSM radio TS, the BSC has to allocate one shared GSM/GPRS radio TS to GSM and a preemption procedure is started. When one shared radio TS temporarily allocated to GSM is released (end of GSM allocation due to end of call or handover), then a reallocation procedure is started to increase the GPRS capacity. Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : [yes / no] bts GPRS (TF1121 - V12) yes

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

249

Type : Release :

DP V12

gprsPreemptionProtection Class 3
Description : Protection timer used by the BSC in order to reduce the load in case of PCU TDMA TS Status Nack message reception during a preemption procedure. This message is sent by the PCU. [1 to 60] second(s) bts GPRS (TF1121 - V12) 10 DP V12

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

gprsPriority Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf)


Description : Priorities affected to the TDMA. Priority affected to the TDMA when allocating packet resources. Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : [p1 or p2 (high GPRS priority)] transceiver p1 GPRS (TF1121 - V12) DP V12

gprsState
Description : Object : Type : Release : Reserved for future use. bts (cell) DD V15

gprsState
Description : Object : Reserved for future use. transceiver

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

250

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DD V15

gprsTimerWaitPUAM Class 3
Description : Waiting timer for the reception of the uplink assignment after sending a PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST message. This timer is used on the MS side to define when to stop waiting for Packet Uplink Assignment Message after sending of a PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST message Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note : [500ms, 1s, 2s, 4s] bts 0.5 s GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP V12 These parameters are applicable for BSS V12 and V14 only.

gprsTimerWaitRLC Class 3
Description : Waiting timer for release of the TBF after reception of the final block. This timer is used on the MS side to define when the MS has received all the RLC data blocks. When the timer expires the MS releases the resources associated with the TBF and begins to monitor its paging. Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note : [500ms, 1s, 2s, 4s] bts 0s GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP V12 These parameters are applicable for BSS V12 and V14 only.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

251

gsmToUmtsReselection Class 3
Description : Attribute specified to implement L1M features on PowerControl. This spare parameter is used to transit the attribute. gsmToUmtsR eselection is composed of 4 parameters:


Default value : Object : Type : Checks: no bts DP

UMTS Access min level UMTS reselect ion ARFCN UMTS reselect ion offset UMTS search min level

[C/M]:

UMTS reselection ARFCN of the attribute gsmToUmtsReselection accept 0 (feature not activated) or frequencies must be in bands:

band I (UMTS 2000): 10562 to 10838 band II (UMTS 1900): 9662 to 9938 and 412, 437, 462, 487, 512, 537, 562, 587, 612, 637, 662, 687 band III (UMTS 1800): 1162 to 1513 band IV: (UMTS 1700/2100): 1537 to 1738 and 1887, 1912, 1937, 1962, 1987, 2012, 2037, 2062, 2087

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

252

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

band V (UMTS 850): 4357 to 4458 and 1007, 1012, 1032, 1037, 1062, 1087 band VI (UMTS 800): 4387 to 4413 and 1037, 1062 band VII (UMTS 2600): 2237 to 2563 and 2587, 2612, 2637, 2662, 2687, 2712, 2737, 2762, 2787, 2812, 2837, 2862, 2887, 2912 band VIII (UMTS 900): 2937 to 3088 band IX: (UMTS 1700): 9237 to 9387


Release : Description: V14

Allows the customer to set a value that the BSC uses when the MSC does not provide optional service handover information in ASSIGN_REQUEST or HANDOVER_REQUEST messages 0: should;1: should not; 2: shall not; 3:gsmToUMTSHoDisabled (always takes precedence over the MSC value) bsc 3 DP

Value range:

Object: Default value: Type: Checks: Release: Note:

V17 This parameter is available only for BSC 3000. This parameter is optional.

H
handOver from signalling channel Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Authorization to perform intercell handovers on signalling channels (SDCCH or TCH in signalling mode). [enabled / disabled] handOverControl disabled

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

253

Type : Remark :

DP The attribute was named TCH and sDCCHHandOver on the V8 OMC-R MMI.

handOverControl
Description : Identifier of a handOverControl object that defines handover management parameters in a cell. A bts object may reference one and only one object of this type. [0 to 2147483646] handOverControl Id

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C]:

The associated bts object is created and the handOverControl object is not created for that object. The parent bsc object is unlocked. If class 2 attributes are modified, the associated bts object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. The handOverControl object is created. The associated bts object is not referenced, except by a powerControl object. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

[M]:

[C/D]:

[M/D]: [D]: [D]:

hardware configuration Class 2


Description : Type of architecture used in the transceiverEquipment. This parameter flags the TRX in HPRM, RM, MPRM or HPRM3T in the BTS 18000.

Value range :

[Dcu2 / Dcu4 / Drx / Rm / Hprm / Mrm / Other] for BSC V15 [Dcu2 / Dcu4 / Drx / Rm / Hprm / Mprm / HPRM3T / Other] for BSC V16 and subsequent releases

Object : Feature :

transceiverEquipment BTS 18000 introduction, BTS 18000 HPRM, differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40 Watts, and BTS 18000 HPRM3T differentiation at the OMC-R

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

254

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Default value : Type : Checks :

0 DP

[M]:

Checks that the default value is not left on BTS 18000. In case of BTS 18000 (btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), checks at unlock transceiverEquipment that its HardwareConfiguration is different from DRX, DCU2, DCU4. Checks that the default value is not left on BTS 6000 or BTS 18000. In case of BTS 6000 or BTS 18000 (btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), checks at unlock transceiverEquipment that its HardwareConfiguration is one of the following DCU2, DCU4. or "DRX" Checks that default value is set on other BTS than BTS 18000. In case of BTS different from BTS 18000 (btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), this checks at unlock transceiverEquipment that its Hardware Configuration is different from Rm, Hprm, Mprm, Hprm3t or Other. Checks that default value is set on other BTS than BTS 6000 or BTS 18000. In case of BTS different from BTS 6000 or BTS 18000 (btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), this checks at unlock transceiverEquipment that its Hardware Configuration is different from Rm, Hprm, Mprm, Hprm3t or Other. Consistency inside an RM definition. In case of BTS 18000 (btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), this checks at unlock transceiverEquipment that its hardware configuration is the same as the other unlocked transceiver equipment of the same RM. Consistency inside an RM definition. In case of BTS 6000 or BTS 18000 (btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), this checks at unlock transceiverEquipment that its hardware configuration is the same as the other unlocked transceiver equipment of the same RM. Software Reference coherency inside an RM. Existing check that must be run after previous checks.

Checks:

[M]:

[M]:

[M]:

[M]:

[M]:

[M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

255

Release : Note :

V11 The value MRM is not supported. The value HPRM3T only applies to BSC 3000.

hardwareRef Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Hardware reference of a site BCF. Check BSS upgrade file. [0 to 65535] btsSiteManager DP

hardwareRef Class 2
Description : Hardware reference of a TRX/DRX. Check BSS upgrade file. When a TRX is a DCU4 or a DRX (S2000, S8000, S12000, E-cell), the hardware reference field of the transceiver equipment object must be equal to 0. [0 to 65535] transceiverEquipment DP

Value range : Object : Type :

hardwareRef Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Hardware reference of a TCB. Check BSS upgrade file. [0 to 65535] transcoderBoard DP

hexa text
Description : Transcription in hexadecimal of the contents of a short message. The content of the hexa text parameter is displayed when using the command Display hexa. It cannot be modified by the user. Only the content of the text parameter is modified by the user. Refer to the text (short message) entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Release : [chain of characters] short message - Display hexa DI V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

256

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

highSpeedUplinkDistortionRemoval
Description : To control the high speed uplink distortion removal; when enabled, some uplink distortion caused by high speed mobiles will be removed by the BTS. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

hoMargin Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : A margin to use for PBGT handovers to avoid subsequent handover, in PBGT formula. [-63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver 4 DP

hoMarginAMR Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the handover margin linked to AMR quality handover. This attribute is modified if the adjacentCellHandOver object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [-63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver -2 DP V14

hoMarginBeg Class 3
Description : Margin to be added to hoMargin until rxLevHreqave for early handover mechanism in order to compensate the lack of measurements. This parameter is coupled with hoMargin and rxLevHreqaveBeg. Value range : Object : Default value : [0..63] dB bts 4

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

257

Type : Checks : Note :

DP

[M] :

This parameter is inhibited when set to 63 dB.

This parameter shall be set such as hoMarginhoMargin+ hoMarginBeg or hoMarginBeg0 This parameter is not available for DCU2.

Release :

V11

hoMarginDist Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Margin to be used for Distance Handovers. [-63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver -24 dB DP V8

hoMarginRxLev Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Margin to be used for signal strength Handovers. [-63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver -24 dB DP V8

hoMarginRxQual Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : The margin is used for Signal Quality Handovers. [-63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver -24 dB DP V8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

258

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

hoMarginTiering Class 3
Description : Hysteresis between the uPwCIDLH and lPwCIDLH tiering thresholds to avoid ping-pong handovers (expressed in dB). This attribute allows to configure the CellTieringConfiguration at bts level. CellTiering mode must be activated. [0 to 63] dB handOverControl 4 dB Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12) DP V12

Note : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release :

hoMarginTrafficOffset Class 3
Description : Minimum signal strength margin with the serving cell allowing the best neighbor cell selection when a handover is triggered for overload reasons. [0 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 - V12) 0 dB DP

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

[C/M]: [C/M]:

This attribute must be in the range [0 63]. When set to "0", the handovers for traffic reasons are not allowed in the adjacent cell.

Release : Note :

V12 This attribute only applies to BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRX boards.

hoPingpongCombination Class 3
Description : Two causes (HOInitialCause and HONonEssentialCause), indicating the causes of ping-pong handovers in overlapping areas. The following causes are defined with regard to the neighboring cell:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

259

HOInitialCause indicates the essential handover cause which leads to enter the neighbor cell (cause of incoming handover). HONonEssentialCause indicates the non-essential handover cause which leads to leave the cell (cause of outgoing handover).

This parameter defines the combination for which the hoPingpongTimeRejection attribute is used. Value range : [rxQual, rxLev, distance, powerBudget, capture, directedRetry, OaM, traffic, all, allCapture, allPowerBudget, AMRquality] adjacentCellHandOver General protection against ping-pong handovers (TF821-V12) DP

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked. Check that all the values of HOPingpong Combination attribute must be different. This element checks for non duplications of HOPingpongCombination values

[M]:

Notes :

allCapture cause (only applying to HONonEssentialCa use)matches the capture cause for all the micro-cells belonging to the current macro-cell . This cause has to be used in order to prevent ping-pong handovers between micro- and macro-layers. allPowerBudget cause (only applying to HONonEss entialCause) matches the powerBudget cause for all the neighboring cells of the current cell. This cause is used in order to restore the "Minimum time between handovers" (feature TF218).

Release :

V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

260

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

hoPingpongTimeRejection Class 3
Description : Time before a new handover attempt is triggered. Refer to bsc object timeBetweenHOConfiguration and bts object bts time between HO configuration attributes in this Dictionary of Parameters for this timer activation. Refer to adjacentCellHandOver object hoPingpongCom bination attribute in this Dictionary of Parameters for the combinations for which this timer applies. To avoid ping-pong handovers this new timer is started after a successful handover. Up to the expiration of this timer, the receipt of HANDOVER INDICATION message is ignored. Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Release : Description: Value range: Object: Default value: Type: Checks: Release: Note: V17 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000. [0 to 60] s adjacentCellHandOver General protection against ping-pong handovers (TF821-V12). [30 sec] V12 Time before a new handover attempt to UMTS can be triggered 0...60 seconds (0 means immediately) adjacentCellUTRAN 30s DP

hoppingSequenceNumber Class 2
Description : Hopping sequence number used by a radio time slot which obeys frequency hopping laws. Select different HSNs for nearby cells that use the same set of frequencies. Value range : Object : [0 to 63] frequencyHoppingSystem

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

261

Type : Checks :

DP

[M]:

If the frequencyHoppingSystem object is referenced by a channel object (fhsRef attribute defined), the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

hoSecondBestCellConfiguration Class 3
Description : Number of neighbor cells in which the BSC immediately attempts to perform a new handover when the previous handover attempt failed with return to the old channel. Giving the attribute a value greater than 2 allows the BSC to renew the handover request without waiting for a new set of radio measurements (the first attempt is included in this count). The same list of neighbor eligible cells is used to process the request (no new list is provided by the BTS). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [1 to 3] bsc 3 DP V9

hoTraffic Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bsc level are allowed. [disabled / enabled] bsc Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 - V12) disabled DP V12 Enabling this parameter allows the related BTSs with DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture handle handovers for traffic reasons.

hoTraffic Class 3
Description : Value range : Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bts level are allowed. [disabled / enabled]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

262

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

bts Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 - V12) enabled DP V12 This attribute is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

hrAmrPriority Class 2
Description : This attribute defines the AMR HR priority of a TDMA. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can be modified only if the corresponding bts object instance is locked (objectMustBeLockedError). Value range : [0 to 2] Priority 0 is given to a high priority TDMA Priority 1 is given to a low priority TDMA Priority 2 disables this service on the TDMA transceiver 0 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

hrCellLoadEnd Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the cell load threshold used for AMR FR/HR decision. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the bts object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : [0 to 100] bts 0

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

263

Type : Checks : Release : Note :

DP

0570CO01 - hrCellLoadEnd <= hrCellLoadStart

V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

hrCellLoadStart Class 3
Description : This attribute is used to trigger the beginning of AMR HR allocation in the cell. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the bts object instance is unlocked. In this version, this parameter has the following meaning:


Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Release : Note :

if HRCellLoadStart is equal to 0, then a FR radio channel is always allocated to the MS, if HRCellLoadStart is greater than 0, then a HR radio channel is allocated to the MS, according to its radio conditions.

[0 to 100] bts 100 DP

0570CO01 - hrCellLoadEnd <= hrCellLoadStart

V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

hrPowerControlTargetMode Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the target codec mode for AMR HR power control. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

264

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

This attribute can only be modified if the powerControl object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [HR 7.4 / HR 6.7 / HR 5.9 / HR4.75] powerControl HR 7.4 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

hrPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Default value : Notes : Release : Downlink AMR codec target used to define the downlink power control threshold for HR AMR calls. [HR 7.4 / HR 6.7 / HR 5.9 / HR 4.75] PowerControl DP Tx power offset for signalling channels HR 7.4 This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher. V16

I
identifier
Description : Name of a BSS software application followed by its version number. Refer to the executableSoftware entry related to the software object in the Dictionary where the name formats are explained. Value range : Object : Type : [XXXabcdef] software - Display markers DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

265

identifier
Description : Name of a BSC database configuration file followed by its version number. Refer to the executableSoftware entry related to the software object in the Dictionary where the name formats are explained. Value range : Object : Type : [BSxabvcdefgh] software-bsc - Display markers DD

identifier
Description : Name of a BSC database configuration file followed by its version number. Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in the Dictionary where the name formats are explained. Value range : Object : Type : [BSxabvcdefgh] software-bsc - Display markers DD

identifier
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Identifier of a short message. It allows MSs to identify the short message and discard it if already received. [0 to 65535] short message DD

iem
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : The Interface Electronic Module, is part of the LSA RC (Low Speed Access Resource Complex) module. [0 to 2147483646] iem DP It is possible for this parameter to take on an infinite value.

If so, it the time will not expire and there will be no automatic logout procedure.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

266

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

iemId
Description : Identifier of the iem object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU 3000. [0 to 2147483646] iem DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

iMSIAttachDetach Class 2
Description : Whether MS attachment/detachment is allowed. Allowing enables the system to take into account temporary MS absence to prevent unsuccessful call attempts. [allowed / not allowed] bts allowed DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

in
Description : The Interface Node, which provides the network connectivity through PCM trunk or higher speed interfaces (OC-3 - Optical Carrier level 3 - or STM-1 - Synchronous Transport level 1) as well as the time switching capability. [0 to 0] interfaceNode DP

Value range : Object : Type :

inactivity timeout
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Remark : Maximum time between two user commands, over which the system induces an automatic logout procedure. [2 to 2147483646] (5) minute user profile DP Moving the mouse inside an MMI window on the terminal screen resets the counter.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

267

inclusive interval of codano


Description : To select messages according to their fault number. The filtering list can contain one (or several) interval(s). For example, interval 5~8 enables to retrieve fault numbers 15, 6, 7, and 8. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Release : [0 to 65535 - 0 to 65535] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP V12

inclusive list of codano


Description : To select messages according to their fault number. The filter can contain one (or several) fault number(s). Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Release : [0 to 65535] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP V12

incomingHandOver Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Whether incoming handovers are allowed in a cell. [enabled / disabled] handOverControl enabled DP

inhibitRequest
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Whether the SS7 channel is inhibited. [true / false] signallingLink - Set inhibit DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

268

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks : Remark :

[M]:

The parent bsc object and the signallingLink object are unlocked.

An inhibit request may have no immediate effect and can even be refused. Run a Display all command on the signallingLink object to display the resource state of the SS7 channel and check that the system has applied the request (signallingLinkResState).

inId
Description : Identifier of an in object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The only value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. [0 to 0] interfaceNode DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

initialMCSDL Class 3
Description : Initial MCS in the DL direction.. It is selected by the PCU for the initial DL-LA-CommandedMCS. Note the backhaul constraints can reduce the MCS. MCS2 (value of 0 or 2), MCS3 = 3, MCS5 = 5, MCS6 = 6, MCS7 = 7, MCS8 = 8, MCS9 = 9 transceiver EDGE traffic management (20231) MCS2 DP V15 MCS5 is the recommended value. If a cell with a low radio quality is experiencing a high BLER in MCS5, it is then recommended to use MCS2 or MCS3.

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

initialMCSUL Class 3
Description : Initial MCS in the UL direction. It is selected by the PCU for the initial UL-LA-CommandedMCS. Note the backhaul constraints will reduce the MCS. Value range : Object : MCS2 (value of 0 or 2), MCS3 = 3, MCS5 = 5, MCS6 = 6, MCS7 = 7, MCS8 = 8, MCS9 = 9 transceiver

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

269

Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

EDGE traffic management (20231) MCS2 DP V15

interBscDirectedRetry Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in a BSS. [allowed / not allowed] bsc allowed DP V9 Queuing must also be activated at BSC level.

interBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in a cell. [allowed / not allowed] bts allowed DP V9 Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.

interCellHOExtPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable defines the processing priority of incoming inter-bss handovers in a cell. This priority is used when radio resource allocation queueing is not requested by the MSC or not authorized in the BSS (refer to the "bscQueueingOption" entry in the Dictionary). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

270

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

interCellHOIntPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable defines the processing priority of incoming intra-bss handovers in a cell. This priority is always used, whether radio resource allocation queueing is authorized in the BSS or not. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

interferenceType Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Type of interference created by neighbor cell. [notApplicable / adjacent / coChannel] adjacentCellHandOver Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12) notApplicable DP V12

interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc
Description : Mediation of interferenceMatrixRunning attribute.

Value range :

[yes (if at least one cell below BSC with the parameter is equal to yes / no (if no cell below BSC with the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameter is equal to no] bts Switch Interference Matrix (16411) 0 DD This parameter is optional and read-only. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only. It is not present in CREATE or SET commands. This flag is displayed at the OMC-R using the Get command.

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Note :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

271

Checks :

[C/M]:

This parameter checks the callDrop Activation and DistributionActivation parameters. The OMC-R prevents a simultaneous activation of the call dropped analysis and the switch interference matrix. The IM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENT TGE is prohibited on the bsc that includes at least one cell with callDropActivation parameter set to enabled. In this case, the following error message is displayed: Interference Matrix cannot be launched on a BSC performing Call Drop Analysis. This check is performed when launching the interference matrix (IM). Vice versa, when activating the dropped call analysis on a cell, a control is run at the OMC-R. If in a BSC, the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameter in at least one cell is still set to yes, then the callDropActivation parameter cannot be set to enable. The OMC-R prevents a simultaneous activation of measurement distributions and the switch interference matrix. The IM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENT TGE is prohibited on the bts that has the distributionActivation parameter set to enabled. In this case, the following error message is displayed: Interference Matrix cannot be launched on a cell performing Measurement Distributions. This check is performed when launching the Interference Matrix. Vice versa, when activating Measurement Distributions on a cell, the OMC-R checks for the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts flag. If the cell is still running with interference matrix measurements, the distributionActivation parameter cannot be set to enable.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

272

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[C/M]:

Bts shall not be deleted while IM is running. Checks that interferenceMatrixRunningOnB sc is set to no prior to deleting a bts. BCCH and BSIC values shall not be changed while IM is running. If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameter is set to yes for one cell, the check prevents the setting of BCCH, BCC and NCC parameters on bts and adjacentCellHandover objects Neighboring cannot be changed while IM is running. If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameter is set to yes for one cell, the check prevents the creation or deletion of one adjacentCellHandover object.

[C/M]:

[C/M]:

interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts
Description : Value range : Mediation of interferenceMatrixRunning attribute. [notApplicable / adjacent / coChannel] [0 / 1]


Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Note : bts

0 interferenceMatrixOnBts is not running. 1 interferenceMatrixOnBts is running.

Switch Interference Matrix (16411) 0 DD This parameter is optional and read-only. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only. It is not present in CREATE or SET commands. This flag is displayed at the OMC-R using the Get command.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

273

Checks :

[C/M]:

This parameter checks the callDropActivati on and DistributionActivation parameters. The OMC-R prevents a simultaneous activation of the call dropped analysis and the switch interference matrix. The IM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENT TGE is prohibited on the bsc that includes at least one cell with callDropActivation parameter set to enabled. In this case, the following error message is displayed: Interference Matrix cannot be launched on a BSC performing Call Drop Analysis. This check is performed when launching the interference matrix (IM). Vice versa, when activating the dropped call analysis on a cell, a control is run at the OMC-R. If in a BSC, the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameter in at least one cell is still set to yes, then the callDropActivation parameter cannot be set to enable. The OMC-R prevents a simultaneous activation of measurement distributions and the switch interference matrix. The IM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENT TGE is prohibited on the bts that has the distributionActivation parameter set to enabled. In this case, the following error message is displayed: Interference Matrix cannot be launched on a cell performing Measurement Distributions. This check is performed when launching the Interference Matrix. Vice versa, when activating Measurement Distributions on a cell, the OMC-R checks for the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts flag. If the cell is still running with interference matrix measurements, the distributionActivation parameter cannot be set to enable.

[C/M]:

Bts shall not be deleted while IM is running. Checks that interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc is set to no prior to deleting a bts.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

274

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[C/M]:

BCCH and BSIC values shall not be changed while IM is running. If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameter is set to yes for one cell, the check prevents the setting of BCCH, BCC and NCC parameters on bts and adjacentCellHandover objects. Neighboring cannot be changed while IM is running. If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameter is set to yes for one cell, the check prevents the creation or deletion of one adjacentCellHandover object.

[C/M]:

interferer cancel algo usage Class 2


Description : Correlation ratio of the input signals received from the normal and diversity antennas. This ratio enables to adapt the SPU software (the interferer cancellation algorithm) to the propagation conditions. Correlation ratio = 0 means that the interferer cancellation algorithm is inactive. [0 to 100] % bts 0 DP V10

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

internal DMUX alarm state


Description : Value range : State of the BSC chain equipment controlled by the ECI board by means of alarm loops. The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order:

Control bay extractor .......... [all working / one failed] Control bay extractor power supply .... [all working / one failed] EQP fans ........ [all working / one failed] MPU converters ... [all working / one failed] MPU converter (other channel) ... [all working / one failed] MPU fan power supply ........... [all working / one failed]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

275

MPU fans ........ [all working / one failed] RCB0 ........... [present / absent] RCB1 ........... [present / absent] RCB2 ........... [present / absent] Right MPU converter ........ [all working / one failed] SWD converter ... [all working / one failed]

BSC 2000

EQPD converter ... [all working / one failed] EQPM converter .. [all working / one failed] EQPM EQPD fan .. [all working / one failed]

BSC 12000HC


Value range :

EQPD0 converter .. [all working / one failed] EQPD0 EQPD1 EQPI shelves fans . [all working / one failed] EQPD1 converter .. [all working / one failed] EQPI converter ... [all working / one failed] EQPT fans ....... [all working / one failed] EQPT and SWG shelf fans ........ [all working / one failed] RCB3 ............ [present / absent] RCB4 ............ [present / absent]

The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order:

Control bay extractor .......... [all working / one failed] Control bay extractor power supply .... [all working / one failed] EQP fans ........ [all working / one failed] MPU converters ... [all working / one failed] MPU converter (other channel) ... [all working / one failed] MPU fan power supply ........... [all working / one failed]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

276

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

MPU fans ........ [all working / one failed] RCB0 ........... [present / absent] RCB1 ........... [present / absent] RCB2 ........... [present / absent] Right MPU converter ........ [all working / one failed] SWD converter ... [all working / one failed]

BSC 2000

EQPD converter ... [all working / one failed] EQPM converter .. [all working / one failed] EQPM EQPD fan .. [all working / one failed]

BSC 12000HC


Object : Type : Note : DD

EQPD0 converter .. [all working / one failed] EQPD0 EQPD1 EQPI shelves fans . [all working / one failed] EQPD1 converter .. [all working / one failed] EQPI converter ... [all working / one failed] EQPT fans ....... [all working / one failed] EQPT and SWG shelf fans ........ [all working / one failed] RCB3 ............ [present / absent] RCB4 ............ [present / absent]

bsc - Display chain information

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

internal DMUX state


Description : Value range : Internal state of the BSC chain ECI board. [working / fault]


Object :

working ......... fault ............

The board has been successfully initialized. A fault was detected on the board.

bsc - Display chain information

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

277

Type : Note :

DD This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

internal PCM states


Description : State of the internal PCM links of the BSC chain. Each link is identified by a serial number: [0 to 15] (BSC type 1), [0 to 31] (BSC types 2, 3, 4), [0 to 63] (BSC type 5). [working / fault]

Value range :


Object : Type : Note : DD

working ......... fault ............

The internal PCM link is working. A fault was detected on the link.

bsc - Display chain information

The action that leads to this response parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

internal switching matrix


Description : Value range : State of the BSC chain switching unit [working / fault)]


Object : Type : Note : DD

working ......... fault ............

The switching boards are correctly initialized. A fault was detected on a switching board.

bsc - Display chain information

The action that leads to this response parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

interOmuEtherlinkOper
Description : Operational state of the inner OMU Ethernet link. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the manager. ISO operational state This attribute is relevant for the BSC 3000. Value range : [disabled / enabled]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

278

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Feature : Type : Release :

controlNode AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

intraBscDirectedRetry Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in a BSS. [allowed / not allowed] bsc allowed DP V9 Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.

intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in a cell. [allowed / not allowed] bts allowed DP V9 Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.

intraCell Class 3
Description : Value range : Whether intra-bts handovers on TCH are allowed in a cell for interference reasons or Cell Tiering reasons. [cellTieringHandover/ intraCellHandover / handoverNotAll owed]


Object :

cellTieringHandover: the intra-bts handovers are allowed for CellTiering reason intraCellHandover: the intra-bts handovers are allowed for interference reason handoverNotAllowed: the intra bts handovers are not allowed

handOverControl

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

279

Feature : Default value : Type :

Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12) handoverNotAllowed DP

intraCellHOIntPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of an intra-bts handover in a cell. This priority is always used, whether radio resource allocation queueing is authorized in the BSS or not. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

intraCellQueueing Class 3
Description : Whether intra-bts handover requests are queued for a cell. This parameter is significant only when queuing radio resource allocation requests is allowed in the BSS. Refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [enabled / disabled] bts disabled DP

intraCellSDCCH Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Whether intra-bts handovers on SDCCH are authorized in a cell for interference reasons. [enabled / disabled] handOverControl disabled DP V8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

280

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

J
job
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier (name) of a job on the OMC-R. [case sensitive, unlimited number of characters]. The . and / characters are forbidden. job Id

[M/D]: The job is created on the OMC-R.

jobResult
Description : Identifier (name) of the associated job on the OMC-R. A results file stores the commands executed and the system responses to those commands during the associated job successive runs, beginning with the first run. Value range : Object : Type : [case sensitive] jobResult Id

jokerPerMainTarget Class 3
Description : Target number of joker AGPRS 16 kbit/s TSs to be assigned by both BSC and PCU to every main AGPRS 16 kbit/s TS (that is to every PDTCH linked with AGPRS). 0 to 4 transceiver EDGE traffic management (20231) 0 DP

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Notes :

The recommended values are 2, 3 or 4, depending on operator Abis configuration (numberOfJokerDS0) and estimated EDGE TDMA throughput. Even if jokerPerMainTarget is a class 3 parameter, new values will not be immediately taken into account. The parameter will be used by BSC or PCU at the next AGPRS reconfiguration (when a TDMA_TS_STATUS message is sent from BSC to PCU) or when the PCU protection timer expires (agprsTsSharingProtection, internal timer set to 10s).

Release :

V15

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

281

L
label
Description : Label of an archive cartridge. When a label is set, all information already stored on the cartridge is lost. Value range : Object : [case sensitive, 64 characters max.] md, omc md, omc md, omc md, omc md, omc DP Display label Set label Archive Restore Display archive list.

Type :

language
Description : Language in which a short message is broadcasted. The information is used in the data coding scheme when the short message is broadcasted. Value range : [German / English / Italian / French / Spanish / Dutch / Swedish / Danish / Portuguese / Finnish / Norwegian / Greek / Turkish / Hungarian / Polish / unspecified / Multi Byte Character Set] short message DP

Object : Type :

lapdConcentration
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Whether information concentration is authorized on a LAPD link. [enabled / disabled] lapdLink GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP

[C]:

The attribute value can be "enabled"or "disabled" if the link carries BTS signaling on the Abis interface in a BSS that manages BTS LAPD signaling concentration. The attribute value is "enabled" if the link carries TCU signaling on the Ater interface. The attribute value is "disabled" if the link carries PCU signaling on the Agprs interface.

[C]: [C]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

282

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Restrictions : Note :

[M]:

This attribute cannot be modified.

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

lapdLink
Description : Identifier of a lapdLink object defined with regard to a bsc object. In all MMI commands, a LAPD link can be referenced by "bscName.lapdLink" where bscName is a permanent attribute of the parent bsc object that identifies it by name. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] lapdLink Id

[C]:

The number of LAPD links per BSC is limited to 841. Fourteen links can be assigned to the TCUs on the Ater interface or to the PCU on the Agprs interface, 147 links can be assigned to the radio sites on the Abis interface, and the remaining links can be assigned to the TRX/DRXs on the Abis interface, with two links per TRX/DRX. The software object related to the parent bsc object is created. The number of lapdLlink objects dependent on the same bsc object that use the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). All lapdLlink objects dependent on the same bsc object that use the same lapdTerminalNumber have identical associatedInterface and lapdConcentration attributes. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No btsSiteManager, transceiverEquipment, or transcoder objects refer to the lapdLink object.

[C]: [C]:

[C]:


Remark :

[C/D]: [D]:

[D]:

A lapdLink object has no administrativeState of its own; its operationalState depends on the administrativeState of the parent bsc object.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

283

lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referenced by the btsSiteManager object. [0 to 2147483646] btsSiteManager DP

[C/M]:

The referenced lapdLink object depends on the same bsc object as the btsSiteManager object, it is assigned to the Abis interface (associatedInterface), its sapi attribute value is "OML". The number of objects dependent on a bsc object that refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). The number of LAPD channels used by a site and the related TRX/DRXs is limited to maxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configuration data). If the lapdLink object lapdConcent ration attribute value is "enabled", the defined lapdTerminalNumber is used by no more than four btsSiteManager objects dependent on the same bsc object. If the lapdLink object lapdConcent ration attribute value is "disabled", the defined lapdTerminalNumber is not used.

[C/M]:

[C]:

[C/M]:

[C/M]:

lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referenced by the transceiverEquipment object. [0 to 2147483646] transceiverEquipment DP

[C]:

The number of LAPD channels used by a site and its related TRX/DRXs is limited to maxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configuration data).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

284

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[C/M]:

The referenced lapdLink objects depend on the same bsc object as the transceiverEquipment object, they are assigned to the Abis interface (associatedInterface), they use the same lapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attribute matches the type of use ("OML" or "RSL"). The number of btsSiteManager and transceiverEquipment objects dependent on a bsc object that refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent btsSiteManager object and the transceiverEquipment object are locked.

[C/M]:

[M]:

lapdLinkOMLRef Class 0
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referenced by the transcoder object. [0 to 2147483646] transcoder DP

[C/M]:

The referenced lapdLink object depends on the same bsc object as the transcoder object, it is assigned to the Ater interface (associatedInterface = "Ater"), its sapi attribute value is "OML".

Note :

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

lapdLinkRSLRef Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = RSL referenced by the transceiverEquipment object. [0 to 2147483646] transceiverEquipment DP

[C]:

The number of LAPD channels used by a site and its related TRX/DRXs is limited to maxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configuration data).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

285

[C/M]:

The referenced lapdLink objects depend on the same bsc object as the transceiverEquipment object, they are assigned to the Abis interface (associatedInterface), they use the same lapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attribute matches the type of use ("OML" or "RSL"). The number of btsSiteManager and transceiverEquipment objects dependent on a bsc object that refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent btsSiteManager object and the transceiverEquipment object are locked.

[C/M]:

[M]:

lapdTerminalNumber Class 0
Description : BSC SICD port assigned to the LAPD link. For more information on the use of this parameter, refer to GSM BSS Engineering Rules, 411-9001-138. lapdTerninalNumber = 4 x number of the mother SICD4 board [0 to 9] + port number [0 to 3] lapdTerninalNumber = 8 x number of the mother SICD8 board [0 to 4] + port number [0 to 7] Value range : [0 [0 [0 [0 [0 [0 to 7] (BSC type 1) to 15] (BSC type 2) to 23] (BSC type 3) to 31] (BSC type 4) to 39] (BSC type 5) to 254] (BSC 3000)

Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

lapdLink

GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP

[C/M] :

The number of SICD ports in a BSC depends on its type, knowing that a SICD board manages four ports and a SICD8V board manages eight ports.

BSC type SICD ports

T1 8

T2 16

T3 24

T4 32

T5 40

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

286

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[M] :

If the port is used by an Abis interface LAPD link, it cannot be used for TCU and PCU signaling. If the port is used by an Ater interface LAPD link, it cannot be used for BTS and PCU signaling. If the port is used by an Agprs interface LAPD link, it cannot be used for BTS and TCU signaling. The number of btsSiteManager and transceiverEquipment objects dependent on a bsc object that refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).

[M] :

[M] :

[M]:

layer3MsgCyphModComp Class 1
Description : Whether the "Layer 3 message" element is used in the CYPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance). [true / false] signallingPoint False DP V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

lcsType Class 0
Description : Value range : MS Location technical solution to use. According to the BSC version:


Object : Type : Note : Checks : DP

BSC V15: [nss based / tandem hybrid] BSC V16: [nss based / bss based]

bsc

This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000.

[M]:

If the value of lcsType is bss based then two signallingLinkSet instances must be created and at least one signallingLink must be created for the Lb interface signallingLinkSet(1).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

287


Release :

[M]:

If the value of lcsType is nss based then only one signallingLinkSet instance must exist and be equal to 0. If the value of lcsType is tandem hybrid then only one signallingLinkSet instance must exist and be equal to 0.

[M]:

V14

level to process
Description : Identifier of a set of SDO resultant data files. Level 1 identifies the latest set produced by the SDO machine. As many as three sets of resultant data files created from the same workstation can exist in the SDO machine. Any one can be selected for report display or purge purposes. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [1, 2, 3] Call monitoring - Display/Management) (SDO) DP

[A]:

The set of files exists in the SDO machine.

lightning protection Class 2


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "lightning arrester" in S8000 Outdoor. [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager DP V9

line
Description : Line number of the first command to run (default is 1). Every command in a command file is assigned a line number. Line no.1 corresponds to the first recorded command, line no.n corresponds to the last recorded command. Value range : Object : Type : [1 to 2147483646] commandFile - Run DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

288

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

locationAreaCode Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN. [0 to 65535] adjacentCellHandOver DP

[C/M]:

A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

locationAreaCode Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN. [0 to 65535] adjacentCellReselection DP

[C/M]:

A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

locationAreaCode Class 2
Description : Code of a location area in the PLMN. A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a location area. It identifies a cell in the PLMN and includes four fields: cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode (MNC). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 65535] bts DP

[C/M]:

A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

log
Description : Identifier of a log object defined with regard to the md object. It is assigned by the OMC-R agent. The current alarm log is no.1. Current observations logs are created in ascending numerical order each time a new mdScanner object is created. Current trace logs are created in ascending numerical order each time a new callPathTrace or traceControl object is created. A restored log is created each time a Restore command on the md object related to faults, observations, or trace data is run.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

289

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[0 to 2147483646] log Id

(on observation and trace logs) [D]: [D]: The observation or the associated trace function is stopped. The log object describing the current alarm log cannot be deleted.

Restrictions : Notes :

The log objects are created by the OMC-R agent and can be deleted by users under certain conditions (see above). The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.

logFullAction
Description : Action taken by the OMC-R agent in case of storage directory capacity threshold overflow. The value "wrap" means that messages may be purged; the value "halt" means that further messages are not saved. Refer to the capacityAlarmThreshold entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [wrap (alarm log) / halt (observation or trace log)] log - Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.

login command type


Description : Value range : Object : Select login and user profile [login request, server update] user profile

longTbfLossThroughput Class 3
Description : Loss of throughput for long TBF in percentage of allocated bandwidth. Prioritize normal transfer over long data transfer. [0 to 100] in % bts GPRS (SV407 - V12)

Value range : Object : Feature :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

290

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Default value : Type : Release :

0 DP V12

longTbfSizeThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Threshold for long TBF size, in Kbytes. This parameter is used in the functionality which penalizes long TBF. [1 to 65535] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 100 DP V12

lRxLevDLH Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, below which a handover may be triggered. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB handOverControl -101 to -100 dB (GSM 900 and GSM 850) -99 to -98 dB (GSM1800/1900) DP

lRxLevDLP Class 3
Description : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, below which the power control function increases power. It is lower than uRxLevDLP. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB powerControl -95 to -94 dB DP lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize uRxLevDLP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

L uRxLevDLP - p owerRedStepSize lRxLevDLP

291

Note :

[M]:

The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, and uRxLevDLP parameters are ignored when the BTS uses the advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.

lRxLevULH Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, below which a handover may be triggered. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB handOverControl -101 to -100 dB (GSM 900 and GSM 850) -99 to -98 dB (GSM 1800/1900) DP

lRxLevULP Class 3
Description : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, below which the power control function increases power. It is lower than uRxLevULP. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB powerControl -95 to -94 dB DP lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize uRxLevULP uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSize lRxLevULP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[M]: [M]:

Note :

The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, and uRxLevULP parameters are ignored when the BTS uses the advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.

lRxQualDLH Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above which an inter cell handover may be triggered. [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % handOverControl Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 - V12)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

292

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Default value : Type :

1.6 to 3.2 % DP

lRxQualDLP Class 3
Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above which the power control function increases power. It is greater than or equal to uRxQualDLP. [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % powerControl 0.4 to 0.8 DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

[C/M]: lRxQualDLP uRxQualDLP

The uRxQualDLP parameter is ignored when the BTS uses the advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.

lRxQualULH Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above which an inter cell handover may be triggered. [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % handOverControl 1.6 to 3.2 % Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 - V12) DP

lRxQualULP Class 3
Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above which the power control function increases power. It is greater than or equal to uRxQualULP. [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % powerControl 0.4 to 0.8 DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

[C/M]: lRxQualULP uRxQualULP

The uRxQualULP parameter is ignored when the BTS uses the advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

293

lsaPcmList Class 3
Description : Note : List of pcmCircuit object instances connected to a LSA. The class is 3 since some new pcmCircuits may be connected without stopping the LSA. Moreover, for a given port, the pcmCircuit may be replaced provided that the old and new pcmCircuits are in the locked administrative State. The complete pcmCircuit list is always given. This attribute is monitored by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can be modified only if the bsc object instance is unlocked. This attribute is relevant for 3G BSC and 3G TCU. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : [0 to 167] iem, lsaRc AR 1209 - V13.1 DP

[C/M]: LsaRc under Bsc not possible for a non existing referenced PcmCircuit. [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible for a non existing referenced PcmCircuit. [C/M]: LsaRc under Bsc not possible if a referenced pcmCircuit is already referenced by another LsaRc. [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible if a referenced pcmCircuit is already referenced by another LsaRc. [C/M]: Creation/Modification LsaRc under Transcoder is not possible for referenced PcmCircuit different than Ate r, A, A_Lb or Lb types. [C/M]: A LSA under Transcoder module of E1 type handles 21 PCMs. The Ater referenced PcmCircuit are connected to port 0 through port 4 and the A, A _Lb and Lb referenced PcmCircuits are connected to port 5 through port 20. [C/M]: A LSA under Transcoder module of T1 type handles 28 PCMs. The Ater referenced PcmCircuit are connected to port 0 through port 5 and the A, A _Lb and Lb referenced PcmCircuits are connected to port 6 through port 27. [D]: Not possible to delete a PcmCircuit under bsc, still referenced to a LsaRc.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

294

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[D]: Not possible to delete a PcmCircuit under transcoder, still referenced to a LsaRc. [C/M]: LsaRc under Bsc not possible with two referenced PcmCircuits on the same port number. [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible with two referenced PcmCircuits on the same port number. [C/M]: LsaRc not possible for shelf position and slot position already used. [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible for an A referenced PcmCircuit which is not defined under the same transcoder. [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible for an A referenced PcmCircuit with a port number equal to 0, 1, 2 or 3. [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder is not possible for referenced PcmCircuit different than Ater or A type. [C/M]: The association between Pcm and port of LsaRc is incorrect.

Release :

V13

lsaRc
Description : The Low Speed Access Resource Complex module, which provides the electrical interface for the DS1 (Digital Signal level 1) or PCM30 interfaces. [0 to 2147483646] lsaRc DP

Value range : Object : Type :

lsaRcId
Description : Identifier of the lsaRc object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU 3000. [0 to 2147483646] lsaRc DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

295

lsaRc Reference
Description : Pointer to the associated lsaRc object instance. This attribute cannot be modified. It is set at iem creation as indicated by the BSS. Value range : Object : Feature : Release : [0 to 2147483646] iem AR 1209 - V13.1 V13

M
machine name
Description : Name of the machine (terminal or server), as defined in its profile for a terminal, in which the job is run (default is the logged-in users terminal). Enter "server" for the OMC-R server console. [case sensitive] job DP

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Note :

[C/M]:

The machine is authorized to run jobs.

Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

machine name
Description : Name of the machine, as defined in its profile for a terminal, in which the associated job was run ("server" identifies the OMC-R server). jobResult DD Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

Object : Type : Note :

mainNetworkBand Class 0
Description : Value range : Object : Indicates the main network band. [900/1800/850/1900] network band bsc

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

296

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DP V15

maio Class 2
Description : Index in the list of frequencies allotted to a radio time slot which obeys frequency hopping laws. Setting this attribute, together with the fhsRef attribute, allows the time slot to obey frequency hopping laws. This offset allows to differentiate channel objects that reference frequencyHoppingSystem objects with identical attributes (orthogonality principle). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to N-1] N is the number of frequencies ( 64) allotted to the time slot. channel DP

[C/M]: [C/M]:

The attribute is in the range [0 to 63]. It is undefined if frequency hopping is not allowed for the parent bts object (btsIsHopping = "no hopping") or the channelType of the channel object is "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH". If the attribute is defined, the fhsRef attribute is also defined. If the attribute is defined, its value is lower than the number of frequencies defined in the mobile Allocation list (attribute of the referenced frequencyHoppingSystem object).

[C/M]: [C/M]:

managedObjectClass
Description : Value range : Object class referenced. [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / bsc / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdWarning / pcmCircuit / powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / traceControl / transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

297

Object :

alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReady Record, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord, traceLogRecord. DP

Type :

managedObjectInstance
Description : Object : Identification of an object in the class. alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileRe adyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord, traceLogRecord. DP

Type :

manager address type


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : OMC-R manager address type. [internal / external] efd - Display DP

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

manager addresses
Description : Object : Type : Restrictions : Addresses of the OMC-R manager that receives the messages. They are provided by the manager. efd - Display DP

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

managerServer
Description : Name of the active OMC-R agent server. It is provided by the OMC-R agent. This server is referred to as the "NMC" server in the Q3 names of the permanent md observation counters related to the OMC-R agent active server. Object : Type : md - Display DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

298

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

manufacturerIntervention
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in the manufacturer configuration. [noAlarm / critical / major / minor] alarm criteria DP

marking type
Description : Type of software to consult. Selecting "prom" allows to display the software applications loaded in PROMs in the selected BSS entity. Selecting "soft" allows to display the software applications loaded in the processors of the selected BSS entity. Value range : Object : Type : [prom / soft] software - Display markers DP

masterBtsSMId class 2
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Release : Note : When its value is not empty, this parameter identifies the master BTS (for synchronization purpose). btsSiteManager [0 to 499 or empty] DP BTS Synchronization empty V15 This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

max log size


Description : Object : Type : Remark : Maximum log size expressed in bytes. log - Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by the users.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

299

maxAdjCHOARMPerBts
Description : Maximum number of neighbor cells associated with a serving cell for handover and re-selection management (static OMC-R configuration data). [32] OMC-R DS

Value range : Object : Type :

maxBscPerNetwork
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of BSCs handled by an OMC-R (static OMC-R configuration data). [20] OMC-R DS

maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Maximum level of BTS transmission power in the inner zone of a dual-band cell. [2 to 51] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 2 DP V12

maxBtsPerBtsSM
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site (static OMC-R configuration data). [6 (BTS "conventional") / 4 (others)] OMC-R DS

maxBtsPerNetwork
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by an OMC-R (static OMC-R configuration data). [3200] OMC-R DS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

300

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Release : Maximum number of downlink TBF on a P1 TDMA before selection of P2 TDMA. [1 to 32] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 16 V12

maxDnTbfPerTs Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Maximum number of downlink TBF per TDMA on a timeslot basis. [1 to 8] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 8 DP V12

maxDwAssign Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Maximum number of Immediate Assignment messages per second. [1 to 32] blocks bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 8 DP V12 Because no TS partitioning is implemented in GPRS V12.4 b release, the number of maximum TBF establishment cannot exceed the number of TS configured in the cell. Recommended value has to be set to the number of PDTCH configured in the cell.

maxFileSize Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Maximum size of the call path tracing data file in the BSC. [30 to 500] kbit/s callPathTrace

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

301

Type : Checks : Notes :

DP

[M]:

The callPathTrace object is locked.

If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object, the BSC continues to send the current trace messages to the OMC-R agent, but no notifications are issued. If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object or on reaching the end-of-session criterion, it is automatically restarted whenever the callPathTrace object is unlocked. For instance, if the end-of-session criterion defines a period of time that elapsed, data collecting will restart for the entire period.

maximum acknowledgment time


Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time or before. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Alarm logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is after minimum acknowledgment time when filled in.

maximum alarm number


Description : To select alarms with a number lower than or equal to that one. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is greater than or equal to minimum alarm number when filled in.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

302

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

maximum clear time


Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or before. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Cleared alarm log - Filter DP

[A]:

It is after minimum clear time when filled in.

maximum event time


Description : To select messages issued at that time or before. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is after minimum event time when filled in.

maximum MD notification number


Description : To select OMC-R agent notifications with a number lower than or equal to that one. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is greater than or equal to minimum MD notification number when filled in.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

303

maximum OMC notification number


Description : To select OMC-R manager notifications with a number lower than or equal to that one. Do not fill in if this criteria is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is greater than or equal to minimum OMC notification number when filled in.

maximum reception time


Description : To select messages received at that time or before. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is after minimum reception time when filled in.

maxLapdChPerBtsSM
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of LAPD channels used by a radio site (static OMC-R configuration data). [6] OMC-R DS

maxNbrConsMess
Description : Maximum number of messages stored in the BSC log files. This number is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. This attribute can be modified only if the bsc object instance is locked. [1 to 7] bscLog

Value range : Object :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

304

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DP V13

maxNbOfCells Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site. [1 to maxBtsPerBtsSM] btsSiteManager DP

[C/M]:

The number of cells controlled by a site is limited to maxBtsPerBtsSM (refer to this entry in the Dictionary). This number must be greater than the bts object greatest identifier created for the btsSiteManager object.

[M]:

maxNbrPDAAssig Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf)


Description : Maximum number of:


Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

Polling request messages sent on PDCH after immediate assignment message has been sent on CCCH. PDAS messages on old TS when changing TS allocation before going into failure.

[1 to 10] transceiver GPRS (SV407 - V12) 5 DP V12

maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange Class 2 (NN0002Max) gprsTranscvLockEx tendedConf


Description : Maximum number of PUAN (Packet Uplink Ack/Nack) consecutively sent without V(A) has changed (respectively, maximum number of PDAN (Packet Downlink Ack/Nack) consecutively sent without V(Q) has changed). [1 to 255] transceiver GPRS (SV407 - V12)

Value range : Object : Feature :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

305

Default value : Type Release :

10 DP V12

maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock Class 2 (n3101Max) (gprsTranscvLockExtend edConf)


Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Maximum number of USF where no data is received in the UL direction. [1 to 255] transceiver GPRS (SV407 - V12) 10 DP V12

maxNumberRetransmission Class 3
Description : Maximum number of RACH burst retransmissions allowed in a call in case of non-system response. The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH. It defines the maximum number of times a mobile can renew access requests to the BTS on RACH. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [one / two / four / seven] bts two DP

maxPcmCPerBtsSM
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of PCM links used by a radio site on the Abis interface (static OMC-R configuration data). [6] OMC-R DS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

306

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

maxPcmCPerTranscd
Description : Maximum number of PCM links used by a remote transcoder on the Abis interface (static OMC-R configuration data). [4] OMC-R DS

Value range : Object : Type :

maxRACH Class 3
Description : Broadcast of the PSI 13 message on PACCH during uplink or downlink TBF. The parameter has an MMI constraint (visibility) of GPRS only for usage. Value range : [0 to 15]


Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Notes : bts

0: disabled 1..15: enabled

Broadcast of PSI 13 (Feature 27358) 0 DP

The recommended value is 1. Only applicable for BSC 3000.

Release :

V12

maxRowCount
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of information lines per table to access. "0" means accessing all data. The default value is "1000". [0 to 1000] Trace data display DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

307

maxSigLPerSigLS
Description : Value range : Maximum number of SS7 channels linked to a BSC (static OMC-R configuration data). [2 (BSC 12000HC type 1) 4 (BSC 12000HC types 2, 3, 4) 6 (BSC 12000HC type 5) 16 (BSC 3000)] OMC-R DS

Object : Type :

maxTeiPerLapdCh
Description : Maximum number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPD terminal (static OMC-R configuration data). It defines the maximum number of LAPD links that can use the same SICD port in the BSC (lapdTerminalNumber attribute of the lapdLink objects). Value range : Object : Type : [15] OMC-R DS

maxTranscdBPerTranscd
Description : Value range : Object : Type Maximum number of transcoding boards housed in a remote transcoder (static OMC-R configuration data). [10 in a GSM 900, E-GSM, GSM-R or 1800 network 8 in a GSM 1900 network] OMC-R DS

maxTranscdPerBsc
Description : Value range : Maximum number of remote transcoders linked to a BSC (static OMC-R configuration data). [10 (BSC 12000HC) 34 (BSC 3000) 32 (TCU2G) 2 (TCU3G)] OMC-R DS

Object : Type :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

308

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Release : Maximum number of uplink TBF on a P1 TDMA before selection of P2 TDMA. [1 to 32] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP 16 V12

maxUpTbfPerTs Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Release : Maximum number of uplink TBF per TDMA on a timeslot basis. [1 to 8] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP 8 V12

md
Description : Identifier of the md object that describes the OMC-R agent. It is enforced by the system. The md object is unique to the OMC-R. It is created when the system is started. Value range : Object : Type : [1] md Id

md notification number
Description : Value range : Object : Type : To select OMC-R agent notifications with a given number. [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

309

mdArchive
Description : Whether archiving the observation messages processed is allowed. The value of this attribute is "not archived" when mdScannerType = "performance monitor" (instrument panel observation) and "archived" otherwise. Value range : Object : Type Checks : [archived / not archived] mdScanner DP

[M]:

This attribute cannot be modified.

mdConfirm
Description : Whether the observation messages processed should be acknowledged. The value of this attribute is "not confirmed" when mdScannerType = "performance monitor" (instrument panel observation) and "confirmed" otherwise. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [confirmed (yes) / not confirmed (no)] mdScanner - Display DP

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

mdFileName
Description : Object : Type : Note : Name of an observation file containing an elementary report. Refer to the naming rules to NTP < 07 >. mdScanReportRecord DP Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

mdGranularityPeriod
Description : Value range : Recovery period of the observation messages by the OMC-R agent.

[5, 10, 15] minutes.......

permanent general md

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

310

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


Object : Type : Checks :

[15, 30, 60] minutes...... [1440] minutes... [5, 10, 15] minutes....... [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes...

Fast Statistic Observation (OFS) General Statistic Observation (OGS) Diagnostic Observation (ODIAG) performance monitor (Real Time Observation (ORT)) Temporary Observation (TO)

[5, 10, 15, 30, 60] minutes........

mdScanner DP

[C/M]:

The number of temporary observations running at the same time with a 5-minute recovery period in the BSSs managed on the OMC-R is limited to 50. This attribute cannot be modified if mdScannerType = "temporary xxx". Stop the observation if necessary by deleting the concerned mdScanner object and create it back with a new observation period.

Restrictions :

[M]:

Note :

For a BSC 12000HC the value range is 15 minutes. For a BSC 3000 the mdGranularityPeriod can be reduced:

5 minutes if the mdObjectList contains 1 bts max. 10 minutes if the mdObjectList contains 2 bts max. 15 minutes in all other cases

This note only applies to ODIAG observation.

mdGranularityPeriod
Description : Value range : Recovery period of the observation messages by the OMC-R agent.

[5, 10, 15] minutes....... [15, 30, 60] minutes...... [15, 30, 60] minutes......

permanent general md permanent general bsc (GPO-BSC) Fast Statistic Observation (OFS)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

311

[1440] minutes... [15] minutes..... [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes...

General Statistic Observation (OGS) Diagnostic Observation (ODIAG) performance monitor (Instrument Panel (IPO) or Real Time Observation (ORT)) Temporary Observation (TO) mdScanReportRecord DP

[5, 10, 15, 30, 60] minutes........

Object : Type :

mdGranularityPeriod
Description : Value range : Recovery period of the observation messages by the OMC-R agent.

[5, 10, 15] minutes....... [15, 30, 60] minutes...... [15, 30, 60] minutes...... [1440] minutes... [15] minutes..... [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes...

permanent general md permanent general bsc (GPO-BSC) Fast Statistic Observation (OFS) General Statistic Observation (OGS) Diagnostic Observation (ODIAG) performance monitor (Instrument Panel (IPO) or Real Time Observation (ORT)) Temporary Observation (TO)

Object : Type :

[5, 10, 15, 30, 60] minutes........

observationFileReadyRecord DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

312

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

mdId
Description : Identifier of the md object describing the OMC-R agent. It is enforced by the system. This attribute allows users to identify the md object on the OMC-R. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [1] md - Display DP

[M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

mdLog
Description : Whether the observation messages processed are saved on the OMC-R agent disks. The value of this attribute is "not logged" when mdScannerType = "performance monitor" (instrument panel observation) and "logged" otherwise. Value range : Object : Type Checks : [logged / not logged] mdScanner DP

[M]:

This attribute cannot be modified.

mdObjectList
Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the type of the defined observation.

mdScannerType permanent general md permanent general bsc general statistic (OGS) fast statistic (OFS) performance monitor real time (ORT) temporary signallingLink*

mdObjectList md bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc & signallingLink

* This type only applies to V12 BSCs.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

313

mdScannerType temporary Abis Interface bts* diagnostic (ODIAG)

mdObjectList bsc & btsSiteManager & bts bsc, bts, signallingLink, hardware transcoder 3G, transcoderEqpt, pcmPort, transceiverEqpt & btsSiteManager, pcmCircuit, adjacentCell

* This type only applies to V12 BSCs.

mdObjectList
Description : Value range : Object : Type Identification of the observed object. It depends on the type of the defined observation. [1 to 66] display xxx report DP

mdObjectList
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the type of observation defined. [1 to 66] List observation messages DP

mdScanner
Description : Identifier of an mdScanner object defined with regard to the md object. The mdScanner object class describes the OMC-R agent and BSS observations. These objects are managed by the OMC-R "Performance Management" function. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] mdScanner Id

(performed only when the object describes a BSS observation)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

314

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


Remark :

[C/M/D]

: The application database of the BSC is not being built. : If the application database of the BSC is not built, temporary observations cannot be managed. : If the application database of the BSC is built, the BSS/OMC-R link is established and no audit is in-progress in the BSC.

[C/M/D]

[C/M/D]

Deleting an mdScanner object that describes a temporary observation is always possible if the observation duration has elapsed (stopTime 1= 0) and the stop TGE has been sent to the BSC.

mdScannerType
Description : Value range : The type of observation. [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic / temporary interference / temporary signallingLink / temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md / permanent general manager] Display xxx report DP

Object : Type :

mdScannerType
Description : Value range : The type of observation. [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic / temporary interference / temporary signallingLink / temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md / permanent general manager List observation messages DP

Object : Type :

mdScannerType
Description : Value range : The type of observation. [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic / temporary interference / temporary signallingLink / temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md / permanent general manager] Load formulae DP

Object : Type :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

315

mdScannerType
Description : Value range : The type of observation. [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic / temporary interference / temporary signallingLink / temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md / permanent general manager / pcuSN] mdScanner DP

Object : Type : Checks : Restrictions : Notes :

[C]: [M]:

The defined observation is not running. This attribute cannot be modified.

The permanent general md observation is unique to the OMC-R. The permanent general bsc and Instrument Panel observations are unique to a BSS (V10). The OGS is unique to a BSS (V11+). The OFS is unique to a BSS (V11+). The ORT is unique to a BSS (V11+). A temporary observation of a given type or ODIAG (V11+) is unique to a BSS.

mdScannerType
Description : Value range : The type of observation. [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic / temporary interference / temporary signallingLink / temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md / permanent general manager / pcuSN]r] report template DP

Object : Type :

mdStorageDuration
Description : Storage duration of the observation messages processed on the OMC-R agent disks. Observation messages are kept on the OMC-R agent disks for a limited period of time, provided the mdLog attribute of the associated log object is "logged". They are

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

316

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

automatically purged at regular intervals. The user must archive the observation data, for data analysis occurring after the purge time set by the static configuration. Value range : [N] hour. N is a static configuration data. Since instrument panel observation messages are not kept, N equals zero for the log objects that describe these observations. Object : Type : Restrictions : mdScanner DP

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

mdTransferMode
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions : Service used by the OMC-R agent to transmit the observation messages processed to the OMC-R manager. [FTAM (permanent general md and bsc observations) / CMIS (others)] mdScanner - Display DP

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

mdWarning
Description : Identifier of a mdWarning object defined with regard to the md object. The mdWarning object class describes the processing conditions of BSS alarms of "outOfRangeCounter" and "excessiveAnomalyRate" type. These objects are managed by the OMC-R "Fault Management" function. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 2147483646] mdWarning Id

measurementProcAlgorithm Class 2
Description : Value range : Whether the new L1M interface is used. [L1MV1, L1MV2]

L1MV1: L1MV2:

the older L1M is used the newer L1M is used

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

317

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

bts L1M evolutions for advanced features support (TF1089-V12) L1MV1 DP V12

microCellCaptureTimer Class 3
Description : Value range : Time used to confirm a capture (signal strength stability) when using micro-cell Algorithm type A. Time = N multiplied by <runHandOver>. According to microCellCaptureTimer value, N values are the following:


Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks : 0

[0 to 249] 250 251 252 253 254 255

N = [0 to 249] N = 512 N = 1024 N = 2048 N = 4096 N = 8192 N = 16384

adjacentCellHandOver

To define if A handover algorithm is activated DP

V8

[C]:

This attribute is defined if the described neighbor cell is a micro-cell (cellType = "microType").

Release : Note:

To activate the MicroCellAlgo feature for this parameter, 1. Set the MicroCellAlgo (in the omc_services.cfg of the OMC) to A. Stop the OMC-R application and perform the "omc_configure.sh -A" command. 2. For the BSCs to take effect of the new feature activation, perform a Build-BDA on all the BSCs on this OMC-R during the next maintenance window.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

318

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

microCellStability Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks : Strength Level Stability Criterion for Capture Algorithm A. [0 to 255] dB adjacentCellHandOver 10 To define if A handover algorithm is activated DP

[C]:

This attribute is defined if the described neighbor cell is a micro-cell (cellType = "microType").

Note:

To activate the MicroCellAlgo feature for this parameter, 1. Set the MicroCellAlgo (in the omc_services.cfg of the OMC) to A. Stop the OMC-R application and perform the "omc_configure.sh -A" command. 2. For the BSCs to take effect of the new feature activation, perform a Build-BDA on all the BSCs on this OMC-R during the next maintenance window.

minimum acknowledgment time


Description : Selecting messages acknowledged at that time or after. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Alarm logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is before maximum acknowledgment time when filled in.

minimum alarm number


Description : To select alarms with a number greater than or equal to that one. Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected. Value range : Object : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm logs - Filter

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

319

Type : Checks :

DP

[A]:

It is lower than or equal to maximum alarm number when filled in.

minimum clear time


Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or after. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Cleared alarm log - Filter DP

[A]:

It is before maximum clear time when filled in.

minimum event time


Description : To select messages issued at that time or after. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type Checks : [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is before maximum event time when filled in.

minimum MD notification number


Description : To select OMC-R agent notifications with a number greater than or equal to that one. Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is lower than or equal to maximum MD notification number when filled in.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

320

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

minimum OMC notification number


Description : To select OMC-R manager notifications with a number greater than or equal to that one. Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is lower than or equal to maximum OMC notification number when filled in.

minimum reception time


Description : To select messages received at that time or after. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

[A]:

It is before maximum reception time when filled in.

minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain Class 3
Description : Minimum number of joker AGPRS 16 kbit/s TSs per main AGPRS 16 kbit/s TS, that cannot be preempted by the Dynamic Agprs feature. [0..4] step 0.125 transceiver 0 DP EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks :

[C/M]:

minNbOfJokersPerCon nectedMain must be lower than or equal to the target number of jokers per TDMA (parameter jokerPerMainTarget)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

321

[C/M]:

minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain must be equal to 0 when EDGE is not activated on TDMA (that is when edgeDataServiceType is equal to capability is not requested)

Release : Note :

V16 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000.

minNbOfTDMA Class 2
Description : Minimum number of TDMA frames working for the cell itself. The frame carrying the cell BCCH must be among them and successfully configured. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [1 to 16] bts 1 DP

[M]:

This number is less than or equal to the number of transceiver objects (TDMA frames) created for the bts object.

minNbrGprsTs Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Minimum number of TS dedicated to GPRS in the cell. [0 to 127] bts GPRS (TF1121 - V12) 0 DP V12

minTimeQualityIntraCellHO Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the minimum time between one intracell HO and the next quality intracell HO. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance is unlocked Value range : Object : [0 to 120] % handOverControl

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

322

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Default value : Type : Release : Note :

0 DP V14 Applies to a BSC 3000 architecture only.

missDistWt Class 3
Description : Weight applied to missing Distance measurement. The missing measurement is replaced by the latest received raw measurement weighed by this corrective factor when calculating the average MS-BTS distance. The range of permitted values makes missing distance measurements not favored. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [100 to 200] % handOverControl 110 DP

missRxLevWt Class 3
Description : Weight applied in case of missing signal strength measurement report. The missing measurement is replaced by the latest computed arithmetic average, or by the latest received raw measurement if no average value is available, weighed by this corrective factor when calculating the average signal strength in the cell. Selecting the greatest value makes missing strength measurements not favored. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 100] % handOverControl 90 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

323

missRxQualWt Class 3
Description : Weight applied to missing Quality measurement. The missing measurement is replaced by the latest computed arithmetic average, or by the latest received raw measurement if no average value is available, weighed by this corrective factor when calculating the average bit error rate in the radio link. The range of permitted values makes missing quality measurements not favored. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [100 to 200] % handOverControl 110 DP

mms
Description : The Memory Mass Storage module, which holds all the private data (for OMU) and those that must be secured and still accessible in the event of an OMU failure or disk failure (for Control Node). [0 to 2147483646] mms Id

Value range : Object : Type :

mmsId
Description : Identifier of the mms object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU 3000. [0 to 2147483646] mms DP V 13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

324

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

mmsUsage
Description : Indicates whether the MMS is private (i.e. associated to an OMU) ; or shared-mirrored (associated to the Control Node). This attribute cannot be modified. It is set by the MD-R at MMS creation. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : [0 (Shared) to 1 (Private)] mms AR 1209 - V13.1 DP V13

mobileAllocation Class 2
Description : List of sixty-four frequencies allotted in the network frequency band to a radio time slot obeying frequency hopping laws. [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network), [955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R), [975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network), [128 to 251] (GSM 850 network), [955 / 1023] / [0 /55] (GSM-R). frequencyHoppingSystem DP

Value range :

Object : Type : Checks :

[C/M]:

Each frequency occurs once in the list and is allotted to the parent bts object (cellAlloc ation). If the frequencyHoppingSystem object is referenced by a channel object dependent on the associated bts object, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

[M]:

mobileCountryCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN home country. Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 999] adjacentCellHandOver DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

325

Checks :

[C]:

This code is identical to the mobileCountryCo de attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object. A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

[C/M]:

mobileCountryCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN home country. Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] adjacentCellReselection DP

[C]:

This code is identical to the mobileCountryCo de attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object. A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

[C/M]:

mobileCountryCode Class 1
Description : Code of the PLMN home country. It is defined when theMSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI). The MSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI) for a GSM-R network (Group call). Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Condition : Condition : Type : [0 to 999] bsc For a GSM network: to define when the MSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI). For a GSM-R network: mandatory as the MSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI) for Group Call. DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

326

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

mobileCountryCode Class 2
Description : Code of the PLMN home country. A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a location area. It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMN and includes four fields: cellIdentityCode (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode (MNC). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] bts DP

[C]:

This code is identical to the mobileCountryCo de attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object. A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

[C/M]:

mobileNetworkCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country. Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] adjacentCellHandOver DP

[C]:

This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCo de attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object. A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

[C/M]:

mobileNetworkCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country. Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 999] adjacentCellReselection DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

327

Checks :

[C]:

This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCo de attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object. A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

[C/M]:

mobileNetworkCode Class 1
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country. It must be defined when the MSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI). Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 999] bsc DP

mobileNetworkCode Class 2
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country. A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a location area. It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMN and includes four fields: cellIdentityCode (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode (MNC). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] bts DP

[C]:

This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCo de attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object. A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

[C/M]:

modeModifyMandatory Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Whether a CHANNEL MODE MODIFY message is sent to the mobile after a directed retry handover in the BSS. [used (yes) / not used (no)] bsc not used DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

328

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks :

[C/M]:

The attribute value can only be "used" if directed retry handovers are allowed at BSC level. Refer to the interBscDirectedRetry and intraBs cDirectedRetry entries in the Dictionary.

Release :

V9

monitoredObjectClass
Description : Value range : Class of the serving object for the notifications processed. Lists the possible object classes to be monitored. [bsc / signallingPoint / transcoder / pcmCircuit / xtp / lapdLink / software / bscLog / btsSiteManager / signallingLinkSet / transcoderBoard / bts / signallingLink / transceiver / powerControl / frequencyHoppingSystem / adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / handOverControl / transceiverEquipment / channel / transceiverZone / pcu / pcusn / lsaRc Bsc / lsaRc Tcu / hardware bsc 3G / hardware transcoder 3G / interface node / control node / cem / iem / atmRm / sw8kRm / cc / omu / mms / trm / pcmCircuit] mdWarning PM1270 - TDMA based counters DP This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only.

Object : Feature : Type : Note :

monitoredObjectInstance
Description : Identification of a serving object in the class. They identify the object that issued the processed notifications. Enter the concerned object identification sequence. Object : Type : mdWarning DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

329

monitoredSpecificProblemsList
Description : List of the specific problems taken into account in the process. This parameter filters the processed notifications according to the following criteria: cause number, fault number, and processor number. Value range : Object : Type : [(cause, faultNumber) pair] mdWarning if detectionFunction = "excessiveAnomalyRa te" DP

month
Description : Identifies the month the observation report was created. Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>] Display busiest day of the month report DP

msBtsDistanceInterCell Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : To determine whether inter-bts handovers are allowed in a cell for distance reasons. [enabled / disabled] handOverControl enabled DP

msCapWeightActive Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : To specify whether the Weight Fair Allocation algorithm is used or not. [yes / no] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) yes DP V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

330

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

msLeakRate
Description : This attribute specifies the leak rate parameter for one GPRS MS with 1 TS. This value is used only once at the MS Bucket creation time on SGSN side. For GPRS, (that is, if EDGE is not activated in the cell or there is no TDMA that is EDGE capable in the cell), this value is sent to the SGSN in the FLOW-CONTROL-BVC message as the default MS Leak Rate. (60kbps is considered as soon as one EDGE TDMA is activated in the cell). [2W, 8 W, 2W + 8 W] 2W + 8W V12

Value range : Default value : Release :

msPowerClassToggle Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : MS power class which needs dedicated statistics. [2W / 8W / 2W + 8W] bts Advanced Speech Call Items 2W + 8W DP V15

msRangeMax Class 3
Description : Maximum MS-to-BTS distance beyond which a handover may be triggered. It can be set to 1 for a microcell and is less than callClearing in all cases. The attributes msRangeMax and concentAlgoIntMsRange must verify msRangeMax >= concentAlgoIntMsRange. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [1 to 134] km (non-extended mode), [1 to 120] km (extended mode). handOverControl 34 in non-extended mode, 89 in extended mode DP

[C/M]:

msRangeMax < callClearing (associated bts object attribute)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

331

[C/M]:

The maximum distance is limited to 34 km if the extended cell attribute of the associated bts object is "false". The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is "true".

[C/M]:

msTxPwrMax Class 3
Description : Value range : Maximum MS transmission power in a serving cell. It is equal to msTxPwrMaxCCH in a GSM 900 network. [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 900, GSM-R, E-GSM, GSM 850, GSM 850 - GSM 1900 and GSM 900 - GSM 1800 networks) [0 to 36, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 1800, and GSM 1800 GSM 900 networks) [0 to 33] dB (GSM 1900, E-GSM and 1900-850, GSM 850) Object : Default value : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : bts Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 handhelds lds and 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds DP

[C/M]:

GSM 900 networks: msTxPwrMax = msTxPwrMaxCCH

The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] / [typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values. The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a serving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:

[5 to 39] dB (GSM 900 network)

msTxPwrMax2ndBand Class 2
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in the band 1 of the dualband cell depending on the network type (BCCH is only defined in band 0). [0 to 36] for GSM 900 - GSM 1800 (gsmdcs), [5 to 43] for GSM 1800 - GSM 900 (dcsgsm), [0 to 33] for GSM 850 - GSM 1900 (gsm850pcs), [5 to 43] for GSM 1900 - GSM 850 (pcsgsm850), for all in the steps of 2 + value = 33 for GSM 850 - GSM 1900 0..43 for other standardIndicator types.

Value range :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

332

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

bts Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 and GSM 850 handhelds, 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900 Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12) DP

[C/M]:

464C001 The attribute value must be even and located between [0 to 36] dB when the standardIndicator attribute is equal to "gsmdcs". 464C002 The attribute value must be odd and located between [5 to 43] dB when the standardIndicator attribute is equal to "dcsgsm". 464C003 The attribute value must be even and located between [0 to 33] dB when the standardIndicato r attribute is equal to "gsm850pcs". 464C004 The attribute value must be odd and located between [5 to 43] dB when the standardIndicator attribute is equal to "pcsgsm850".

[C/M]:

[C/M]:

[C/M]:

Note :

The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] / [typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values. The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a serving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, it means:


Release :

[5 to 39] dB (GSM 900 network) [0 to 36] dB (GSM 1800 network)

V12

msTxPwrMaxCCH Class 3
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a cell CCCH. The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the Abis CELL MODIFY REQUEST message. Value range : [[5 to 43, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 900, GSM 850, GSM-R, and GSM 900 - GSM 1800 networks) [0 to 36, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 1800, and GSM 1800 GSM 900 networks) [0 to 33] dB (GSM 1900, 1900-850, and GSM-R networks)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

333

Object : Default value : Type Remark :

bts Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 and GSM 850 handhelds, 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900 DP If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cell in the network, msTxPwrMaxCCH must be identical to the msTxPwrMaxCell power defined for the corresponding adjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checked by users). The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] / [typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values. The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a serving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:

Note :

msTxPwrMaxCell Class 3
Description :

[5 to 39] dB (GSM 900 network)

Maximum MS transmission power in a neighbor cell. It is equal to msTxPwrMaxCCH when the cell is declared as a serving cell on the network (the value must be checked by users). [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 900, GSM-R, E-GSM, GSM 850, GSM 850 - GSM 1900 and GSM 900 - GSM 1800 networks) [0 to 36, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 1800 network and GSM 1800 - GSM 900) [0 to 33, by steps of 2 + value 33] dB (GSM 1900-850 networks)

Value range :

Object : Default value : Type :

adjacentCellHandOver Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 or 850 handhelds and 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

334

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Remark :

If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cell in the network, msTxPwrMaxCell should be identical to the msTxPwrMaxCCH power defined for the corresponding adjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checked by users).

Notes :

The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] / [typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values.

The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a serving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:

[5 to 39] dB (GSM 900 network) [0 to 36] dB (GSM 1800 network)

multi band reporting Class 3


Description : Value range : Minimum number of cells multibanding MSs, report their radio measurements in each frequency band. [the six strongest cells / the strongest cell out band / the two strongest cells out band / the three strongest cells out band]


Object : Default value : Type : Release : bts

six strongest allowed cells irrespective of their frequency band the strongest allowed cell outside the current frequency band the two strongest allowed cells outside the current frequency band the three strongest allowed cells outside the current frequency band

the six strongest cells DP V10

multiple site
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Identifier of a multiple site object defined with regard to a bsc object. [0 to 65535] multiple site Id

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

335

Checks :

[C]: [C/M]:

The multiple site object is not created for the parent bsc object. The btsSiteManager objects in the btsSiteManagerList list are created for the parent bsc object and are not referenced by another multiple site object. The multiple site object is created and the current btsSiteManager objects referenced in the btsSiteMan agerList list are locked.

Release : V8

[M/D]:

multipleVocoders Class 1
Description : Whether the BSC is linked to one or more MSCs using different speech coding protocols. An MSC uses either the GSM protocol or the JTC protocol. "False" means that only the GSM protocol is compatible. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Notes : [true / false] bsc False DP

If MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUP PORT,

(Table OFCVAR) is set to ON (as detailed in NTP < 455 >), then the following BSC parameters must be set to TRUE:


Release : V8

chosenChannelAsscomp chosenChannelHoReq chosenChannelHoPerf chosenChannelCompL3Info

muxNumber Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : pcuSN mux identification [noMux / oneMux / twoMux] pcusn GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

336

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

N
n3103 Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Maximum number of repetition of a PUAN (Packet Uplink Ack/Nack) message. [1 to 64] bts 5 GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP V12

n3105max Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf)


Description : Maximum number of consecutive RLC data blocks sent by the PCU with a valid RRBP and not having been acknowledged by the MS. [1 to 64] transceiver 4 GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP V12

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release :

nACCActivation Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note : Activation of the Network Assisted Cell Change feature. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS DP V16 This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only.

nAvgl Class 3 (gprsAvgParam)


Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control. It specifies the "Interference signal strength filter" constant for power control. NAVG -I = 2 (k/2) with k = nAvgI. Value range : [0 to 15]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

337

Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release :

bts 0 GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP V12

nAvgT Class 3 (gprsAvgParam)


Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control, which specifies the "Signal strength filter period" for power control in packet transfer mode. TAVG -T = 2 (k/2) /6 with k = nAvgT. [0 to 25] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Release :

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

nAvgW Class 3 (gprsAvgParam)


Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control, which specifies the "Signal strength filter period" for power control in packet idle mode. TAVG -W = 2 (k/2) /6 with k = nAvgW. [0 to 25] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP

Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Release : Note :

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12 Tavg_w has no impact on frequency measurements and computations done by the MS, which is always equal to the frequency of paging blocks decoding.

nbOfFramesForFER Class 3
Description : Value range : Number of frames taken into account for FER (Frame Erasure Rate) evaluation. Int [0 to 65535]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

338

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Type : Feature : Default value : Release : Note :

bts DP Distribution on Radio measurements 0 V14 This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

nbOfRepeat Class 2
Description : Maximum number of times that paging messages are repeated to mobiles that belong to the same paging sub-group. It is set to "3" in former BSS versions (static configuration parameter). The following inequality, that is not checked by the system, must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary): retransDuration (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) x nbOfRepeat Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [0 to 22] bts 3 DP V8

nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Attribute reserved for future use. [0] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 0

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

339

Type : Release :

DP V12

nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Attribute reserved for future use. [0] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP V12

nbrTch Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList)


Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Number of TSs used for each Agprs PCM link. [1 to 30] for E1 configuration, [1 to 23] for T1 configuration. pcu GPRS (SV407 - V12) None DP V12 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

nCapacityFRRequestedCodec Class 3
Description : Number of 12.2 codec mode requested to trigger a capacity handover (FR to HR). This attribute can only be modified if the handover control object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [0 to 196] handOverControl 44 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

340

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

nCHPosition Class2
Description : Value range : Defines the number of blocks and position of the first block for NCH. [0 block 1 block, first block 0 1 block, first block 1 1 block, first block 2 1 block, first block 3 1 block, first block 4 1 block, first block 5 1 block, first block 6 2 blocks, first block 0 2 blocks, first block 1 2 blocks, first block 2 2 blocks, first block 3 2 blocks, first block 4 2 blocks, first block 5 3 blocks, first block 0 3 blocks, first block 1 3 blocks, first block 2 3 blocks, first block 3 3 blocks, first block 4 4 blocks, first block 0 4 blocks, first block 1 4 blocks, first block 2 4 blocks, first block 3 5 blocks, first block 0 5 blocks, first block 1 5 blocks, first block 2 6 blocks, first block 0 6 blocks, first block 1 7 blocks, first block 0] bts (GSM-R V12) 0 block DP V12 nCHPosition - noOfBlocksForAccessGrant relation according to channelType attribute

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

341

channelType mainBCCH

nCHPosition 1 block, first block 0 to 6 2 blocks, first block 0 to 5 3 blocks, first block 0 to 4 4 blocks, first block 0 to 3 5 blocks, first block 0 to 2 6 blocks, first block 0 to 1 7 blocks, first block 0 1 block, first block 0 1 block, first block 1 2 blocks, first block 0

noOfBlocksFor AccessGrant >= 1 >= 2 >= 3 >= 4 >= 5 >= 6 =7 1 or 2 = 12 = 12

mainBCCHCombined

networkColourCode Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Color code of the mobile network. The (BCC,NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC. [0 to 7] adjacentCellHandOver DP

[M]:

Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

networkColourCode Class 2
Description : Color code of the mobile network. It allows countries with common borders to allocate BCCs and BCCH frequencies at their own convenience in international border areas. The (BCC,NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC. The information is broadcasted on the cell SCH. The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a six-bit code: bits 6-5-4 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 3-2-1 = BCC (Base station color code). Outside border areas, the NCC bits can be used to increase the number of BCC possibilities. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 7] bts DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

342

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks :

[M]:

Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells.

Remark :

The NCC should not be confused with the MCC (Mobile Country Code) nor the MNC (Mobile Network Code), which are part of the CGI (Cell Global Identifier). Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

Note :

networkIndicator Class 1
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the SS7 network. [nationalReserved / national / internationalReserved / international] signallingPoint DP

[C/M]:

For BSC 12000HC, the only value accepted by the system is "national". For 3G, any value in the value range can be used.

new name
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : New name to give to the short message. It is different from the current short message identifier. [0 to 255] short message - Rename DP

[A]: [A]:

It is different from the current short message identifier. It does not exist on the OMC-R.

new password 1st try


Description : Users new password to use in the next login request. It begins with a letter, contains at least one non-alphabetical character among the first eight characters, and is case sensitive. It is not displayed. [6 characters min]

Value range :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

343

Object : Type : Checks :

user profile - Change password DP

[A]:

It begins with a letter and contains one non-alphanumerical character among the first eight characters. It is at least six-character long. It is different from the N previous occurrences (N is set in static configuration data).

[A]: [A]:

new password 2nd try


Description : Second definition of the users new password that will not be validated unless it is exactly the same as new password 1st try. It is not displayed. Refer to the new password 1st try entry in the dictionary. The new password is validated when opening a new session. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [case sensitive] user profile - Change password DP

[A]:

It begins with a letter and contains one non-alphanumerical character among the first eight characters. It is at least six-character long. It is different from the N previous occurrences (N is set in static configuration data).

[A]: [A]:

new power control algorithm Class 3


Description : Algorithm used by the BTS to control power in a cell. The "step by step" value refers to the standard power control algorithm. The "one shot" value refers to the advanced power control algorithm.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

344

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

The "enhanced one shot" value refers to the advanced power algorithm used in connection with the handOverControl object rxLevHreqaveBeg attribute used in the early handover mechanism. Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Notes : [step by step / one shot / enhanced one shot] bts Fast power control at TCH assignment (TF975 - V12) one shot DP

The "enhanced one shot" attribute value can only apply to non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture. Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

Release :

V9

next execution time


Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Date and time of next job run. [<date> <time>] job - Display This parameter is significant and displayed only when a job run periodicity is defined. DD

nFRRequestedCodec Class 3
Description : This attribute modifies the "n" parameter in the AMR full rate "(n,p) voting" mechanism used for FR->HR handovers. This parameter is used by all AMR FR HO not only FR=>HR. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Int [0 to 196] handOverControl 24 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

345

Release : Note :

V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

nHRRequestedCodec Class 3
Description : This attribute modifies the "n" parameter in the AMR half rate "(n,p) voting" mechanism used for FR->HR handovers. This parameter is used by all AMR HR HO not only FR=>HR. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Int [0 to 196] handOverControl 34 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

night intervention
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in the nighttime configuration. [noAlarm / critical / major / minor] alarm criteria DP

noOfBlocksForAccessGrant Class 2
Description : Number of CCCH blocks not used for paging. A BCCH is combined when it shares the same radio time slot with four SDCCHs which can include a CBCH (refer to the channelType entry in the Dictionary). In that case, the attribute value is no greater than to 2 (the value must be checked by users). Refer also to the nCHPosition entry in this dictionary. Value range : [0 to 2] if the cell uses a combined BCCH, [1 to 7] otherwise. "0" means that PCH blocks are used for sending immediate assignment messages as and when needed.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

346

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

bts 2 DP

[M]:

This number is greater than zero if the channelType of one of the channel objects dependent on the bts object is "sdcch8CBCH" (refer to this entry in the Dictionary). This number is strictly greater than zero if the SysInfo 2Q and/or SysInfo 13 on extended BCCH features are activated. If Bit 9 (SI13) or Bit 10 (SI2Quater) in value of label 64 in bscDataConfig table is set, the value of NoOfBlocksForAccessGrant in the bts object cannot be set to 0.

[M]:

[M]:

noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging Class 2
Description : Number of occurrences of a paging sub-group. The greater this number, the greater the number of paging sub-groups. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [2 to 9] multi-frame of fifty-one frames bts 6 DP

notAllowedAccessClasses Class 3
Description : List of mobile access classes that are forbidden in the cell, except case of congestion. This attribute, together with the emergencyCallRestricted attribute, allows to control access to a cell according to the service classes authorized. Value range : List of mobile access class:


Object : Default value : bts

[0 to 9]: user classes [11 to 15]: operator classes

Leave the field empty

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

347

Type : Remark :

DP General conditions mobiles are granted access to a cell are allotted at subscription time.

notification number
Description : Value range : Object : Reference number of the associated notification [0 to 2147483646] alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReadyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord, traceLogRecord. DP

Type :

notification type
Description : This is to select messages specific to the type of notifications. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : [attributeValueChange / communicationsAlarm / environmentalAlarm / equipmentAlarm / objectCreation / objectDeletion / processingErrorAlarm / qualityOfServiceAla rm / stateChange / specific] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

Object : Type :

numberOfJokerDS0 Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Number of jokers DS0 associated to one TDMA. The description applies to the Abis interface. [0 to 8] transceiver Data Backhaul Evolution (19174) 0 DP

[C/M]: The numberOfJokerDS0 allowed values are: [0..4] for S8000 BCF BTS model [0..6] for S8000 CBCF, S12000 and e-cell BTS models [0..8] for BTS 18000 BTS models

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

348

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Release : Note :

V15 The recommended value is linked to target QoS and radio conditions. The value may be set to a non-zero value even if EDGE is not activated in corresponding TDMA. Resources will be reserved and unused in that case. However, it may help to properly configure a TDMA before activating EDGE.

number of records
Description : Object : Type : Remark : Number of records. log - Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by the users.

number of large reuse data channels Class 3


Description : Mean number of logical channels belonging to the larger frequency reuse pattern and used at the same time for data communications which is used for cell tiering. [-16 to +16] handOvercontrol DP V15

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts
Description : Number of enabled HDLC ports in the TMU or IEM module. Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/IEM modules. Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/LSA modules. The global Operational State of the HDLC feature is given by the number of ports/channels with an individual operational state set to enabled. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. It is set to NULL at iem or tmu object instance creation. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. Value range : [0 to 65535]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

349

Object : Feature : Type : Release : Note :

iem, tmu AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13 BSC 3000 V16: this parameter no more exists.

numberOfPwciSamples Class 3
Description : Minimum number of PwCI samples required to reach a reliable distribution. This attribute allows the configuration of CellTieringConfiguration at bts level. [0 to 60] handOverControl Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12) 20 DP V12 CellTiering mode must be activated.

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans Class 3
Description : Number of radio time slots RACH transmission accesses are spread in a random manner to avoid collisions. The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH. In the event of non-system response, the mobile renews the RACH bursts after a randomly defined period varying with numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans. MS Phase 1

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

350

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

The time T between two transmissions of the same RACH burst is the following: T= [D + (N+1) x 4.615]ms where

D is the maximum system response pending time: N is the randomly number generated by the mobile in the range [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans-1] 4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot.

MS Phase 2

The time T between two transmissions of the same RACH burst is the following (whichever is the BCCH, combined or not): T= 4.615 x [S+(N + 1)] ms where

S is a parameter depending on the BCCH configuration and on the value of numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans (see table hereafter) N is the randomly number generated by the mobile in the range [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans-1] 4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot.

NumberOfSlotsSpreadTrans

S on not combined BCCH 55 76 109

S on co mbined BCCH 41 52 58

3, 8, 14, 50 4, 9, 16 5, 10, 20

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

351

NumberOfSlotsSpreadTrans

S on not combined BCCH 163 217

S on co mbined BCCH 86 11

6, 11, 25 7, 12, 32

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Note :

[3 to 12 / 14 / 16 / 20 / 25 / 32 / 50] time slots bts 32 DP The choice will depend on the quantities of GSM phase 1 and GSM phase 2 mobiles. For Mobile phase 1, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 50 leads to the lower double allocation rate. For Mobile phase 2, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 6, 7, 11, 12, 25, 32 (respectively 5, 10, 20) for BCCH combined (respectively BCCH not combined) leads to the lower double allocation rate. Therefore, for a network that handles a combination of both types of mobiles, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans should be set to 32 (default value).

numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion Class 3
Description : Minimum number of free TCHs triggering the beginning of the TCH congestion phase and the beginning of the traffic overload condition. [0 to 128] bts 0 DP numberOfTCHFree BeforeCongestion numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Release :

V9

[C/M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

352

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion Class 3
Description : A threshold giving the number of free TCHs, which triggers the end of TCH congestion phase and the end of the traffic overload condition (additionally, this parameter takes into account the preempted PDTCH). [0 to 128] bts 0 DP numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Release :

V9

[C/M]:

numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion Class 3
Description : Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queued which triggers the beginning of the TCH congestion phase and the beginning of the traffic overload condition. [0 to 127] bts 0 DP numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Release :

V9

[C/M]:

numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion Class 3
Description : Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queued triggering the end of the TCH congestion phase and the end of the traffic overload condition. [0 to 127] bts 0 DP numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Release :

V9

[C/M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

353

nUsfExt Class 3
Description : Value range : Note : USF frequency during the second phase of the extended UL period [0..100] (1 unit = 20 ms) Even if the nUsfExt parameter value is set to 0 or 1, the period remains equal to 40ms (nUsfExt=2); 2 being the minimum parameter value for PCU. bts Extended UL TBF 0 DP V15

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

nwExtUtbf Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether the Extended UpLink TBF feature is enabled or not. [disabled / enabled] bts Extended UL TBF disabled DP

[M]:

The following flag combination is prohibited: nwExtUtbf = enabled and fullDlKa = disabled

Release :

V15

O
objectClass
Description : Value range : Q3 object class [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / pcmCircuit / powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord / traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

354

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object :

alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileRe adyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord, traceLogRecord. DP

Type :

objectInstance
Description : Object : Type : Scope of an alarm criteria. It covers all network objects when undefined. alarm criteria DP

object Filter List


Description : To select messages issued by one or several objects, and their subtree (optional). The object Filter List parameter includes the following components: objects and scope. Click the Modify button to enter the names of the objects to be selected. The scope enables to select the subtree of an object. Value range : objects [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc / pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord / traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP V12

Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

355

objects
Description : To select messages issued by one or several objects (50 objects max.), enter the concerned object class(es). This field must be empty to select all object classes. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. If a class is selected, the user may select one or more objects created in that class. If no object is selected, all messages issued by all objects created in the class are displayed. Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc / pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord / traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

Object : Type :

objects assigned
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Remark : List of the BSSs assigned to the relay. Fill in the list with bsc object identifiers or names. [1 to 255] relay DP A BSS can be assigned to several relays at the same time.

observation type
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Type of the observation. [general Statistic / fast Statistic / real Time / diagnostic] bscCounterList DP V11

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

356

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

observation type
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Type of the observation. [Observation real time / Observation fast statistic / Performance monitor] report template DP V11

observed counters
Description : Object : Value range : Type : Release : List of counters (Q3 names) chosen for observation. report template [list of Q3 counter names] DP V11

observed object class


Description : Value range : Class of object the user observes. [bsc / btsSiteManager / bts / pcmCircuit / adjacentCellHand Over / transceiverZone / transceiverEquipment / omu / tmu / cc / cem / pcmPort / signallingLink / channel / omc / md / machine] report template DP V11

Object : Type : Release :

occupationState
Description : Determines whether the PCM TS used by the terrestrial circuit is occupied by an SS7 channel. This attribute is significant provided the xtp object is unlocked. Value range : [preempted / notPreempted]


Object : Type : xtp DD

preempted........

The terrestrial circuit is mapped on a time slot occupied by an SS7 channel on the Ater interface. The PCM time slot is available for the traffic.

notPreempted.....

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

357

offsetLoad Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Notes : Load offset applied by the bsc to the cell selection process. [0 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority and load (TF716 - V12) 0 DP

[C/M]:

This attribute must be in the range [0 to 63].

When set to "0", no offset is effective. This parameter is set to "0" for the cells that do not belong to the related bsc object.

Release :

V12

offsetNeighbouringCell Class 3
Description : This attribute modifies the offset linked to the neighboring cell, used to increase the HO margin, in some specific cases This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance is unlocked Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Int [-63 to 63] dB handOverControl 2 DP The following tables show for each case, the ho margin value and the averaging windows taking account into the PBGT handover mechanism according to:


Release : Note :

the MS type-fast or slow mobile or managed by a hopping TCH the number of measurement of the serving cell compared with the normal averaging window the number of measurement of the neighboring cell compared with the normal averaging window

V14 This parameter is available for BSC 12000HC V15 and BSC 3000 V14 and V15.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

358

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Table 1 Mobile type: SFH MS cell Meas neighborin g cell meas < < cell meas avg neighboring cell avg Ho Margin

< <

RxLevHreqAveBe g RxLevHreqAveBe g RxLevHreqAve

RxNCellHreqAveBeg RxNCellHreqAve RxNCellHreqAve Beg

HoMargin+offset NeighbouringCell HoMargin HoMargin+offset NeighbouringCellservingfactorOffset HoMargin-serving factorOffset

RxLevHreqAve

RxNCellHreqAve

Table 2 Mobile type: slow non SFH MS cell Meas < < neighboring cell meas < < cell meas avg RxLevHreqAveBe g RxLevHreqAveBe g RxLevHreqAve RxLevHreqAve neighboring cell avg RxNCellHreqAveBeg RxNCellHreqAve RxNCellHreqAveBeg RxNCellHreqAve Ho Margin HoMargin+hoMarginB eg HoMargin+hoMarginB eg HoMargin+offset NeighbouringCell HoMargin

Table 3 Mobile type: fast non SFH MS cell Meas neighboring cell meas cell meas avg RxLevHreqAveBeg with: neighboring cell avg RxNCellHreqAve Beg Ho Margin HoMargin

< : number of available measurements is less than the normal window, : number of available measurements is greater than the normal window.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

359

offsetPriority Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Release : Note : Description: Value range: Object: Default value: Type: Checks: Release: Note: V17 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000. Priority offset applied by the bsc to the cell selection process. [1 to 5] adjacentCellHandOver Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority and load (TF716 - V12) 1 DP

[C/M]:

This attribute must be in the range [1 to 5].

V12 "1" is the highest priority. Priority offset applied by the bsc to the cell selection process 1...5 adjacentCellUTRAN 1 DP

oMC notification number


Description : To select OMC-R manager notifications identified by a given number. Do not fill in this criterion if not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

omu
Description : Value range : Object : Managed object class representing the Mass Memory Unit (hard disk) board. [0 to 2147483646] omu

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

360

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Notes :

Id

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard "step by step power control algorithm. This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

omuId
Description : Identifier of the omu object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified and is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU 3000. [0 to 2147483646] omu DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

on error
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Whether to stop running commands when an applicative error is detected by the system (stop). [stop / continue] commandFile - Run DP

onlyExtUtbf Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Whether only Extended UpLink TBF mode is supported. [disabled / enabled] bts Extended UL TBF disabled DP V15 The recommended value is enable.

onePhaseAccess Class 2
Description : Value range : One phase access activation parameter. BSC V15: int [0 to 1] BSC V16: [disabled / enabled / edgeEnabled / gprsEdgeEnabled]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

361

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

bts GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access (15015) disabled DP

[C/M]:

Edge must be activated at cell level (egprsServices must be equal to enabled ) if onePhaseAccess is equal to edgeEnabled or gprsEdgeEnabled. Edge must be activated (edgeDataService Type must be equal to full capabilities are requested) on BCCH TDMA (TDMA having lowest priority) if onePhaseAccess is equal to edgeEnabled or gprsEdgeEnabled

[C/M]:

Notes :

"0" stands for disabled "One phase access". "1" stands for enabled "One phase access".

Release :

V15

onePhaseDnMsCapability Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Default number of DL TS to be considered for MS attempting a 1 phase access. [1 to 255] bts GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access (15015) 1 DP V15 Values 0 and 9 to 255 are interpreted as default value by the PCU.

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the atmRm object are as follows: administrative State {} operationalState disabled availabilityStatus notInstalled

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

362

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

administrative State {} {} {} {} Object : Feature : Type : Release : atmRm

operationalState disabled disabled disabled enabled

availabilityStatus {} failed dependency {}

BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the bsc object are as follows: administrative State locked unlocked unlocked operational State disabled disabled disabled availability Status {} {} dependency Meaning The BSC has just been created or locked. The BSC is in restart or BDA build phase. The BSS/OMC-R link is not created or the BSC database is not built. The BSC refuses every command, including resetting. The BSS/OMC-R link and the associations with the BSC are established, and the BSC database is built.

unlocked unlocked

disabled enabled

failed {}

Object : Type :

bsc DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

363

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the bscMdInterface object are as follows: administrative State locked unlocked operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} {} Meaning The BSS/OMC-R link has been locked by a user. The link has just been created and the connection is not established yet (initial state). The link is down. The connection cannot be reestablished. The connection is established.

unlocked unlocked unlocked Object : Type :

disabled disabled enabled

dependency failed {}

bscMdInterface DD

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the bts object are as follows: administrative State locked unlocked operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} dependency Meaning The cell has just been created or locked. The radio site is not working or the TDMA frames are not correctly configured. The radio site is working and the number of TDMA frames correctly configured for the cell is reached. The radio cell is being released following a soft release command.

unlocked

enabled

{}

shutting Down

enabled

busy

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

364

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Type :

bts DD

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the btsSiteManager object are as follows: administrative State locked unlocked unlocked unlocked operational State disabled disabled disabled disabled availability Status {} {} dependency failed Meaning The site has just been created or locked. Downloading in the site BCF is in-progress. The PCM link used for the site LAPD signaling is faulty. Loss of Level 3 dialogue or configuration Abis message not correctly acknowledged or downloading problem The PCM is available for LAPD signaling, the Level 3 dialogue is established, and the configuration and Abis connection with the site BCF are OK.

unlocked

enabled

{}

Object : Type :

btsSiteManager DD

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state. "disabled" means the BSC cannot send the messages to the OMC-R agent. [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the callPathTrace object are as follows:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

365

administrative State locked

operational State enabled

usageState idle

Meaning Call path tracing has just started in the BSC or has been stopped by the operator. Call path tracing is in-progress and messages are forwarded to the OMC-R agent. Call path tracing is stopped (end-of-session criterion is true). Call path tracing is in-progress but messages are not forwarded to the OMC-R agent.

unlocked

enabled

busy

unlocked

enabled

idle

unlocked

disabled

Object : Type :

callPathTrace DD

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the cc object are as follows: operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled Object : Feature : Type : Release : cc BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 availabilityStatus notInstalled {} failed dependency online

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

366

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the cem object are as follows: administrative State {} {} {} {} {} Object : Feature : Type : Release : cem BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled availabilityStatus notInstalled {} failed dependency {}

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the controlNode object are as follows: administrative State {} {} {} {} Object : Feature : Type : Release : controlNode BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 operationalState disabled disabled disabled enabled availabilityStatus {} failed degraded online

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

367

Object : Type :

efd DD

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the g3BscEqp object are as follows: administrative State {} {} {} Object : Feature : Type : Release : g3BscEqp BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 operationalState disabled enabled disabled availabilityStatus {} {} dependency

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the g3Transcoder object are as follows: administrative State {} {} {} {} {} Object : Feature : Type : Release : operationalState disabled disabled disabled enabled enabled hardware transcoder 3G BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 availabilityStatus {} failed dependency degraded {}

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

368

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the iem object are as follows: administrative State {} {} {} {} {} Object : Feature : Type : Release : iem BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled availabilityStatus not installed {} failed dependency {}

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the interfaceNode object are as follows: operationalState disabled disabled enabled disabled Object : Feature : Type : Release : interfaceNode BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 availabilityStatus dependency {} degraded {}

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

369

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the lapdLink object are as follows: operational State disabled disabled enabled availability Status dependency failed {} Loss of Level 1 SICD board faulty or TSCB faulty (Ater LAPD link) or BSCB faulty (Abis LAPD link) The Level 1 is established and the SICDs, RCBs, and related internal PCMs are working. Meaning

Object : Note : Type :

lapdLink This parameter is only available for lapdLink OML and lapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC. DD

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the log object are as follows: operational State disabled disabled enabled availability Status {} logFull {} Meaning The disk message saving partition is full (current alarm log). The disk message saving partition is full (current observation or trace log). The messages are actually saved in the partition.

Object : Type :

log DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

370

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the lsaRc object are as follows: operationalState disabled disabled enabled disabled Object : Feature : Type : Release : lsaRc BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 availabilityStatus dependency {} degraded {}

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state. "disabled" means the BSC cannot send the messages to the OMC-R agent. [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the mdScanner object are as follows: operational State disabled disabled enabled enabled availability Status {} {offDuty} {} {offDuty} Meaning The observation is running but the messages cannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent. The observation is stopped and the messages cannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent. The observation is running and the messages are forwarded to the OMC-R agent. The observation is stopped and the messages are forwarded to the OMC-R agent.

Object : Type :

mdScanner DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

371

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the mms object are as follows: administrative State locked Object : Feature : Type : Release : mms BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 operationalState {} availabilityStatus {}

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the omu object are as follows: administrative State locked Object : Feature : Type : Release : omu BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 operationalState {} availabilityStatus {}

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the pcmCircuit object are as follows: administrative State locked operational State disabled availability Status {} Meaning The PCM has just been created or locked.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

372

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

administrative State unlocked unlocked

operational State disabled disabled

availability Status dependency failed

Meaning The TCU is faulty (A interface PCMs). The DDTI board or the internal PCM partner is faulty, or the connection is down. The DDTI board and the internal PCM partner are working and the connection is established.

unlocked

enabled

{}

Object : Type :

pcmCircuit DD

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the pcu object are as follows: administrative State locked unlocked operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} dependency Meaning The PCU has just been created or locked. The Level 2 is not established or the connection with the BSC is down (external PCM). The PCU is working.

unlocked Object : Feature : Type : Release :

enabled pcu

{}

GPRS (SV407 - V12) DD V12

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the pcu object are as follows:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

373

operational State disabled disabled enabled Object : Feature : Type : Release : Note :

availability Status {} dependency {} pcusn GPRS (SV407 - V12) DD V12

Meaning The pcusn has just been created. The pcusn object does not work, or the PCM link does not work. The pcusn object is working.

Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the signallingLink object are as follows: administrative State locked unlocked operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} dependency Meaning The SS7 link has just been created or locked. The PCM carrying the SS7 link is faulty or there is no MTP2 message between the BSC and the MSC. The CCS7 board is faulty. The PCM and CCS7 board are working and MTP2 messages are exchanged between the BSC and the MSC.

unlocked unlocked

disabled enabled

failed {}

Object : Type :

signallingLink DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

374

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the sw8kRm object are as follows: administrative State {} {} {} {} {} Object : Feature : Type : Release : sw8kRm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled availabilityStatus not installed {} failed dependency {}

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the tmu object are as follows: administrative State locked unlocked {} {} {} {} Object : Feature : Type : Release : tmu BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled enabled availabilityStatus not installed {} failed dependency degraded {}

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

375

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state. "disabled" means the BSC cannot send the messages to the OMC-R agent. [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the traceControl object are as follows: administrati ve State locked operational State enabled Meaning Call tracing has not started or has been stopped, and the messages are forwarded to the OMC-R agent. Call tracing has been stopped and the messages cannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent. Call tracing is in-progress in the BSC and the messages are forwarded to the OMC-R agent. Call tracing is in-progress but the messages cannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent.

locked

disabled

unlocked unlocked

enabled disabled

Object : Type :

traceControl DD

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the transceiver object are as follows: operational State disabled disabled availability Status dependency failed Meaning The parent cell is not working or no TRX/DRX is available for the TDMA frame. The BTS has refused the TDMA frame configuration or is using the partnered TRX/DRX for BCCH filling purposes. The parent cell is working, a TRX/DRX is available for the TDMA frame, and the BTS has accepted the TDMA frame configuration.

enabled

{}

Object : Type :

transceiver DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

376

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the transceiverEquip ment object are as follows: administrati veState locked unlocked unlocked operationa lState disabled disabled disabled availability Status {} {} dependency Meaning The TRX/DRX has just been created or locked. Downloading in the TRX/DRX is in-progress. The parent radio site or the parent cell or the PCM link partner is not working. The TRX/DRX is assigned to BCCH filling by the BTS or loss of Level 3 dialogue or Abis configuration message not correctly acknowledged or downloading problem or status regression. The parent cell is working, a PCM is available to the TRX/DRX, and the Level 3 dialogue is established. The TRX/DRX is being released following a soft release command.

unlocked

disabled

failed

unlocked

enabled

{}

shutting Down

enabled

{}

Object : Type :

transceiverEquipment DD

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the transcoder object are as follows:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

377

administrative State locked unlocked

operational State disabled disabled

availability Status {} dependency

Meaning The TCU has just been created or locked. The SICD, RCB, TSCB, or internal PCM partner is faulty or the Level 2 is not established or the connection with the BSC is down (external PCM). The TCU is working.

unlocked Object : Type :

enabled transcoder DD

{}

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the transcoderBoard object are as follows: administrative State locked unlocked unlocked unlocked operational State disabled disabled disabled disabled availability Status {} {} dependency failed Meaning The TCB has just been created or locked. Downloading in the TCB is in progress. The parent TCU is not working. The UTE board or internal PCM partner is faulty or downloading problem or a severe error was detected. The TCB is working.

unlocked Object : Type :

enabled transcoderBoard DD

{}

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

378

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the trm object are as follows: administrative State locked unlocked {} {} {} Object : Feature : Type : Release : trm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled availabilityStatus not installed {} failed dependency {}

operationalState
Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the xtp object are as follows: administrative State locked operational State disabled usage State idle availability Status {} Meaning The CIC has just been created or locked. The PCM link partner is faulty. The CIC is preempted. The CIC is working and traffic-free.

unlocked

disabled

idle

dependency

unlocked unlocked

disabled enabled

idle idle

failed {}

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

379

administrative State unlocked

operational State enabled

usage State busy

availability Status {}

Meaning The CIC is working and traffic-busy. The CIC is being released following a soft release command.

shutting Down

enabled

busy

{}

Object : Type :

xtp DD

otherServicesPriority Class 3
Description : An index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocation request (in signaling mode) whose cause is "other services". This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

output classes
Description : List of authorized output classes defining a terminal output domain. Output classes grant access to various types of data. [login window / OMC-R browser / alarm window / performance monitor] When the "login window" class is authorized, the "Login" window is automatically displayed on the terminal screen outside work sessions. Object : Type : terminal profile DP

Value range :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

380

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

output classes
Description : List of authorized output classes defining a users output domain. Output classes grant access to various types of data. [OMC-R browser / alarm window / performance monitor / command file manager / security manager / SMS-CB manager / description window / job scheduler window / alarm log window / system session log window / call traces window / Unix window / notification log window / notification window / relay manager / alarm criteria] The "notification log window" class gives access to the system notification log, while the "notification window" class gives access to the user notification log. Object : Type : user profile DP

Value range :

owner
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Name of the user creating the command file on the OMC-R. [case sensitive] commandFile DP

P
packetAckTime Class 3
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:

dwAckTime upAckTime

The deactivation value is 64 for both of them. Refer to these entries in this Dictionary. Release : V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

381

packetFlowContext Class 3
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:

pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold pfcPreemptionRatioGold pfcPreemptionRatioSilver pfcRtDowngradeAllowed pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold pfcT6 pfcT8 pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl

Refer to these entries in this Dictionary. These attributes have no effect on the BSS if the pfcActivation parameter is disabled. Object : Feature : Type : Release : Notes : powerControl BSS Packet Flow Context DP V16

This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only. This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowConte xt attribute.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

382

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

packetSiStatus Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note : Activation of the System Information Status feature in the cell. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS DP V16 This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only.

pagingOnCell Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Enables or disables paging requests in a cell. [enabled / disabled] bts enabled DP V9

pan Class 3
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:


Release :

panInc panDec panMax

Refer to these entries in this Dictionary. V12

panDec Class 3 (pan)


Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : The MS counter N3102 is decremented by panDec each time PUAN timer expires [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7 (32s)] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 0

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

383

Type : Release : Note :

DP V12 If the MS counter equals "0", an abnormal release is performed.

panInc Class 3 (pan)


Description : The MS counter N3102 is incremented by panInc each time a PUAN message which allows the transmit window to go forward is received. [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7 (32s)] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 0 DP V12 If the MS counter equals "0", an abnormal release is performed.

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

panMax Class 3 (pan)


Description : Maximum value of the counter N3102 (used in case of block acknowledgment time out), set by the MS at each cell reselection. [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7 (32s)] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 0 DP V12 If the MS counter equals "0", an abnormal release is performed.

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

384

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

parameter(s)
Description : List of parameters to define when running the command file. Their generic format is $XXX, where $ identifies such a parameter and XXX is a string of uppercase, alphanumerical characters that does not contain spaces. Object : Type : commandFile DP

partialRecordCriteriaType Class 2
Description : Value range : Criterion that defines the type of partial records to generate in the BSC. [event type / numbered / timed / no partial]

event type ........

The BSC generates partial records each time a handover is successful (partialRec ordCriteriaEvent-Type = "handover"). The BSC generates partial records every <N> successful handovers (partialRecordCrit eriaNb-Event = [1 to 64]). The BSC generates partial records every <N> seconds (partialRecord-Criteria-Timer = [1 to 60]). The BSC does not generate partial records.

numbered ........

timed ............

no partial ........

If "no partial" is selected, trace data are only recorded at the end of each traced call. If the traceControl object is locked before the end of a call, all related data are lost. Object : Type : Checks : traceControl DP

[M]:

The traceControl object is locked.

A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock the object to start collecting trace data in the related BSC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

385

partialRecordCriteriaEventType
Description : Value range : Type : Create traceControl. Select this criterion when partialRecordCriteriaType is equal to "Event type". handover DP

partialRecordCriteriaNbEvent
Description : Value range : Type : Create traceControl. Enter the number of events when partialrecordCriteriaType is equal to "Numbered". [1 to 64] DP

partialrecordCriteriaTimer
Description : Value range : Type : This parameter should be set to "Hand over" when partialRecordCriteriaType is equal to "Event type". [1 to 60] minutes DP

particular intervention
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Type of action associated with an alarm criteria in the specific configuration. [noAlarm / critical / major / minor] alarm criteria DP

password
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Users current password as defined in the users profile. It is not displayed. [case sensitive] user profile - Change password DP

password
Description : Users password. It begins with a letter, contains at least one non-alphabetical character among the first eight characters, and is case sensitive. [6 characters min] user profile - Create/Set

Value range : Object :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

386

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Checks :

DP

[C/M]:

The password begins with a letter and contains one non-alphanumerical character among the first eight characters. The password is at least six-character long.

[C/M]:

password duration
Description : Value range : Maximum time during which the users current password is valid. [2 to 2147483646] days When a password validity duration runs out, the password must be changed on opening the next work session. The users access to MMI commands is barred until the password is changed. Refer to the password status entry. Object : Type : Note : user profile DP It is possible for this parameter to take on an infinite value. If so, the password will not expire.

pcmCircuit
Description : Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to a bsc object (Abis, Ater, Lb, A_Lb, or Agprs interface). It is related to the number of the DDTI board to which the PCM described link is physically connected in the BSC. PCM links are identified by the DDTI boards to which they are connected in the BSC. A PCM link connected to DDTI board no.i has a reference equal to "2i" or "2i+1" (each board manages two links at a time). See NTP < 22 >, which gives the relationship between the number of a board and its physical location in the BSC equipment cabinet. When the PCM link is allotted to a site on the Abis interface, it is also identified by a reference number defined with regard to the site (pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager). Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary. Value range : [0..363] Max number of pcmCircuit T1: 0..168 (BSC 3000); 0..364 (BSC 3000 Optical); 0..88 (TCU 3G)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

387

Max number of pcmCircuit E1: 0..126 (BSC 3000); 0..252 (BSC 3000 Optical); 0..66 (TCU 3G) Object : Feature : Type : Checks : pcmCircuit (Abis, Ater, Lb, A_Lb and Agprs interfaces) GPRS (SV407 - V12) Id

[C]:

The maximum number of external PCM links allotted to a BSC depends on its type and architecture:

BSC T1 external PCMs 12 T2 T3 20

12000 T4 T5 28 40 48

Checks :

[C]:

The number of external PCM links allotted to a BSC on the Ater interface depends on the number of TCUs linked to the BSC (one TCU uses one link). The software object related to the parent bsc object is created. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the pcmCircuit object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No btsSiteManager object (Abis PCM) or transcoder object (Ater PCM) or pcu object (Agprs PCM) refers to the pcmCircuit object. No mdScanner object describing a temporary observation refers to the pcmCircuit object (no observation is running on the concerned PCM).

[C]: [C/D]: [D]: [D]:

[D]:

[D]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

388

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

pcmCircuit
Description : Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to a transcoder object (A interface). It is related to the number of the TDTI board to which the PCM described link is physically connected in the TCU. PCM links are identified by the TDTI boards to which they are physically connected in the TCU.

PcmCircuit 0 1 2 3

TDTI N 0 1 1 2 2

Port N 0 0 1 0 1

Unused

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[0 to 3] pcmCircuit (A interface) Id

[C]:

The number of PCM links connected to a remote transcoder on the A interface is limited to maxPcmCTPerTranscd (static configuration data). The parent transcoder object is created. <maxTranscdBPerTranscd> transcoderBoard objects are created for the parent transcoder object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the pcmCircuit object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No signallingLink or xtp object refers to the pcmCircuit object.

[C]: [C]:

[C/D]: [D]: [D]:

[D]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

389

pcmCircuitBsc
Description : Identifier of a PCM link (pcmCircuit object) used by a radio site defined with regard to the BSC. It is related to the number of the DDTI board to which the link is physically connected in the BSC. Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, which defines the relationship between these two attributes. Value range : Depending on the BSC type, the value range is:


Object : Type : DP

[0 to 47] for a BSC 12000HC [0 to 167] for a BSC 3000

btsSiteManager

pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager
Description : Identifier of the PCM link defined with regard to the BTS. It is related to the number of the DTI or PCMI board to which the link is physically connected in the BTS. Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, which defines the relationship between these two attributes. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 5] btsSiteManager DP

pcmCircuitId
Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a LAPD link. Since all radio sites have a switching facility, the BSC can directly allocate the PCM link that supports a LAPD link. Value range : [0 to 47] for BSC 12000HC [0 to 167] for BSC 3000 Object : Note : lapdLink This parameter is only available for lapdLink OML and lapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

390

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Note : Type :

This parameter is only available for the lapdLink OML object on BSC 3000. DD

pcmCircuitId Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the PCM link used by an SS7 channel on the A interface, defined with regard to the TCU. [0 to 2147483646] signallingLink DP

[C/M]:

The pcmCircuit object is created for the transcoder object referenced by the signallingLink object (transcoderId). If the described link is PCMA no.3, the time slot used by the SS7 channel (timeSlotNumber) is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary).

[C/M]:

pcmCircuitId Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the PCM link used by a TCU on the Ater interface, defined with regard to the BSC. [0 to 47] transcoder DP

[C/M]: [C/M]:

The pcmCircuit object is created for the parent bsc object. It is not used on the Abis interface by a btsSiteManager object nor on the Ater interface by another transcoder object dependent on the same parent bsc object. The parent bsc object is unlocked, and the transcoder object and the signallingLink objects that refer to it are locked.

Note :

[M]:

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

391

pcmCircuitId Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the PCM link used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface, defined with regard to the TCU. [0 to 2147483646] xtp DP

[C/M]:

The pcmCircuit object is created for the transcoder object referenced by the xtp object (transcoderId). If the described link is PCMA no.3, the time slot used by the terrestrial circuit (timeSlotNumber ) is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary).

[C/M]:

pcmErrorCorrection Class 2
Description : Whether the bts uses the new ETF (Enhanced TRAU Frame) frame (set to "1") or the ETSI "Rec 08.60" frame (set to "0"). [0 / 1] bts PCM error correction (FM660 - V12) 1 DP

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

[C/M]

This attribute can be set to "1" only if enhancedTRAUFrameIndication attribute is set to "available" or "active "

Release : Note :

V12 This parameter is only available for BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

pcmNbr Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList)


Description : Value range : Number of PCM links used for Agprs interface. BSC 12000HC: [1 / 3 / 5 / 7 to 47] BSC 3000: [6 to 167] Object : pcu

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

392

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

GPRS (SV407 - V12) None DP V12

pcmTimeSlotNumber Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Scheduled time slot of a radio site on the Abis interface. [1 to 31] if the PCM link is an E1 link [1 to 24] if the PCM link is a T1 link btsSiteManager DP

[C/M]:

The scheduled time slot is masked in the bstSiteManager object radioSiteMask, so it cannot be allotted by the BSC.

Notes :

The relation "scheduled time slot = teiBtsSiteManager + 1" is always true at BTS level. It can be false at BSC level provided a PCM switching matrix is used between the BSC and the BTS; otherwise, it is true.

Release :

V8

pcmType Class 3 (BSC 12000) or Class 0 (BSC 3000)


Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Interface on which the PCM link is used. [pcmA / pcmAbis / pcmAter / pcmAgprs / pcmA_Lb / pcm_Lb] pcmCircuit GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP

[M]:

If the current attribute value is pcmA, no signallingLink or xtpobject refers to that object (pcmTimeSlotNumber). If the current attribute value is pcmAbis, no btsSiteManager object refers to that object (bscSitePcmList). If the current attribute value is pcmAter, no transcoder object refers to that object (pcmCircuitId ). If the current attribute value is pcmAgprs, no pcu object refers to that object (bscPcuPcmRefList ).

[M]:

[M]:

[M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

393

[M]: [C/M]:

pcmAbis is forbidden for pcmCircuitId equals 0, 2, 4, or 6. signallingLink of Lb interface must be referenced to pcmCircuit of pcmLb or pcmA_Lb type. signallingLink of A interface must be referenced to pcmCircuit of pcmA or pcmA_Lb type.

[C/M]:

pcu
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : Identifier of a pcu object defined with regard to a bsc object. [0 to 2147483646] pcu GPRS (SV407 - V12) Id V12

pcuCellState
Description : From the BSC point of view, this parameter corresponds to the GPRS configuration of the cell in the PCU. This is made possible through the messages exchanged between the BSC and the PCU. [0, Not Significant; 1, GPRS: no PDTCH channels created; 2, GPRS: out of service; 3, GPRS: service OML configuring; 4, GPRS: service RSL configuring; 5, GPRS: in service; 6, GPRS: service unavailable - OML; 7, GPRS: service unavailable - Gb down; 8, GPRS: service unavailable - BVC KO] Object : Type : Release : pcu DD V16

Value range :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

394

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

pcuLapdEqptRefList Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : List of LAPD equipment numbers used by the pcu object. [1 to 12] pcu GPRS (SV407 - V12) DP

[C/M]: [C/M]:

All the referred LAPD equipment object instances of this attribute must exist The sapi attribute of the referred lapdLink object instances must have been set to OML. The associatedInterface attribute of the referred lapdLink object instances must have been set to Agprs. A lapdLink object instance can be referred by only one pcu object instance

Release : Note :

[C/M]:

V12 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

pcusn
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : Identifier of a pcusn object. [0 to 255] pcusn GPRS (SV407 - V12) Id V12

pcuSNName
Description : Reference name of a PCUSN object on the OMC-R. It begins with a letter and is case sensitive. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [30 characters max.] pcusn DP

[C/M]:

The name of a pcuSN is unique to the OMC-R.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

395

Release : Note :

V12 Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited. The valid symbols are: - letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z - digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 - minus sign: - undescore: _

penaltyTime Class 3
Description : Timer used by an idle mobile before re-selecting a cell (C2 criterion). When a mobile places the cell on the list of strongest carriers, it starts a timer that stops after penaltyTime seconds. This timer is reset when the mobile removes the cell from the list. For the entire timer duration, the re-selection criterion (C2) is assigned a negative temporaryOffset value. Refer to the cellReselectOffset entry in the Dictionary. Value range : [20 to 640, by steps of 20] seconds. The value "640" is reserved and indicates that the temporary offset is ignored in the re-selection criterion (C2) calculation. It also changes the sign in the C2 formula. bts AR 264 20 DP V8

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

396

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

perceived severity
Description : To select messages according to the priority. The alarm processing priority provides an indication of how it is perceived that the capability of the managed object has been affected. Refer to the alarmPriority entry in the Dictionary where the priority levels are explained. Value range : [cleared / critical / indeterminate / major / minor / warning] Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Object : Type : Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

periodCCCHLoadIndication Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Remark : Periodicity at which the BTS sends the CCCH payload to the BSC ("9.2" is the only value accepted). [0.00 to 2147483646] second bts DP

[C/M]:

The only value accepted by the system is "9.2".

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

periodicity
Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Time between two runs if the job is to be periodically run. [1 to 2147483646] minute(s) job To define if it is a periodic job. DP

pfcActivation Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Activates the Packet Flow Context feature in the cell. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled BSS Packet Flow Context DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

397

Release : Note :

V16 This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only.

pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Conversational of ARP 1 (allocation / retention priorities 1) are protected against voice preemption. This parameter is not used. [false / true] powerControl false BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release :

pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Streaming of ARP 1 (allocation / retention priorities 1) are protected against voice preemption. [false / true] powerControl false BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Note : Release :

pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Conversational of ARP 2 (allocation / retention priorities 2) are protected against voice preemption. This parameter is not used. [false / true] powerControl false

Value range : Object : Default value :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

398

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Feature : Type : Note : Release :

BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Streaming of ARP 2 (allocation / retention priorities 2) are protected against voice preemption. [false / true] powerControl false BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release :

pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Conversational of ARP 3 (allocation / retention priorities 3) are protected against voice preemption. This parameter is not used. [false / true] powerControl false BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release :

pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Streaming of ARP 3 (allocation / retention priorities 3) are protected against voice preemption. This parameter is not used. [false / true] powerControl

Value range : Object :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

399

Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release :

false BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

pfcFlowControlActivation Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Release : Note : Activates the flow control of the Packet Flow Context in the cell. [disabled / enabled] bts disabled BSS Packet Flow Context DP

[M]:

If pfcActivation is disabled, it is not allowed to enable pfcFlowControlActivation.

V16 This parameter is optional. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only.

pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs Class 3
Description : Specifies the percentage of each TS of the TDMA which is reserved for non real time PFC (including MSs with no PFC). This parameter is used for the admission control of a real time PFC. [0 to 100] % transceiver 0 BSS Packet Flow Context DP V16 This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only.

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

400

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Note :

The value 0 or a very low value may result in a TBF with only NRT PFC not being allocated enough bandwidth. This results in TBF drops. The value 0 is internally converted to 1 inside the PCU. The value 100 or a very high value may result in all RT PFC being downgraded or deleted. This value is internally converted to 99 inside PCU.

Note :

pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate Class 3
Description : Number of jokers that are needed to guarantee both uplink and downlink throughputs in any location of the cell. Refer to the pfcTsGuranteedBitRateUl and the pfcTsGuranteedBitRateDl entries in this dictionary. [0 to 4] 16 kbit/s PCM TS transceiver 0 BSS Packet Flow Context DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

[C/M]:

pfcMinNumberOfJoker sforTsGuarante edBitRate must be lower than or equal to minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain so that real timePFC can be accepted when dynamic Agprs is activated.

Note : Release :

This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcNrtRequestedDnMbrGTThres counter (C15267). For more information, refer to NTP <125>. [0..568] kbit/s powerControl 0 (all requests are taken into account) BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

401

pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcNrtRequestedUpMbrGTThres counter (C15268). For more information, refer to NTP <125>. [0..568] kbit/s powerControl 0 (all requests are taken into account) BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release :

pfcPreemptionRatioGold Class 3
Description : Defines the percentage of raw radio bandwidth a gold NRT PFC (THP1) may preempt from silver and bronze NRT PFC (THP2 or THP3 or background or MS without PFC support) [0.00 to 93.750] by step of 0.5% powerControl 0 (no preemption) DP V14 (renamed in V16) The value may be decreased to lower the impact on Silver and Bronze subscribers when the traffic is high.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

pfcPreemptionRatioSilver Class 3
Description : Defines the percentage of raw radio bandwidth a silver NRT PFC (THP2) may preempt from bronze NRT PFC (THP3 or background or MS without PFC support) [0.00 to 93.750] by step of 0.5% powerControl 0 (no preemption) DP V14 (renamed in V16) The value may be decreased to lower the impact on Bronze subscribers when the traffic is high.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

402

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

pfcRtDowngradeAllowed Class 3
Description : In case the guaranteed bit rate of a real time PFC cannot be granted, this parameter indicates whether the PFC is deleted or downgraded into a non real time PFC. If it is downgraded into a non real time PFC, the parameter specifies which traffic class and PFC are used for the downgrade. [downgrade not allowed / downgrade to interactive THP1 / downgrade to interactive THP2 / downgrade to interactive THP3 / downgrade to background] powerControl downgrade not allowed BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

Value range :

Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release :

pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcRtRequestedDnGbrGTThres counter (C15265). For more information, refer to NTP <125>. [0..568] kbit/s powerControl 0 (all requests are taken into account) BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release :

pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcRtRequestedUpGbrGTThres counter (C15266). For more information, refer to NTP <125>. [0..568] kbit/s powerControl 0 (all requests are taken into account) BSS Packet Flow Context

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

403

Type : Note : Release :

DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

pfcT6 Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release : pfcT6 is the guard timer for the Download Packet Flow Context procedure. [0.1 to 10] seconds by step of 0.1 second powerControl 0 BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

pfcT8 Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release : pfcT8 is the guard timer for the Modify Packet Flow Context procedure. [0.1 to 10] seconds by step of 0.1 second powerControl 0 BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl Class 3
Description : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : For an EDGE MS, specifies the downlink throughput which is guaranteed in any location of the cell. powerControl 0 BSS Packet Flow Context DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

404

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Note : Release :

This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Note : Release : For an EDGE MS, specifies the uplink throughput which is guaranteed in any location of the cell. [1 to 60] kbit/s powerControl 0 BSS Packet Flow Context DP This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute. V16

plmnPermitted Class 3
Description : List of NCC of the PLMNs on which MSs are allowed to take measurements for handovers. Listening to the PLMN to which the cell belongs must be authorized. [0 to 7] bts

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

DP

pODType
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Type of the BSC or BTS involved, as defined in the Physical Objects Dictionary. [BSC1GT / BSC2GT / BTSoutdoor / BTSindoor / BTSmicro / BTSsmart / BTSoutdoor2G] alarm criteria DP

pointCode Class 1
Description : Value range : MSC identifier in the SS7 network (Destination Point Code).

in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383] in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

405

Object : Type :

signallingLinkSet DP

pointCode Class 1
Description : Value range : BSC identifier in the SS7 network (Origin Point Code).


DP

in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383] in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215]

Object : Type :

signallingPoint

port Ethernet operational


Description : Operational state of the OMU external Ethernet port. ISO operational state (enabled/disabled). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : [enabled/disabled] omu AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

port Ethernet status


Description : Availability status of the OMU module external Ethernet port. ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. Value range : Object : Feature : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}] omu AR 1209 - V13.1

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

406

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DD V13

port 0 X25 status


Description : Operational state of the OMU module external X.25 port 0. ISO operational state (enabled/disabled). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}] omu AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

port 1 X25 status


Description : Availability status of the OMU external X.25 port 1. ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}] omu AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

407

portChosen Class 2
Description : Value range : Number of the port currently used on the OMC-R end. [port0 / port1 / automaticChoice (selection by the OMC-R agent)] If the port is not uniquely selected, it will be dynamically assigned by the OMC-R agent. Selecting "automaticChoice" is recommended since it allows the OMC-R agent to reconfigure the port currently used when a problem occurs. Object : Type : Checks : bscMdInterface DP

[M] :

The bscMdInterface object is locked.

portUsed
Description : Value range : Number of the port currently used on the OMC-R end. [port0 / port1] This dynamic attribute identifies the OMC-R port currently used. It can be different from portChosen since the OMC-R agent switches the transport connection with a BSC over to the other port as and when needed. No information is displayed unless the BSS/OMC-R link is established. Object : Type : bscMdInterface DI

positionInShelf
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : Indicates the position of a module in a shelf. [1 to 15] atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm, AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

408

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

powerBudgetInterCell Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Authorization to perform intercell handovers for power budget. [enabled / disabled] handOverControl enabled DP

powerClass
Description : Value range : Transmission power class of a TDMA frame. [powerClass5 (GSM 900 network, GSM-R network, E-GSM, GSM 850 - GSM 1900 and GSM 900 - GSM 1800 network) powerClass1 (GSM 1800 network, GSM 1900 network, GSM 1800 - GSM 900 network and GSM 1900 - GSM 850)] transceiver powerClass1 DP

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[C]:

The attribute value complies with the type of network in which the TDMA frame is used. Refer to the standardIndicator entry in the Dictionary (attribute of the parent bts object). This attribute cannot be modified.

Restrictions :

[M]:

powerControl
Description : Identifier of a powerControl object that defines the power control management parameters in a cell. A bts object may reference one and only one object of this type. [0 to 2147483646] powerControl Id

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C]:

The associated bts object is created and the powerControl object is not created for that object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. The parent bsc object is unlocked. The powerControl object is created.

[C/D]:

[M]: [M/D]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

409

[D]: [D]:

The associated bts object is not referenced, except by an handOverControl object. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

powerControlIndicator Class 3
Description : Whether MS signal strength measurements include measurements on BCCH. BCCH measurements must not be included when the following two conditions are met:


Value range :

The radio channel hops at least on two different frequencies, including the BCCH frequency. Power control on the downlink is used.

[include BCCH measurements / do not include BCCH measurements] This parameter should only be used with cavity coupling.

Object : Default value : Type :

bts include BCCH measurements DP

powerDownlink (algorithm Used) class 2


Description : Power gain in the BTS-to-MS direction used by the speech processing algorithm in a TCB. This parameter is a component of the algorithm Used attribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [-15 to +15] dB transcoderBoard 0 DP V8

powerIncrStepSize Class 3
Description : Value range : Step for increasing MS or BTS txpwr when using step by step algorithm. This is applicable to BSC 12000HC only. [2, 4, 6] dB

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

410

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

powerControl 4 dB DP

[M]: [M]:

lRxLevDLP + powerIncStepSize u RxLevDLP. lRxLevULP + powerIncStepSize uRxLevULP.

Notes :

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard "step by step" power control algorithm. This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

powerIncrStepSizeUpLink Class 3
Description : Increment step size for uplink power control. This is applicable to BSC 3000 only. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the bsc object instance is unlocked. This attribute can only be modified if the bts object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 30] dB powerControl 4 DP

0566CO01: The attribute powerIncrStepSizeUL must verify:

1RxLevULP + powerIncrStepSizeUL <= uRxLevULP Release : Note : V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

411

powerIncrStepSizeDownLink Class 3
Description : Increment step size for downlink power control. This is applicable to BSC 3000 only. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the bsc object instance is unlocked. This attribute can only be modified if the bts object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 30] dB powerControl 4 DP

0565CO01 - The attribute powerIncrStepSizeDL must verify:

1RxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSizeDL <= uRxLevDLP Release : V14

powerRedStepSize Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Step for reducing MS or BTS txpwr when using step by step algorithm. This is applicable to BSC 12000HC only. [2, 4] dB powerControl 2 dB DP uRxLevDLP - powerRedStepSize lRxLevDLP. uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSize lRxLevULP.

[M]: [M]:

Notes :

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard "step by step" power control algorithm. This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

412

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

powerRedStepSizeDownLink Class 3
Description : Decrement step size for downlink power control. This is applicable to BSC 3000 only. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the bsc object instance is unlocked. This attribute can only be modified if the bts object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 8] dB powerControl 2 DP

0567CO01 - The attribute powerRedStepSizeDL must verify:

uRxLevDLP - powerRedStepSizeDL >= 1RxLevDLP Release : Note : V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

powerRedStepSizeUpLink Class 3
Description : Decrement step size for uplink power control. This is applicable to BSC 3000 only. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the bsc object instance is unlocked. This attribute can only be modified if the bts object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [2 to 30] dB powerControl 2 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

413

Checks :

0568CO01-The attribute powerRedStepSizeUL must verify:

uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSizeUL >= 1RxLevULP Release : Note : V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

powerUplink (algorithm Used) Class 2


Description : Power gain in the MS-to-BTS direction used by the speech processing algorithm in a TCB. This parameter is a component of the algorithm Used attribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [-15 to +15] dB transcoderBoard 0 DP V8

preemptionAuthor Class 3
Description : Value range : Defines the preemption management [forbidden, authorizedWithRelease, authorizedForcedHO] signallingPoint forbidden ASCI (GSM-R V12) DP V12 authorizedWithRelease and authorizedForcedHO options are not available.

Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note :

preemptionConfiguration Class 3
Description : Object : Type : Release : This parameter is composed of preemptionAuthor and eMLPPThreshold. Refer to these entries in the Dictionary. signallingPoint DP V14

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

414

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

pRequestedCodec Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the "p" parameter in the AMR "(n,p) voting" mechanism. This attribute can only be modified if the handOverControl object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Int [12 to 192] in steps of 12 handOverControl 48 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

preSynchroTimingAdvance Class 3
Description : Pre-defined timing advance used in a pre-synchronized handover procedure between the serving cell and this neighbor cell. This value of timing advance is used when the parameter "synchronized" is set to "pre sync HO with timing advance". The operator defines a predefined timing advance when a phase 2 MS goes from the serving cell to this neighbor cell approximately at the same place (railway, highway). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [0 to 35] (km) adjacentCellHandOver Refer to parameter synchronized DP V10

priority Class 2
Description : Priority level of a TDMA frame. Among the set of TDMA frames attached to the cell, only the one carrying the cell BCCH must be allotted the highest priority [0]. At least <minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames related to a cell (refer to this entry in the Dictionary) must be successfully configured for the cell to be working. They include the TDMA frame carrying the cell BCCH and those with the highest priority(ies).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

415

If this is true when the cell is brought into service, then, the cell will be working. Otherwise, its operationalState will be "disabled" and its availabilityStatus will be "{dependency}". Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 255] transceiver DP

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

privateMmsOmuRef
Description : Pointer to the associated omu object instance for private MMS, NULL for shared-mirrored MMS. This attribute cannot be modified. It is set by the MD-R at MMS creation. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : [0 to 2147483646] mms AR 1209 - V13.1 DP V13

privilegedCell Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Allows to segregate cells according to their mapping on Agprs PCM. [no, yes] bts no Optimized Agprs cell allocation DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

416

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Release : Notes :

V16

This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000 only. This parameter is of class 3. No modification of its value is taken into account by the BSC immediately and it does not trigger any re-configuration of Agprs.

probable cause
Description : To select messages according to the numerical value of the ISO probableCause field. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. The following table indicates the messages displayed according to the probable cause. Alarm type Communications Probable cause Execution failure of a MD request by the BSC Call establishment error Communication protocol error Communication subsystem failure Corrupt data Degraded signal DTE-DCE interface error LAN error Local node transmission error Loss of frame Loss of signal Receive failure Remote node transmission error Transmit failure Value 62 4 5 6 9 12 13 25 27 28 29 40 42 54

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

417

Alarm type Environmental

Probable cause External alarm loop Enclosure door open Fire detected Heating, ventilation, or cooling system Material supply exhausted

Value 58 14 18 21 30 60 15 21 23 24 30 35 37 40 41 49 50 52 54 55 59 61 2 7 9 17 32 39 46 47 48 49

Equipment

Equipment absent Equipment malfunction Heating, ventilation, or cooling system problem Input/output device error Input device error Material supply exhausted Power problem Processor problem Receive failure Receiver failure Storage capacity problem Temperature unacceptable Timing problem Transmit failure Transmitter failure

ProcessingError

Cause of restart or switchover No response Application subsystem failure Configuration or customization error Corrupt data File error Out of memory Queue size exceeded Software error Software program abnormally terminated Software program error Storage capacity problem

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

418

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Alarm type

Probable cause Underlying resource unavailable Version mismatch

Value 56 57 63 8 34 39 43 44 45 51

QualityOfService

Shutdown Congestion Performance degraded Queue size exceeded Resource at or nearing capacity Response time excessive Retransmission rate excessive Threshold crossed

Value range : Object : Type :

[1 to 150] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

processor identity
Description : This parameter is composed of the bsc equipment name and the equipment processor number parameters. Refer to these entries in the Dictionary. mdWarning (create) DP V11 During the command "create mdWarning", the operator can define either "equipment identity" or "processor identity", but not both.

Object : Type : Release : Note :

processorLoadSupConf Class 3
Description : Note : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Threshold used in the load control algorithm by the BSC. This parameter is significant only for BSC 12000HC. [0] The only accepted value is 0 (outOfRangeError). bsc BSC overload management (FM877 - V12) 0 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

419

Remark :

C1400, C1506, C1803, C1834, and C1835 counters allow to check BSC overload problems.

This parameter was used in the previous releases only to control the load on the BSC CPU boards. Note : This parameter is valid for BSC 12000HC only.

pwciHrequave Class 3
Description : Cell Tiering Mode parameter. This is the averaging window size for powerControl. This attribute allows to configure the cellTieringConfigura tion parameter at bts level. Note : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Description: Cell Tiering mode must be activated. [0 to 16] handOverControl 8 DP The MS searches for UMTS cells if level is above or below the threshold when the serving BCCH frequency is part of the BA_List 0:"<-98 dBm" 1: < -94 dBm 2: < -90 dBm 3: < -86 dBm 4: < -82 dBm 5: < -78 dBm 6: < -74 dBm 7: always 8: > -78 dBm 9: > -74 dBm 10: > -70 dBm 11: > -66 dBm 12: > -62 dBm 13: > -58 dBm "values different from "always" and "never" are useful only if serving BCCH is part of BA_List in SI5" QsearchC > -XX dBm: the HO towards the UMTS can be done only if the RxLev from the serving cell is above -XX. QsearchC < -XX dBm: the HO towards the UMTS can be done only if the RxLev from the serving cell is below -XX.

Value range:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

420

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

14: > -54 dBm 15: never Object: Default value: Type: Checks: Release: Notes: V17 This parameter is available only for BSC 3000. handoverControl 15 DP

R
rACHLoadAveragingSlots Class 3
Description : The number of RACH access on which RACH measurements are performed (2000 is the only value accepted). [0 to 65535] bts DP

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Remark :

[C/M]:

The only value accepted by the system is "2000".

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

radChanSelIntThreshold Class 3
Description : Maximum interference level on free radio channels, below which are arranged in groups of priority allocation. The information is used to allocate free channels with the lowest interference level. The levels depend on the thresholdInterference attribute value defined for the cell. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. The BSC distributes free radio channels among two groups:

The first group contains the list of channels with a measured averaged interference level equal to or lower than the defined level. The second group contains the list of channels with a measured averaged interference level higher than the

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

421

defined level, and recently released channels for which no measurement is available. Four resource pools are defined for each SDCCH or TCH type of channel:

low interference level radio channels that are authorized to hop low interference level radio channels not authorized to hop high interference level radio channels authorized to hop high interference level radio channels not authorized to hop Channels are allocated cyclically inside each pool.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

[0 to 4] handOverControl 1 DP V8

radioAllocator Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Radio allocator type used in the cell. [voice + dataCircuit, voice + dataCircuit + packetData] bts GPRS (TF1121 - V12)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

422

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Default value : Type : Release :

voice + dataCircuit DP V12

radioLinkTimeOut Class 3
Description : Maximum value of the counter (S) associated with the downlink SACCH messages, beyond which the radio link is cut off. It is lower than or equal to t3109. Mobiles comply with system operating conditions when the counter (S) is assigned a value lower than or equal to t3109. If the receiver is unable to decode a downlink SACCH message (BTS-to-MS direction), the counter is decreased by 1. If the message is received, the counter is increased by 2. When the counter goes down to zero, the radio link is declared "faulty".

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

[4 to 64, by steps of 4] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs) bts 20 SACCH DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

R radioLinkTimeOut t3109.

423

Checks : Notes :

[C/M]:

The rlf1 attribute serves the same goal on the uplink. The system does not check consistent values of the two attributes.

radioSiteMask Class 2
Description : Definition of the PCM time slots used by a site. TS n is masked when bit n is set to 0, it is used when bit n is set to 1 in the binary field. The radio site mask is immediately displayed in the hexadecimal field just below. The radio site mask is set using the hexadecimal field as well as the binary field. The mask defines the time slots used in each PCM link allotted to a given radio site. Time slot allocation is managed by the BSC; a time slot available on a site is used either by a radio time slot for traffic purposes or by a LAPD link which does not carry the link with the site BCF for signaling. A PCM E1 link carries thirty-two time slots. TS 0 (least significant bit) is always masked since it cannot be used. The radioSiteMask of a site using E1 links is as follows:

radioSiteMask = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx0 ||||| TS31 23 15 7 TS0 A PCM T1 link carries twenty-four time slots. The radioSiteMask of a site using T1 links is as follows: radioSiteMask = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX || TS24 TS1 Sites that do not share PCM links are assigned the full set. In a BTS chain, the scheduled time slots of each radio site must be allotted in ascending order (TS1, TS2, TS3, etc.), beginning with the site closest to the BSC. Refer to the pcmTimeSlotNumber entry. Value range : Object : [32-bit mask] btsSiteManager

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

424

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Checks :

DP

[C/M]: [C/M]: [C/M]:

TS 0 cannot be assigned. If PCM T1 links are used, TSs 25 to 31 cannot be assigned. The radioSiteMask of all sites sharing a same PCM link (drop and insert connections) are dissociated. The scheduled time slot of the radio site (pcmTimeSlotNumber) is masked [0] since it cannot be used.

[M]:

radioSiteMaskOffset Class 2
Description : The radioSiteMaskOffset parameter provides the de-correlation of the radio site mask used on BTS site with the radio site mask used on BSC side (refer to the radioSiteMask entry). On BTS side, the mask is the result of a calculation using the radioSiteMask value and the radioSiteMaskOffset parameter. According to the radioSiteMaskOffset value (named s below), the radio site mask on BTS side (RSMbts) is:

s = 0: RSMbts and RSMbsc are identical s > 0: If RSMbsc is [TSm..TSn] then RSMbts is [TSm-s..TSn-s] s < 0: If RSMbsc is [TSm..TSn] then RSMbts is [TSm+|s|..TSn+|s|]

Example 1: if RSMbsc is [TS31..TS28] and s = +26, then RSMbts is [TS05..TS02]. Example 2: if RSMbsc is [TS05..TS02] and s = -19, then RSMbts is [TS24..TS21]. Value range : Object : Type : Int [-28 to 28] btsSiteManager DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

425

Checks :

[C/M]:

If the radioSiteMaskOffset is positive, the lowest TS number of the resultant BTS radio site mask must be greater than or equal to 1. If the radioSiteMaskOffset is negative, the greatest TS number of the resultant BTS radio site mask must be lower than or equal to 31 (case of an E1 PCM) or to 24 (case of a T1 PCM). the radioSiteMaskOffset is in the range [-28, +28] (case of an E1 PCM) or in the range [-21, +21] (case of a T1 PCM).

[C/M]:

Release :

[C/M]:

V14

radioSiteName
Description : Reference name of a multiple site object on the OMC-R. It begins with a letter and is case sensitive. The name of a multiple site can be used in all MMI commands to reference the multiple site on the OMC-R. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Note : [30 characters max.] multiple site DP

[C/M]:

The name of a multiple site is unique to the OMC-R.

Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited. The valid symbols are: - letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z - digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 - minus sign: - undescore: _ - space

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

426

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

radResSupBusyTimer Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Maximum time that SDCCH or TCH can be continuously occupied without generating an alarm. [1 to 18] hours bsc 3 DP V8

radResSupervision Class 3
Description : Indicates whether radio resources are controlled at the cell level (both busy resources and free resources). When no control is performed, no alarm related to the use or non use of an SDCCH or TCH is generated. Refer to the radResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer entries in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Notes : [true / false] bts true DP

radResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer can be set automatically by the OMC-R calendar function. The activation of this feature does not induce any signaling or CPU overload. Only the BSS-OMC-R link is overloaded at a rate of radResSupBusyTimer or radResSupFreeTimer.

Release :

V8

radResSupFreeTimer Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Maximum time an SDCCH or TCH can be continuously free without generating an alarm. [1 to 18] hours bsc 18 DP V8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

427

range
Description : Value range : Object : Notes : Time period chosen over which the counter values are read. [5 min / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min / 2 hours] report template

The authorized values for OFS observation type are 60 min, 2 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours. The authorized values for ORT and Performance Monitor observation types are 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min, and 2 hours.

Type :

DP

reception time
Description : To select messages received at that time. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

record reference
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of a user call as recorded in a call monitoring data file. [0 to 63] Call monitoring - Display (SDO) DP

[A]: [A]:

It is in the range [0 to 63]. This parameter is mandatory when a user call report (Events option) or a radio measurements report (Measurements option) is requested. It can be undefined when a synthesis report (Synthesis option) is requested. In that case, a summary of all user recorded calls is displayed.

[A]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

428

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

redundantPcmNumber
Description : Number of the redundant PCM link defined on BSC end. This dynamic attribute is displayed provided the btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attribute value is "true". Value range : Object : Type : Remark : [0 to 47] btsSiteManager DD A redundant link is not normally used for traffic or signalling connections.

redundantPcmPresence Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Presence of a redundant PCM link on a radio site [true / false] btsSiteManager DP

[M]:

If the attribute value is "true", the object bscSitePcmList attribute includes two items, one identifies the PCM active link, and the other identifies the PCM redundant link.

refPeriod
Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Reference counting period when a counter is involved. [0 to 345600] seconds alarm criteria To define if a counter is associated with the criteria. DP

refPeriod
Description : Reference counting period used by the "excessiveAnomal yRate" function. This attribute is not used by the detection "outOfRangeCo unter" function. In that case, the reference period is set as follows:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

429

For cumulative counters, the thresholds define total values not to be reached during a one minute reference period. For load or value counters, the thresholds define maximum or minimum average values not to be reached during a 1 minute reference period, except for the PCM unavailability counters for which they define total values not to be reached during the reference observation period.

The BSS observation counter threshold crossing detection mechanism is described in NTP < 07 >. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 2147483646] minutes mdWarning if detectionFunction = "excessiveAnomalyRate" DP

relatedSoftwares
Description : This attribute identifies the list of software identified separately. This list represents the units of software ready for equipment use. This attribute is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. This attribute is not modified by the Manager. [0 to 10] executableSoftware DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

relay
Description : Identifier of a BSS alarm relay which activates an external alarm loop when the counter of immediate unacknowledged alarms shows a nonzero value for one of the BSSs assigned to the relay. BSS relays transfer the state of the associated BSS immediate action alarm counters to remote sites. A BSS relay is associated with several BSCs. Conversely, a BSC is simultaneously assigned to several relays. Value range : Object : [4 to 64] relay

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

430

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Reminder :

Id OMC-R relays are used to transfer the state of system alarm counters to remote sites and are not managed by users.

remoteSsuState
Description : Value range : State of the remote subsystem (BSSAP) [inService / outOfService]


Object : Type : DD

inService ................. outOfService .....

The MSC BSSAP service is working for the BSC. The MSC BSSAP service is not working.

signallingLinkSet

repetition rate
Description : Periodicity of short message broadcasting. Each concerned BSC repeatedly sends the selected short message to the BTSs covering the selected cells at the repetition rate defined by the user. Each BTS repeatedly broadcasts the short message to all mobiles under its control, using the same repetition rate. Value range : Object : Type : [2 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 16 min. / 32 min.] short message - Start broadcast DP

report range
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Time period over which the counter values are read. [5 min. / 15 min. / 30 min. / 60 min. / 2 hours / 6 hours / 12 hours / 24 hours] report template DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

431

Notes :

The authorized values for OFS observation type are 60 min., 2 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours. The authorized values for ORT and Performance Monitor observation types are 5 min., 15 min., 30 min., 60 min., and 2 hours.

Release :

V11

report template
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Identifier of the report template object defined with regard to the bsc object. [30 characters max.] report template DP V11

report type
Description : Value range : A type of observation report. [single observed instance / several observed instance]


Object : Type : Release :

single observed instance ........

several observed counters on a single object single counter observed on several objects

several observed instance .......

report template DP V11

reportObjLevel
Description : Level of the report to edit. Fill in only when editing a permanent bsc report. Examples: "bsc = all" or "bsc = 1 & bsc = 2". Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [adjacentCellHandOver / bsc / bts / transceiverZone / hardwareTcu3G] Display xxx report DP

[A]:

If specific objects are entered, they all belong to the same class.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

432

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

reportTypeMeas Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Attribute reserved for future use. disabled, enabled bts DP V15

resetCircuitRepeat Class 1
Description : Whether the RESET CIRCUIT message is repeated on bssMap19 timer elapse if the acknowledgment message was not received from the MSC (Phase II compliance). [false] signallingPoint False DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type Checks : Remark : Release :

[C/M]:

The only accepted value is "false".

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning. V8

retransDuration Class 2
Description : Maximum number of occurrences of a same paging sub-group separating the first and last transmissions of the same paging message. [0 to 22] bts 10 DP retransDuration (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) x nbOfRepeat

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Release :

V8

[C/M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

433

retry on error
Description : Whether commands are rerun when the system detects an application error. This parameter has priority over the on error parameter. When its value is "True", the error command is rerun; when it is "False", the on error parameter is analyzed. The errors involved, the time between reruns, and the maximum number of reruns are defined in static configuration data. Value range : Object : Type : [true / false] (default is False) commandFile - Run DP

rlf1 Class 2
Description : Value to compute the initial and maximum value of the (CT) counter used in the BTS radio link control algorithm. The FP (FrameProcessor) in the BTS runs the following algorithm to monitor the uplink SACCHs (MS-to-BTS direction):

The FP sets the CT counter to 0 at channel activation. On each correct SACCH, the following occurs: if (CT=0) then CT=4*rlf1 + 4 else CT=min (4*rlf1 + 4, CT+rlf2)

On each incorrect SACCH, the following occurs: CT = max(0, CT-rlf3) When CT reaches 0, a CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message is sent to the BSC every T3115 until a Deactivate SACCH or RF CHANNEL RELEASE message is received.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

[0 to 15] bts 4 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

434

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Notes :

The radioLinkTimeOut attribute serves the same goal on the downlink. The system does not check that the values of the two attributes are consistent.

Release :

V8

rlf2 Class 2
Description : Step value by which the (CT) counter is increased by the radio link control algorithm when an uplink SACCH is decoded. Refer to the rlf1 entry. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [1 to 4] SACCH frames bts 2 DP V8

rlf3 Class 2
Description : Step value by which the (CT) counter is decreased by the radio link control algorithm when an uplink SACCH is not decoded. Refer to the rlf1 entry. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [1 to 4] SACCH frames bts 1 DP V8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

435

rLCPolling Class 3
Description : Value range : Configuring the polling frequency for DL TBF. [0 to 2]


Object : Default value : Type : Release : bts 0 DP

0 selects the original polling frequency of 240 ms and deactivates this feature 1 selects a polling frequency which doubles the original to every 120 ms (during the first 240 ms, then adding one opportunity to setup a UL TBF) 2 selects a polling frequency which quadruples the original to every 60 ms (during the first 240 ms, then adding three opportunities to setup a UL TBF)

V15

rmpConfState
Description : Value range : State of radio measurement processing in the TDMA frame. [configured / not configured / not significant]

configured: The CURRENT CELL PARAMETER, NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER (and EXTENDED NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER when more than sixteen defined neighbor cells) messages have been acknowledged by the BTS. not configured: The messages have not been acknowledged by the BTS. If a CURRENT CELL PARAMETER message is not acknowledged, the notification 1258 "Non response during the configuration of the remote L1M" is issued. If a NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER or EXTENDED NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER message is not acknowledged, the notification 1259 "Negative acknowledgement of a distant L1M command" is issued. not significant: The BTS has not sent the messages to the BSC (either the TDMA frame is not working or SYS INFO was not acknowledged).

Object : Type :

transceiver DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

436

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

rndAccTimAdvThreshold Class 3
Description : MS-to-BTS distance beyond which mobile access requests to a cell are refused. It defines the maximum timing advance value accepted. The effective timing advance value is broadcast in the CHANNEL REQUIRED message sent by the BTS to the BSC. If it is above the user defined threshold, the BSC ignores the request. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 135] km (non-extended mode) [2 to 120] km (extended mode) bts 35 DP

[C/M]: [C/M]:

The maximum distance is 35 km if the bts object extended cell attribute is "false". The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is "true".

Release : Note :

V8 The number of access requests that are refused for that reason is accounted by the BSC (permanent bsc observation counter 1161/6) and fed back to the OMC-R.

routingArea Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Release : Note : GPRS Cell Global Identifier (locationAreaCode + cellIdentity + routingArea). [0 to 255] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 0 V12 A Routing Area is necessarily included in a Location Area.

rowPosition
Description : Value range : Position number which identifies the position within a row. String from 1 to 4 characters

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

437

Object : Type :

transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardware transcoder 3G DP

runCallClear Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Number of "Measurement Results" messages received before the call clearing algorithm in a cell is triggered. [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs) bts 16

runHandOver Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Number of "Measurement Results" messages received before the handover algorithm in a cell is triggered. [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs) bts 1 DP

runPwrControl Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Number of "Measurement Results" messages received before the power control algorithm in a cell is triggered. [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs) bts 4 DP

rxLevAccessMin Class 3
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles for being granted access to a cell. The information is sent to MS prior to registering. As an example, a threshold level of -104 dB corresponds to an acceptable BER of approximately 10-2 (minimum recommended value). Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

438

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Default value : Type :

bts less than -110 dB DP

rxLevDLIH Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Maximum interference level in BTS-to-MS direction, beyond which an intra-cell handover may be triggered. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB handOverControl -85 to -84 dB DP

rxLevDLPBGT Class 3
Description : Downlink signal strength threshold above which handovers for power budget are inhibited. In certain issues, the operator may prevent handover for power budget in case of the received level in the serving cell is good enough that a handover does not improve the situation. This parameter shall be set such as rxLevDLPBGT lRxLevDLH. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Notes : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB adjacentCellHandOver more than -48 DP

This parameter is disabled by setting it to the default value: more than -48 (dB). This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture. It is disabled for DCU2 architecture.

Release : Description: Value range: Object:

V11 Downlink signal strength threshold above which handovers to UTRAN for power budget are inhibited <-110 ... >-48 dBm adjacentCellUTRAN

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

R 63 (on MOD), >-48 (on MMI) DP

439

Default value: Type: Checks: Release: Note:

V17 This parameter is available only for BSC 3000.

rxLevHreqave Class 3
Description : Number of signal strength measurements performed on a serving cell, used to compute arithmetic strength averages in handover and power control algorithms. [1 to 10] number of measurement results handOverControl 8 DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

rxLevHreqaveBeg Class3
Description : Number of measurement reports on current cell for signal strength arithmetic average for early handover mechanism. Refer to the rxLevHreqave entry in the Dictionary. This parameter is coupled with hoMarginBeg and rxNC ellHreqaveBeg use. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Notes : [1 to 10] handOverControl 2 DP

This parameter is set such as rxLevHreqaveBeg rxLevHreqave. This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

Release :

V11

rxLevHreqt Class 3
Description : Number of arithmetic averages taken into account to compute the weighted average signal strength in handover and power control algorithms. Each is calculated from rxLevHreqave signal strength measurements on a serving cell. [1 to 16]

Value range :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

440

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

handOverControl 1 DP

[C/M]:

It is equal to the number of weights in rxLevWtsList (refer to this entry in the Dictionary).

rxLevMinCell Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Description: Value range: Object: Default value: Type: Checks: Release: Note: V17 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000. Minimum signal strength level received by MS for being granted access to a neighbor cell. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB adjacentCellHandOver -95 to -94 dB (GSM 900 or 850), -93 to -92 (GSM 1800 or 1900) DP Minimum signal strength level received by MS for being granted access to an UMTS neighbour cell <-110...>-48 adjacentCellUTRAN 63 (on MOD), >-48 (on MMI) DP

rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg Class 3
Description : Number of measurement results used in early handover algorithm to compute the average neighboring signal strength. Refer to the rxNCellHreqave entry in this dictionary. This parameter is coupled with hoMarginBeg and rxLevHreqaveBeg use. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Int [1 to 10] handoverControl 2 DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

441

rxLevRxQualDistributionActivation Class 3
Description : Defines the frequency of RxLev and RxQual distribution. This is not used in this version. Only values 0, 1 and 2 are valid. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. Value range : Object : Type : Release : Int [0 to 128] bts DP V14

rxLevULIH Class 3
Description : Value range : The maximum interference level in MS-to-BTS direction, beyond which an intra-cell handover is triggered. [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48] dB, without Uplink Mapping Feature activated. [less than -117, ... , more than -42] dB, when the Uplink Mapping Feature is used. handOverControl Uplink Mapping (TF 876) -85 to -84 dB DP

Object : Feature : Default value : Type :

rxLevWtsList Class 3
Description : Values of weights used for signal strength weighed average. The L1M function first calculates rxLevHreqave arithmetic averages from raw measurements, and balances rxLevHreqt averages among those with the weights defined in rxLevWtsList. Each arithmetic average is partnered with one weight in the list. Weight/average associations are set in the order the weights are recorded. The latest computed arithmetic average is always partnered with the first weight in the list.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

442

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Super-average = [ (averagei x weighti)] / 100, i = 1 to rxLevHreqt Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 100] % handOverControl 100 DP

[M]:

The number of weights in the list is equal to rxLevHreqt and their sum equals 100.

rxNCellHreqave Class 3
Description : Number of measurement results used in the Power Budget algorithm to compute the average neighboring signal strength. No weighted average is computed for this category of measurement. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [1 to 10] number of measurement results handOverControl 8 DP

rxQualAveBeg Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the number of quality measures used by the power control mechanism, in case of hopping TS or fast MS. This attribute is modified if the handOverControl object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [1 to 10] handOverControl 2 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

443

rxQualDLIH Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction for intracell handover, above which a handover may be triggered. [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % handOverControl 1.6 to 3.2 % DP V12

rxQualHreqave Class 3
Description : Number of arithmetic averages taken into account to compute the weighted average bit error rate in handover and power control algorithms. Each is calculated from rxQualHreqave bit error rate (BER) measurements on a radio link. [1 to 16] handOverControl 1 DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

rxQualHreqt Class 3
Description : Number of bit error rate measurements performed on a radio link, used to compute arithmetic bit error rate averages in handover and power control algorithms. [1 to 10] number of measurement results handOverControl 8 DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

rxQualULIH Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction for intracell handover, above which a handover may be triggered. [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % handOverControl 1.6 to 3.2 % DP V14

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

444

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

rxQualThresholdDistribution Class 3
Description : RxQual threshold for taking into account measurements in RxLev and Interf matrix distributions. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. Value range : [inferiorTo02 / between02and04 / between04and08 / between08and16 / between16and32 / between32and64 / between64and128 / superiorTo128] bts DP V14

Object : Type : Release :

rxQualWtsList Class 3
Description : List of up to sixteen weights used to compute the average bit error rate on a radio link. The L1M function calculates rxQualHreqave arithmetic averages from raw measurements, and balances rxQualHreqt averages among those with the weights defined in rxQualWtsList. Each arithmetic average is partnered with one weight in the list. Weight/average associations are set in the order the weights are recorded. The latest computed arithmetic average is always partnered with the first weight in the list. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [0 to 100] % handOverControl 100 DP

S
sIkAssociatedTmuPortPosition
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Gives the TMU and port number bearing the SS7 signalling. [tmuPos / hardwareSlotPositionNMC / portNumber] signallingLink DD V14

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

445

sIkATerResource
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Gives the Ater PCM and TS bearing SS7 signalling. pcmRef [0 to 167] ts [1 to 31] signallingLink DD V14

sacchPowerOffset Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Default value : Notes : Release : Describes the power offset that applies to SACCH frames [0..6] dB; step = 2 bts DP Tx power offset for signalling channels 0 (no power offset) This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher. V16

sacchPowerOffsetSelection Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Default value : Note : Release : Describes the CODEC selection for applying a power offset on SACCH messages. [NULL / FR 4.75 kbps / FR 5.9 and lower / FR 6.7 and lower] bts DP Tx power offset for signalling channels NULL (no power offset for SACCH) This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher. V16

sapi
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions : The Service Access Point Indicator defining the type of LAPD link use. [RSL / OML] lapdLink DP

[M]:

This attribute cannot be modified.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

446

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

scannerId
Description : Value range : The identifier of the mdScanner object describing the observation. [0 to 2147483646] "0" identifies the OMC-R permanent manager observation. For a BSS observation or the OMC-R agent permanent observation, this parameter must match the reference number of an mdScanner object. Object : Type Checks : Display xxx report DP

[A]:

If the request concerns a BSS observation or the OMC-R agent permanent observation, the related mdScanner object is created.

scannerId
Description : Value range : The identifier of the mdScanner object describing the observation. [0 to 2147483646] "0" identifies the OMC-R permanent manager observation. For a BSS observation or the OMC-R agent permanent observation, this parameter must match the reference number of an mdScanner object. Object : Type : Checks : List observation messages DP

[A]:

If the request concerns a BSS observation or the OMC-R agent permanent observation, the related mdScanner object is created.

sCCPRoutingIndicator
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Description: Value range: Object: Indicated which route the SCCP takes. [international/national] signallingPoint DP This parameter is only available for BSC 3000. Scrambling code of the UMTS cell 0...511 adjacentCellUTRAN

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

447

Default value: Type: Release:

0 DP V17

[C/M/D]:

fDDARFCN or scramblingCode cant be changed if Interference Matrix feature is activated on the bts

Note:

This parameter is only available for the BSC 3000.

securedLoopActivation Class 2
Description : Whether the secured loop is disabled or enabled. When enabled and in case of a network transmission failure, signalling links are automatically switched to the redundant path and ongoing calls are kept up. [Disabled, Enabled] btsSiteManager Disabled GSM-R V15. Customer specific DP V15

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release :

selfAdaptActivation Class 3
Description : This attribute specifies if the automatic handover adaptation mechanism is enabled/disabled. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute is modified only if the bts object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [Enabled/Disabled] bts Disabled DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

448

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

selfTuningObs Class 3
Description : BTS mode sending the PwCI distribution on the Abis interface. This attribute allows the configuration of CellTieringConfiguration at BTS level. CellTiering mode must be activated. [pwCi distribution not sent, pwCi distribution sent after gathering, one pwCi distribution sent per hour] handOverControl Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12) DP V12 PWCI distribution may be gathered and sent onto the Abis interface independently of tiering activation.

Note : Value range :

Object : Feature : Type : Release : Note :

sequenceNumber
Description : Object : Type : Tracing the record identification number. traceFileReady DP

serial number
Description : Three fields (geographical scope, message code, update number) identify a particular message from the source and type indicated by the Message Identifier are altered every time a given Message Identifier is changed. [geographical scope, message code, update number]

Value range :

geographical scope ..

[immediate cell wide normal PLMN wide normal location area wide normal cell wide] [0 to 1023]

message code .....

differentiate messages from same source and type (same Message Identifier)

update number ....

[0 to 15]

differentiate older and newer versions of the same message Object : Type : short message - Display broadcast characteristics DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

449

serial number
Description : Three fields (geographical scope, message code, update number) identify a particular message from the source and type indicated by the Message Identifier are altered every time a given Message Identifier is changed. [geographical scope, message code, update number]

Value range :

geographical scope ..

[immediate cell wide normal PLMN wide normal location area wide normal cell wide] [0 to 1023]

message code .....

differentiate messages from same source and type (same Message Identifier)

update number ....

[0 to 15]

differentiate older and newer versions of the same message Object : Type : short message - Display broadcast characteristics DP

servingFactorOffset Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the offset linked to the serving cell, used to decrease the HO margin, in some specific cases. This attribute is only modified if the handOverControl object instance is unlocked. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [-63 to 63] dB handOverControl -2 DP V14 This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

session context saving mode


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Session context saving mode. [automatic when logout / on user request] user profile DP V10

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

450

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

sGSNRelease Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : The parameter is set to 0 when the SGSN supports rel98 or older and set to 1 when the SGSN supports rel99. "SGSN is rel98 or older" (SGSNR = 0) "SGSN is rel99 onwards" (SGSNR = 1) bts 0 EDGE Traffic Management (20231) DP V15

shelfNumber
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : Indicates the position of a module in a shelf. [0 to 1] atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm, AR 1209 - V13.1 - V13.1 DD V13

short message
Description : An identifier (name) of a short message on the OMC-R. A message name identifies the short message on the OMC-R; it is not relayed to the BSC during broadcasting. It can be changed by the Rename command (see the new name entry in the Dictionary). Setting a short message characteristics does not affect the current broadcast of the message. The change will be effective when a new broadcast command is launched. A short message broadcasting is identified on the OMC-R by a unique serial number assigned by the system when broadcasting is initiated (refer to this entry in the Dictionary). Value range : Object : Type : [case sensitive, 20 characters max.] short message Id

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

451

Checks :

C]: [M]: [D]:

The name of a short message is unique to the OMC-R. The short message is created. The short message is not being broadcast.

sicBoardsInt
Description : The state of the BSC chain SIC boards. Each board is identified by its type [SICD / SICX / CCS7], along a number in the type. [working / fault]

Value range :

working .......... fault ............

The SIC board was correctly initialized. An error has been detected on the board.

The number of SICX, SICD, and CCS7 boards in a BSC depends on its hardware architecture. Refer to the bscType entry in the Dictionary. Object : Type Note : bsc - Display chain information DD This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

signallingLinkId
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of a signallingLink object defined with regard to a signallingLinkSet object. [0 to 2147483646] signallingLink Id

[C]:

The number of signaling links controlled by a BSC is limited to maxSigLPerSigLS (static configuration data). The maximum number of signallingLink objects for Lb interface is 2. The referenced pcmCircuit object (pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interface and depends on the same transcoder object (transcoderId) as the signallingLink object.

[C]: [C/M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

452

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[C/M]:

The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitId and timeSlotNumber) is not already assigned to a signallingLink or xtp object dependent on the same transcoder object, and the time slot is not mapped on the TS used by the OMC channel on the Ater interface. If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3 (pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary). If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the signallingLink object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No mdScanner object refers to the signallingLink object (no observation is running on that object).

[C/M]:

[C/D]: [D]: [D]:

[D]:

signallingLinkResState
Value range : [blocked / inhibited / inhibitedLocal / inhibitedDistant / inhibitedL ocalDistant / inhibitedBlocked / notInhibitedNotBlocked]


Object : Type :

inhibited ............. inhibitedLocal ......... inhibitedDistant ........ inhibitedLocalDistant .. blocked ..............

state enforced by a user SetInhibit command state enforced by a user state enforced by the MSC state enforced by a user and the MSC state enforced by the MSC following a loss of dialogue between MTP2 and MTP3

signallingLink DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

453

signallingLinkSet
Description : Identifier of a signallingLinkSet object describing the route (not the linkset) between the BSC and MSC, or the BSC and SMLC. [0 to 1] where signallingLinkSet[0] represents A interface and signallingLinkSet[1] represents Lb interface. signallingLinkSet Id

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C]: [C]: [D]:

The signallingLinkSet object is not created for the parent signallingPoint object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. The application database of the related BSC has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

signallingPoint
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of a signallingPoint object describing a BSC-MSC link on the BSC. [0 to 2147483646] signallingPoint Id

[C]: [C]: [C]: [D]:

The signallingPoint object is not created for the parent bsc object. The software object related to the parent bsc object is created. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. The application database of the related BSC has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

signallingPointType
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Whether the BSC-MSC link acts as an STP (Signaling Transfer Point). [STP / noSTP (only value accepted)] signallingPoint noSTP DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

454

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks : Remark :

[C/M]:

The only value accepted by the system is "noSTP".

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

signallingTerminalNumber Class 2
Description : The number of the CCS7 port used by an SS7 channel in the BSC = 2 x number of the mother CCS7 board [0 to 1] + port number [0 to 1]. [0 to 1] (BSC 6000 type 1-2), [0 to 3] (BSC 6000 types 3-5), [0 to 5] (BSC 12000HC). signallingLink DP

Value range :

Object : Type : Checks :

[C/M]:

The port number is one-of-a-kind to the BSC (a CCS7 port controls one and only one SS7 link).

Note :

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

sigPowerOverboost Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Reserved for future use. [0dB to 1.6dB] bts 0dB DP

[C/M]:

sigPowerOverboost cannot be set to 1.6 because bsPowerControl is not enabled or bts is not a BTS18000 or is not operating in 1900 MHz frequency band

Release :

V16

sigPReserved2 Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : This attribute is reserved for future use. [-32768 to 32767] signallingPoint 0 DP V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

455

site
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Name that identifies the site. String [1 to 16 characters] transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardware transcoder 3G DD

siteGsmFctList Class 2
Description : Value range : List of up to 14 elements identifying the GSM functions configured in a site BCF. [entityMgt / download / siteMgt / abisSig / abisTraf / rfTrans / rfRecep / cellMgt / fhMgt / tdmaMgt / tsMgt / gsmTime / car0Fil / freqMgt] Routing mode The routing mode of the messages handled by the GSM functions, enabling the Abis interface to identify the GSM entity to which the messages are sent, and the maximum response time of each GSM function summarized in the following table. GSM function Routing mode Without centralized O&M GSM entity Management downloading site Management abis Signalling Management abis Traffic Management radio frequency Transmission radio frequency Reception cell Management frequency hopping Management relative tei relative tei relative tei bcf bcf bcf not implemented bcf relative tei With ce ntralized O&M bcf relative tei bcf bcf bcf bcf none bcf bcf 10 secon ds 32 secon ds 120 seco nds 120 seco nds 120 seco nds 120 seco nds 0 second 120 seco nds 30 secon ds Response time

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

456

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

GSM function

Routing mode Without centralized O&M With ce ntralized O&M bcf bcf none none bcf

Response time

tdma Management time slot Management gsmTime carrier 0 Filling frequency Management

relative tei relative tei not implemented not implemented bcf

30 secon ds 30 secon ds 0 second 0 second 120 seco nds

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

btsSiteManager site Mgt/abisSig DP

[C/M]: [C/M]: [C/M]: [M]:

Each function occurs once in the list. The "entityMgt", "download", "tdmaMgt", and "tsMgt" functions are included in the list. The "freqMgt" function is only allowed for a BTS using cavity coupling. The "fhMgt" function is included in the list if bts objects dependent on the btsSiteManager object are authorized to hop (btsIsHopping).

Notes :

The GSM functions whose routing mode is "not implemented" must not be included in the list. See the preceding table. The GSM entities managing these GSM functions are BCF and TRX.

siteName
Description : Reference name of a radio site on the OMC-R. It begins with a letter and is case sensitive. The name of a site can be used in all MMI commands to reference the site on the OMC-R. Value range : Object : Type : [30 characters max.] btsSiteManager DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

457

Checks : Note :

[C/M]:

The name of a site is unique to the OMC-R.

Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited. The valid symbols are:


slc Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z. digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. minus sign: undescore: _ space:

Code of an SS7 channel. It is identical on BSC and MSC ends. [0 to 15] signallingLink DP

[C/M]:

The code of an SS7 link is one-of-a-kind to the BSC.

small to large zone HO priority Class 3


Description : External priority of inter-zone handovers from the inner zone to the outer zone in a concentric cell. This attribute is defined if the associated bts object describes a concentric cell. Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Release : [0 to 17] handOverControl 17 To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric cell. DP V9

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

458

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

smoke detector Class 2


Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "smoke detector" in S4000 Oudoor, S4000 Smart or S8000 Outdoor. [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager DP V9

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

smsCB Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether broadcasting of short messages in unacknowledged mode is authorized in a cell. [used / unused] bts used DP

[M]:

The attribute value is "used" if the channelType of one of the channel objects dependent on the bts object is "bcchSdcch4CBCH" or "sdcch8CBCH" .

Remark :

Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of short messages are managed by two separate OMC-R functions. When a short message broadcast is started, the presence of a CBCH in the channelType of a channel object dependent on a concerned bts object is checked. However, the SMS-CB function is not aware of changes made to that attribute. Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from the configuration will stop any short message broadcast in the concerned cell without the SMS-CB function knowing.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

459

software
Description : Identifier of a software object. The software object class allows users to manage the software releases of bsc objects (BSC), btsSiteManager objects (BCF), transceiverEquipment objects (TRX), and transcoderBoard objects (TCB). Software objects are managed by the OMC-R "Software Management" function. The software objects have four attributes: sWVersion BackUp, sWVersionFallback, sWVersionNew, and sWVersionRunning. They are managed by the system according to the following user commands: Download, Activate new version, and Return to previous version. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] software Id Checks common to all software objects:

[C]: [C]: [D]:

The software object is not created for the parent managed object. The sWVersionRunning attribute is defined (nonzero value). If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

Additional checks performed on the software-bsc object:

[C]: [C/D]: [D]:

The sWVersionRunning attribute matches the bscType of the bsc object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the bsc object is locked. All objects dependent on the bsc object are deleted.

Additional checks performed on the software-btsSiteMan ager object:

[C/D]:

If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. All objects dependent on the btsSiteManager object are deleted.

[D]:

Additional check performed on the software-transceiverE quipment object:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

460

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[C/D]:

If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent bts object is locked, and the transceiverEquipment object is locked.

Additional check performed on the software-transcoderB oard object:

[C/D]:

If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoderBoard object is locked.

softwareLabel
Description : This attribute is a comment about the related software. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. [1 to 80] executableSoftware DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

source indicator
Description : Select messages according to the source of the operation. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [resource operation / management operation / unknown] Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

specific problems
Description : Selecting messages according to a (cause, fault number) pair. This parameter allows selection of a fault number with one or more associated causes. Refer to these entries in the Dictionary. Do not fill in if this criterion is not selected. Object : Type : Alarm and notification logs - Filter DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

461

speechMode Class 3
Description : List of the speech algorithms associated with channel use modes in the cell. The "full rate" value refers to the standard algorithm. The "enhanced full rate" value only applies when all the TCUs linked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards (refer to the version entry in the Dictionary). Value range : list of [algoid] where: algoid id : full rate, enhanced, full rate, AMR full rate, AMR half rate bts [full rate, enhanced full rate] DP

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[C/M]: [C/M]:

The "full rate" value is mandatory; it must be defined in the list. The "enhanced full rate" value is defined in the list if at least one of the TCUs linked to the BSC is equipped with TCB2 boards.

Release :

V8

speechMode Class 3
Description : List of the speech algorithms associated with channel use modes on the A interface. The "full rate" value refers to the standard algorithm. The "enhanced full rate" value only applies when all the TCUs linked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards. Value range : list of [algoid] where: algoid id: full rate, enhanced, full rate, AMR full rate, AMR half rate signallingPoint [full rate, enhanced full rate] DP

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[C/M]:

The "full rate" value is mandatory; it must be defined in the list.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

462

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Release : V8

[C/M]:

The "enhanced full rate" value is defined in the list if at least one of the TCUs linked to the BSC is equipped with TCB2 boards.

speechOnHoppingTs Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : This attribute is reserved for future use. [true, false] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) false DP V12

speechVersionAsscomp Class 1
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Whether the "Speech version" element is used or not in the ASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance). [false / true] signallingPoint true DP V12

speechVersionHoperf Class 1
Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used or not in the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase II compliance). [false / true] signallingPoint

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release :

DP V12

speechVersionHoreq Class 1
Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages (Phase II compliance). [false / true]

Value range :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

463

Object : Default value : Type : Release :

signallingPoint true DP V12

speechVersionHorqd Class 1
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Whether the "Speech version" element is used or not in the HANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase II compliance). [false / true] signallingPoint true DP V12

standard indicator AdjC Class 3


Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Note : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working. [gsm / extended gsm / dcs 1800 / pcs 1900 / R gsm / gsm850 / gsmdcs / dcsgsm / pcsgsm850 / gsm850pcs] adjacentCellHandover Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12) gsm DP V10 "gsmdcs" and "dcsgsm" are only available for S8000 DRX transceiver architecture.

standard indicator AdjC Class 3


Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Note : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working. [gsm / extended gsm / dcs 1800 / pcs 1900 / R gsm / gsm850 / gsmdcs / dcsgsm / pcsgsm850 / gsm850pcs] adjacentCellReselection gsm Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12) DP V10 "gsmdcs" and "dcsgsm" are only available for S8000 DRX transceiver architecture.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

464

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

standardIndicator Class 2
Description : Type of network in which the cell is working. From the value given to this attribute, the OMC-R determines the network frequency band and the frequencies used by all radio entities (cells and radio time slots) in the related site. Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs1800 / pcs1900 / R gsm / gsmdcs / dcsgsm / gsm 850 / gsm850pcs / pcsgsm850 / gsm450 / gsm480 / gsm750 / egsmdcs / dcsegsm] bts Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12) DP GSM 900 network (gsm) The GSM 900 frequency band is 2*25 MHz wide and includes 124 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [1 to 124], which are 200 kHz apart:

Object : Feature : Type : Note :

Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 890 to 915 MHz Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 935 to 960 MHz

A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency:

f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [1 to 124]

For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:

f2 = f1 + 45 MHz

EXTENDED GSM network (extended gsm) The extended GSM frequency band is 2*35 MHz wide and includes 174 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to 124] and [975 to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart:

Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 880 to 915 MHz Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 925 to 960 MHz

A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

465

f1 = 880.2 + 0.2x(N - 975) MHz where N = [975 to 1023] f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124]

For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:

Note :

f2 = f1 + 45 MHz

The extended GSM frequency band defined above is the definition of the ETSI. GSM-R network (R gsm) The GSM-R frequency band is 2*39 MHz wide and includes 194 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to 124] and [955 to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart:

Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 876 to 915 MHz Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 921 to 960 MHz

A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency:

f1 = 876.2 + 0.2x(N - 955) MHz where N = [955 to 1023] f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124]

For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:

Note :

f2 = f1 + 45 MHz

The GSM-R frequency band defined hereabove is the definition of the ETSI. GSM 1800 network (dcs1800) The GSM 1800 frequency band is 2*75 MHz wide and includes 374 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [512 to 885], which are 200 kHz apart:

Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 1710 to 1785 MHz Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 1805 to 1880 MHz

A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

466

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

f1 = 1710.2 + 0.2x(N - 512) MHz where N = [512 to 885]

For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:

f2 = f1 + 95 MHz

GSM 1900 network (pcs1900) The GSM 1900 frequency band is 2*60 MHz wide and includes 299 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [512 to 810], which are 200 kHz apart:

Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 1850 to 1910 MHz Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 1930 to 1990 MHz

A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency:

f1 = 1850.2 + 0.2x(N - 512) MHz where N = [512 to 810]

For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:

f2 = f1 + 80 MHz

GSM 900 - GSM 1800 network (gsmdcs) The primary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900 Network paragraph). The secondary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800 Network paragraph). GSM 1800 - GSM 900 network (dcsgsm) The primary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800 Network paragraph). The secondary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900 Network paragraph).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

467

Note :

"gsmdcs" and "dcsgsm" are only available for S8000 DRX transceiver architecture. GSM 850 The GSM 850 frequency band is 2*25 MHz wide and includes 124 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [128 to 251],

Uplink direction = 824 to 849 MHz Downlink direction = 869 to 894 MHz

A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency:

f1 = 824.2 + 0.2x(N - 128) MHz where N = [128 to 251]

For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:

Release : V9

f2 = f1 + 45 MHz

standbyStatus
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type Release : ISO State [hotStandby / coldStandby / providingService] atmRm, cem, iem, lsaRc, omu, sw8kRm, trm, AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

start date
Description : The date the first data is recorded in the log (default is the current date). Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>] System session log - Filter DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

468

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

start time
Description : Absolute time of first job run (default is the current date and time). Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. If date matches the current date, set time to a value at least one minute after the current time. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>,<time>] job DP

start time
Description : Start of system log reading on the requested start date (default is 00:00). Time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not selected. Value range : Object : Type : [<time>] System session log - Filter DP

startAlarmFilter
Description : Condition for triggering an alarm when no counter is involved. The following fields can be combined in the logical expression: Parameter administrativeState availabilityStatus bsc equipment name bsc model cause btsSiteManager model bts equipment name equipment processor number Notification type state change state change alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm Operators = = = = <=> = = <=>

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

469

Parameter faultNumber operationalState perceived severity postMortem usageState

Notification type alarm state change alarm alarm state change

Operators <=> = = = =

The following logical operators can be used in the logical expression:

& stands for the logical AND. | stands for the logical OR. ! stands for the logical NOT.

The "postMortem" field can take two values, either "before BSC restart" or "after BSC restart". They have the following meaning:

before BSC restart means that the notification issued by the BSC was received by the OMC-R agent without the BSC having restarted (nominal conditions). after BSC restart means that the notification was issued by the BSC, then, the BSC was restarted before the OMC-R agent received the notification. These notifications do not trigger alarms.

Value range : Object : Condition : Type :

[logical expression] alarm criteria To define if no counter is associated to the criterion. DP

startAlarmThreshold
Description : The maximum counting value in the reference period when a start-of-alarm message is sent. The value must be checked by users. This attribute defines a maximum value read at the end of the defined refPeriod. It must be greater than endAlarmThreshold.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

470

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Threshold changes are effective when the OMC-R is restarted. Value range : Object : Type : [0.00 to 2147483646] mdWarning if detectionFunction = "excessiveAnomalyRate" DP

startAlarmThreshold
Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresholdHigh) counting value in the reference period, below/above which a start of "lower threshold/upper threshold" alarm message is sent. The value must be checked by users. If thesholdType = "thresholdLow", this attribute defines a minimum value for a one minute reference period (or the counter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters), below which a start of "lower threshold" alarm message is sent. It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold "low". If thesholdType = "thresholdHigh", this attribute defines a maximum value for a one minute reference period (or the counter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters), above which a start of "upper threshold" alarm message is sent. It must be greater than startAlarmThreshold "high". Threshold changes are effective when the OMC-R is restarted. Value range : Object : Type : Remark : [0.00 to 2147483646] mdWarning if detectionFunction = "outOfRangeCounter" DP


startCounterThreshold
Description : Value range : Object :

The threshold limits depend on the associated counter. The BSS counter threshold crossing detection mechanism is described in NTP < 07 >.

Minimum counting threshold when a counter is involved. [0 to 100] alarm criteria

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

471

Condition : Type :

To define when a counter is associated with the criterion. DP

startTime
Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Date and time the files were restored on the OMC-R agent disks. [<date> <time>] log - Display This attribute is significant and displayed only when the log object describes a log restored on the OMC-R agent disks. DP

startTime
Description : Date and time the temporary observation started. This information is provided by the system and indicates the exact time when the observation counters are collected for the first time. Value range : Object : Type : [<date> <time>] mdScanner - Display DI

stopTime
Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Date and time the OMC-R agent will purge the restored files. [<date>, <time>] log - Display This attribute is significant and displayed only when the log object describes a log restored on the OMC-R agent disks. DP

stopTime
Description : Date and time the temporary observation will stop. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>,<time>] mdScanner - Create temporary observation DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

472

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks :

[C]: [C]: [M]:

stopTime - startTime > mdGranularityPeriod minutes stopTime - startTime < 1440 minutes (24 hours) This attribute cannot be modified. Stop the observation if necessary by deleting the mdScanner object and restart it by creating a new mdScanner object with the appropriate attributes.

Restrictions :

subChanId
Description : AGCH subchannel number: Do not fill in when the channelType of the radio time slot is "tchFull" or "mainBCCH". [0 to 7] when channelType = "sDCCH" or "sdch8CBCH", [0 to 3] otherwise channel - Set channel state DP

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Reminder :

[A]:

The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects are unlocked.

A BCCH or a CBCH cannot be blocked.

subject
Description : Identifier (name) of a user message in the OMC-R. It is displayed in the "Inter-user message manager" window of the message addressees and allows them to identify the message before reading. Value range : Object : Type : [40 characters max.] user message Id

suffix
Description : Optional string of characters to add to the name of the call monitoring data files when saved in the OMC-R. When a suffix is defined, a call monitoring data file transferred to the OMC-R by running the Transfer command is saved under the name "SDO_CM_BSCnnn_<suffix>.yyyymmdd ", where

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

473

"nnn" identifies the BSC hosting the data file (if bsc = 5, then nnn is read "005") and "yyyymmdd" is the file saving date. See to NTP < 07 >. Value range : Object : Type [10 characters max.] Call monitoring - Transfer (SDO) DP

summary
Description : Object : Type : Text explaining the goal of the command file. commandFile DP

suspendResumeActivation Class 3
Description : Value range : Default value : Object : Feature : Type : Notes : Enables or disables the Suspend/Resume feature. [disabled / enabled]. The recommended value is "enabled". disabled bsc GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume DP

When disabled: The Suspend is still performed. The Resume is performed through the Routing Area Update message. The new value does not apply to ongoing calls. It applies to new calls only.

Release :

V15

supportingTransceiverEquipment
Description : Identifier of the TRX associated with the TDMA frame by the BSC. This dynamic attribute allows the user to know the TDMA-TRX/DRX association established by the BSC. It is displayed provided the transceiver object operationalState is "enabled". Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. If the TRX/DRX is declared faulty because of a frequency loss, the system takes the following actions:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

474

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

attempt to reconfigure the associated TDMA frame on the redundant TRX/DRX if there is no redundant TRX/DRX, reconfiguration of the TDMA frame on another TRX/DRX if its priority is higher than the priority of the TDMA frame currently configured

If the associated TDMA frame cannot be re-configured for some reason, all frames that were using the frequency lost by the TRX/DRX will be disturbed. Value range : Object : Type : Remark : [0 to 2147483646] transceiver DD Only BTSs using cavity coupling manage dynamic reconfiguration of hopping frequencies.

sw8kRm
Description : Value range : Object : Type : The 8k Subrate Timeswitch Ressource Module, which adds sub-track switching capability to the Interface Node. [0 to 2147483646] sw8kRm Id

sw8kRmId
Description : Identifier of the sw8kRm object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU 3000. [0 to 2147483646] sw8kRm DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

sWVersionBackUp
Description : Reference number of the backup software release. It is identical to sWVersionRunning. Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary. Value range : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

475

Object : Type :

software DP

sWVersionFallBack
Description : Reference number of the previous software release. It is updated following a version change command. Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary. This attribute is undefined when the object is created. As a result of an Activate new version command, the system updates the sWVersionFallBack attribute with the reference of the software release previously running in the related BSS entity. As a result of a Return to previous version command, the system sets the sWVersionFallBack attribute undefined. Value range : Object : Type : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] software DP

sWVersionNew
Description : Reference number of the new software release. It is updated following a download or version change command. Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary. This attribute is undefined when the object is created. As a result of an Activate new version command, the system sets the sWVersionNew attribute undefined. As a result of a Download or Return to previous version command, the system updates the sWVersionNew attribute with the reference of the software release downloaded or that was presently running in the related BSS entity. Value range : Object : Type : [9 to 12] String software DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

476

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

sWVersionRunning Class 2
Description : Reference number of the software release currently running. It is defined by the user at object creation time and is updated following version change commands. This parameter identifies the type and version of the software currently running in the related BSS entity. Check the BSS delivery descriptor file to fill it in when creating the software object. As a result of an Activate new version or Return to previous version command, the system updates the sWVersionRunning attribute with the reference of the software release newly activated in the related BSS entity. For more information on the reference number formats for each type of BSS entity driven by software, refer to the "delivery" entry in this Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : String from 9 to 12 characters software DP

[C]: [C]:

The attribute is defined (nonzero value). The first three letters of the reference number match the type of the managed object related to the software object. For a software-bsc object, the version number complies with the bscType of the parent bsc object.

[C]:

synchronized Class 3
Description : Value range : Whether the neighbor cell and the associated serving cell are synchronous, and is attached to the same BTS. [not synchronized cells / synchronized cells / pre sync HO with timing advance / pre sync HO, default timing advance]

"not synchronized cells": the neighbor cell and the serving cell are not attached to the same BTS "synchronized cells": the neighbor cell and the serving cell are attached to the same BTS "pre sync HO with timing advance": the handover procedure between the neighbor cell and the serving cell is pre-synchronized with the GSM Real Time

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

477

Difference between the neighbor cell and the serving cell in the "HANDOVER COMMAND" message "pre sync HO, default timing advance": a pre-defined timing advance is used in the pre-synchronized handover procedure between the serving cell and the neighbor cell. Refer to "preSynchroTimingAdvance" parameter. adjacentCellHandOver not synchronized cells DP

Object : Default value : Type :

synchronizing PCM
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Synchronizing PCM choice (on Ater interface). [synchro mic 0, synchro mic 2, synchro mic 4, synchro mic 6, synchro internal clock] bsc DD V10

syntheticFaultNumber
Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Checks : A synthetic fault number assigned to the alarm when a counter is involved. [39500 to 39549] alarm criteria To define when a counter is associated to the criterion. DP

[C/M]:

The number is in the range [39500 to 39549].

systemInfoType2 Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Reserved for future use. disabled/enabled bts DP V15

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

478

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

system state
Description : Value range : The state of the configurable BSC boards and state of the traffic to the MSC. The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order:


Object : Type : DD

active - passive link [opened / closed] bsc ............. [simplex / duplex] chain ............ [active / passive] chain ............ [ready / not ready] ECI DDTI ALA SWM initialization [allowed / not allowed] reset MSCL ....... [in progress / not in progress] other chain ....... [ready / not ready]

bsc - Display chain information

T
t3101 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the immediate assignment procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on transmission of CHANNEL ACTIVATION by the BSC and canceled on receipt of ESTABLISH INDICATION sent by the BTS. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [1 to 255] seconds bts 3 DP

t3103 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the handover procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND by the BSC and canceled on receipt of either HANDOVER COMPLETE or HANDOVER FAILURE sent by the MS (intra-bss handover), or CLEAR COMMAND sent by the MSC (inter-bss handover). At expiry of T3103, the channel is released. Value range : [2 to 255] seconds (t3103 < bssMapT8)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

479

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

bts 5 seconds DP

[C/M]:

t3103 < bssMapT8 (attribute of the parent bsc object)

t3107 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the assignment command procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on transmission of ASSIGN COMMAND by the BSC and canceled on receipt of either ASSIGN COMPLETE or ASSIGN FAILURE sent by MS. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [2 to 255] seconds bts 10 seconds DP

t3109 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the SACCH deactivation procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on receipt of DEACTIVATE SACCH ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the BTS and canceled on receipt of RELEASE INDICATION sent by the BTS. If the timer expires, an RF CHANNEL RELEASE message is sent to the BTS and an RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACK is expected. Mobiles comply with system operating conditions when the counter (S) associated with SACCH messages is assigned a value below or equal to t3109. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 255] seconds (t3109 radioLinkTimeout) bts 12 seconds DP t3109 radioLinkTimeout

[C/M]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

480

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

t3111 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the radio resource clearing procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on receipt of RELEASE INDICATION sent by the BTS. On elapse, the BSC sends RF CHANNEL RELEASE. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [1 to 255] seconds bts 2 seconds (1 second in a GSM-R context) DP

t3122 Class 3
Description : Minimum time that mobiles must wait before issuing a channel allocation request when an immediate assignment has failed. [0 to 255] seconds bts 10 seconds DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type :

t3168 Class 3
Description : This timer is used at the MS side to define when to stop waiting for the PUAS message after sending either a PRR message or a Channel Request in a PDAN. [0 (500 ms) 1 (1000 ms) 2 (1500 ms) 3 (2000 ms) 4 (2500 ms) 5 (3000 ms) 6 (3500 ms) 7 (4000 ms)] bts 0 DP V14

Value range :

Object : Default value : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

481

t3172 Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Value of the timer started by the mobile on reception of a Packet Access Reject message (in seconds) [1 to 255] bts GPRS (SV407 - V12) 20 DP V12

t3192 Class 3
Description : Wait for DL TBF release after reception of the final block. This timer is used on the MS side to define when the MS received all the RLC data blocks. When the timer expires, the MS releases the resources associated with the TBF and begins to monitor its paging group (DRX mode). [0 (500 ms) 1 (1000 ms) 2 (1500 ms) 3 (0 ms) 4 (80 ms) 5 (120 ms) 6 (160 ms) 7 (200 ms)] bts DP 0 V14

Value range :

Object : Type : Default value : Release :

target Bda
Description : Target BDA for the On-line reset command See NTP < 130 >. Value range : [running / new / old]

"running" for "BDA Edition" reset on-line (i.e. basic BDA change without prototype BDA change) "new" or "old" for "BDA Version" reset on line (i.e. BSC upgrades with prototype BDA change)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

482

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Type : Release :

bsc - On-line reset DP V11

tcu2gGroup
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : This parameter gives the TCU 2G core process id Only 4 values are possible: [34, 35 36 and 37] Tcu2G DD V16

teiBtsSiteManager Class 2
Description : TEI address of the site BCF in the LAPD protocol. In a BTS chain, the TEI addresses must be allocated in ascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.), beginning with the BTS closest to the BSC. In a BTS loop configuration, the TEI addresses must be allocated in ascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.), beginning with the BTS directly linked to the BSC that uses DTI board no.0 for the Abis link input. The following TEI values 3, 7, 11, 15, and 19 are forbidden when T1 PCMs on Abis interface are used. The relationship between internal E1 PCM TSs (DTI, PCMI or CPCMI) or BSC (DDTI) and external PCM TSs is the following:

E1 T1 E1 T1

1 1

2 2 18 14

3 3

5 4

6 5

7 6

9 7 25

10 8 26 20

11 9 27 21

12

13 10

14 11 30 23

15 12 31 24

16

17 13

19 20 21 22 23 24 15 16 17 18 19

28

29 22

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

483

E1 PCM TSs 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not mapped onto T1 PCM TSs. The scheduled or "rendez-vous" TSs (=teiBtsSiteManager +1) cannot be defined on these internal E1 PCM TSs Value range : Depending on the BTS type, the value range is:


Object : Type : Checks : DP

[0 to 9] for a BTS 18000 [0 to 13] for an S12000 [0 to 15] for all other BTSs

btsSiteManager

[C/M]:

The number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPD channel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). Values 3, 7, 11 and 15 are forbidden in T1 mode.

[C/M]:

teiLapdLink
Description : TEI address of the LAPD link in the LAPD protocol. It is updated by the OMC-R agent according to the TEI address allotted by the user to the entity (BCF, TRX/DRX, TCU) using the LAPD link. [0 to 127] lapdLink - Display DP

Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions :

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

teiTransceiverEqpt Class 2
Description : Value range : TEI address of the TRX/DRX in the LAPD protocol. The value range is:


Object : Type : DP

[14 to 55], case of an S12000 [14 to 79], case of a BTS 18000 and a BSC 3000 [14 to 65], case of a BTS 18000 and a BSC 12000HC [16 to 63], in other cases

transceiverEquipment

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

484

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Checks :

[C/M]:

The number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPD channel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). The TEI address is not assigned to another transceiverEquipment object dependent on the same bts object. HPRM does not support following TEIs: 14, 17, 18, 21, 22, 25, 34, 37, 42, 45, 50, 53, 64, 67, 70, 73, 76, 79 No mdScanner object refers to the transceiverEquipment object (no observation is running on the TRX/DRX or the parent cell). The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent bts object and the transceiverEquipment object are locked.

[C/M]:

[C/M]:

[M]:

[M]:

teiTranscoder Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : TEI address of the TCU in the LAPD protocol. [0 to 126] transcoder DP

[C/M]:

BSC 2g: The TEI address is not assigned to another transcoder object dependent on the same bsc object. Bsc 3000: No check. The TEI address is not used by BSC 3000.

temporaryOffset Class 3
Description :

[C/M]:

0 teiTranscoder 126

Negative offset applied during Penalty Time for re-selecting a cell (C2 criterion). This negative offset is applied during the entire penaltyTime duration and allows to prevent speeding mobiles from selecting the cell. Refer to the cellReselectOffset entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value :

[0 to 70, by steps of 10] dB bts AR 264 70

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

485

Type : Release :

DP V8

terminal name
Description : Name of a terminal as defined in its profile (default is the logged-in users terminal). Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Note : [case sensitive] System session log - Filter DP

[A]:

The terminal is known to the OMC-R.

Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL object names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

terminal profile
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier (name) of an OMC-R terminal [case sensitive, 1 character min.] terminal profile Id

[C]: [M/D]:

The name of a terminal is unique to the OMC-R. The terminal profile object is created.

text
Description : Comment to display before running the next command The Echo : text = blah blah blah command can be inserted anywhere in a command file, and as many times as necessary. The text is displayed as it is in session logs when the command file is run. Value range : Object : Type : [unlimited number of characters] commandFile - Echo command DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

486

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

text
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Contents of a short message. It is broadcast as it is. [93 characters max] short message DP

text
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Contents of a user message. It is sent as it is. [unlimited number of characters] user message DP

tFH or RWM Class 2


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "microwave terminal" in 4000 Outdoor. [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager DP V9

tGMMKeepAlive Class 3
Description : Value range : Configures the GMM Keep Alive mechanism. [0..64]


Object : Feature : Type : Release : bts

0: the feature is disabled (the same Keep Alive timer is used for data and GMM procedures) [1..63] (1 unit = 100 ms): enables the feature and sets the GMM Keep Alive timer duration. The recommended value is 5 64: the Keep Alive mechanism is disabled for GMM procedures

23038 - Disabling TBF Keep Alive DP V15

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

487

thresholdCCCHLoadIndication Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Remark : Threshold used by the BTS to inform the BSC about a CCCH congestion (104 is the only value accepted) [0 to 2147483646] dB bts DP

[C/M]:

The only value accepted by the system is "104".

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

thresholdInterference Class 2
Description : List of four thresholds defined in ascending order, used to sort idle channels on the basis of measured interference levels. This attribute, together with the averagingPeriod attribute, allows to manage interferences in a radio cell. The classification is used by the radio resource allocator. The interference processing algorithm for a cell is as follows:

For each idle radio channel, the BTS permanently measures the signal strength level RXLEV. When averagingPeriod "Measurement results" messages have been received, the L1M function in the BTS calculates interference level averages, sorts the idle channels according to the five defined interference levels (Level 0 corresponds to the lowest interference level), and sends the information to the BSC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

488

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

The BSC tallies the interference levels and, if the temporary "interference" observation is running for the bsc object, sends the channelIdleLevelMax and channelIdleLevelEch counters every <mdGranularityPeriod> minutes to the OMC-R agent.

Refer also to C1619 permanent observation counters. Value range : Object : Default value: Type : Checks : [-128 to 0] dB handOverControl -100 -90 -80 -70 DP

[C/M]: [M]:

The thresholds are defined in ascending order. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

thresholdType
Description : Type of thresholds managed The startAlarmThreshold and endAlarmThreshold attribute values, which trigger permanent BSS observation counter threshold overflow messages, depend on the type of thresholds managed by the mdWarning object. Refer to these entries in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : [thresholdLow / thresholdHigh] mdWarning if detectionFunction = "outOfRangeCounter" DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

489

timeBetweenHOConfiguration Class 3
Description : Whether the hoPingpongTimeRejection timer can be used in a BSS when processing handovers. Refer to bts object bts time between HO configuration and adjacentCellHandOver object hoPingpongTimeReject ion attributes in this Dictionary of Parameters. Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : [used / not used] bsc General protection against ping-pong handovers (TF821 - V12) used DP V9

timerGcchNotif Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : Time between two FACCH notifications. [0 to 65535] seconds signallingPoint 2 (recommended) ASCI DP GSM-R V15

timerPeriodicUpdateMS Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Remark : Time between two location update requests. [0 to 255] 1/10th of hour. "0" means that no periodic location update is requested. bts 60 DP The operator must be aware that the input of low values for this attribute causes an important traffic load during the location update procedures. For instance, entering the value "1" for this attribute leads to that all Mobiles will execute an update of their LAC every 6 minutes.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

490

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

timeSlotNumber
Description : PCM time slot used by a LAPD link Since all radio sites house a switching facility, the BSC can directly map the LAPD link onto a PCM time slot. Value range : Object : Note : Note : Type : Remark : [1 to 24] (GSM 1900/850 networks), [1 to 31] (other networks). lapdLink This parameter is only available for lapdLink OML and lapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC. This parameter is only available for the lapdLink OML object on BSC 3000. DD The LAPD link with a radio site BCF always uses TSn = pcmTimeSlotNumber (radio site scheduled time slot). Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

timeSlotNumber Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : PCM time slot used by an SS7 channel on the A interface [1 to 24] signallingLink DP

[C/M]:

The time slot is not already assigned on the A interface to a signallingLink or xtp object dependent on the same bsc object and is not mapped on the TS used by the OMC channel on the Ater interface. If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3 (pcmCircuitId), the timeslot is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary).

[C/M]:

timeSlotNumber
Description : Value range : Object : PCM time slot used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface [1 to 24] (GSM 1900/850 networks), [1 to 31] (other networks). xtp

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

491

Type : Checks :

DP

[C]:

The time slot is identical to the mscPcmTsNu mber component of the xtp object cic attribute (refer to this entry in the Dictionary). The time slot is not already assigned on the A interface to an xtp or signallingLink object dependent on the same bsc object, and is not mapped on the TS used by the OMC channel on the Ater interface. If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3 (pcmCircuitId), the timeslot is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary). This attribute cannot be modified due to its relationship with the mscPcmTsNumber component of the cic attribute.

[C]:

[C]:

Restrictions :

[M]:

tmu
Description : The Traffic Management Unit, which is responsible for managing the GSM protocol : it provides processing power for Call Processing, terminates GSM protocol (A, Abis and Ater interfaces), terminates low level GSM protocol (LAPD and SS7). [0 to 2147483646] tmu Id V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

tmuId
Description : Identifier of the tmu object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU 3000. [0 to 2147483646] tmu DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

492

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

tnOffset class 2
Description : Allows to specify and control Timeslot Number (TN) difference between BTSs in case of network synchronization by GPS. Refer also to the fnOffset entry in this dictionary. Object : Value range : Type : Feature : Default value : Release : Note : btsSiteManager [0..7] DP Network Synchronization 0 V15 This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

tNwExtUtbf Class 3
Description : Inactive period timer. Maximum time of inactivity during which the UL radio resources are not released. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Release : [0..255] (1 unit = 20 ms) bts 0 DP Extended UL TBF

[M]:

tNwExtUtbf value must be greater than or equal to tUsfExt value.

V15

traceConstraintList
Description : List of logical expressions that allow to filter the information to display. The following filter criteria are used: [bsPower / bssTraceType / bssTraceTypeUsed / establishmentCause / hoCauseClass / hoClauseValue / hoRrResult / mobileId / msPower / pcm / recordingEntity / rrCause / timeSlot / timingAdvance / tracedBts / traceRecId / traceReferenceC rit / trStartTime / trStopTime. / trxIdrxId].

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

493

See NTP < 130> . Object : Type : Trace data display DP

traceControl
Description : Identifier of a traceControl object defined with regard to the md object. It describes the Call tracing function of a BSC. A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock the object to start collecting data in the related BSC. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] traceControl Id

[C]: [C/M/D]: [C/M/D]:

The traceControl object is not created for the md object. The application database of the related BSC is not being built. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the BSS/OMC-R link is established and no audit is in-progress in the BSC. The traceControl object is created.

Release : V8

[M/D]:

traceDayAccessed
Description : Date of data recording Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Setting this parameter limits the display to trace data recorded on the specified day. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>] Trace data display DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

494

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

traceFileName
Description : Name of a call tracing or call path tracing data file on the OMC-R agent disks. The naming rules are described in NTP < 07 >. traceFileReadyRecord DP Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL object names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

Object : Type : Note :

traceInfoRequested
Description : List of information to display with respect to the type. See NTP < 129 >. Value range : [abisInfo / bsicInfo / bssMapInfo / btsInfo / ChannelInfo / cicInfo / dtapInfo / handoverInfo / manufacturerExtInfo A and Ater / manufacturerExtInfo Abis / measurementInfo / msClassmarkInfo / powerControlIn fo / rrInfo / timingAdvanceInfo / trxInfo / txPowerInfo] Trace data display DP

Object : Type :

traceReference
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Reference of a trace message received from the MSC. [0 to 63] (Phase I) [0 to 65535] (Phase II) traceFileReadyRecord DP

traffic PCM allocation priority Class 2


Description : Allocation priority of a TDMA frame on the covering site PCMs. This attribute is used in case of Abis PCM reconfiguration. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 255] transceiver DP

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

495

Release : Note :

V9 "0" should be assigned to the highest priority frame(s).

transceiver
Description : Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a bts object. It defines the parent transceiver object. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 15] channel Id

[C]:

The transceiver object is created.

transceiver
Description : Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a bts object. By definition, a TDMA frame is related to a cell, a cell is related to a site, and a site is related to a BSC. In all MMI commands, a transceiver object can be referred to by the sequence "siteName.cellName.transceiver", where siteName and cellName respectively identify the covering site and cell by name. A TDMA frame is brought in service on the network at creation time. It is working when the parent bts object is unlocked. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 15] transceiver Id

[C]:

The maximum number of TDMA frames controlled by a BSC depends on its type and hardware version, as shown in the following table:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

496

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

BSC 12000HC T1 120 T2 120 T3 160 T4 160 T5 160

Checks :

[C]:

The number of TDMA frames per cell is limited to 16, regardless of the type of the BSC that controls the cell. The handOverControl and powerControl objects are created for the parent bts object. If the parent bts object describes a concentric cell, two transceiverZone objects are created for that object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

[C]: [C]:

[C/D]:

[D]:

transceiver equipment class Class 2


Description : The class of a TRX/DRX. The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximum transmission power. The attribute possible values have the following meaning:

Class 1 corresponds to GSM 900 class 5 or GSM 1800/1900 class 1 (20W to 40W transmitters). Class 2 corresponds to GSM 900 class 6 which is not supported or GSM 1800/1900 class 2 (10W to 20W transmitters).

When dual band (concentric cell) is used, the class of a TRX/DRX enables to distinguish which DRX and which TDMA are used in the outer zone or inner zone. Class 1 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency band carrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 0 (large/outer zone).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

497

Class 2 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency band not carrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 1 (small/inner zone). When cell is dualband, transceiver equipment class values differentiate TRX of the main band (for which the class value is 1) and TRX of the extended band (for which the class value is 2). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 (reserved) / 1 / 2] transceiverEquipment DP

[M]:

Concentric cell: If the TRX/DRX is partnered with a TDMA frame, its class matches the TRX/DRX class allotted to the zone to which the TDMA frame belongs (refer to the next entry).

Release :

V9

transceiver zone Ref Class 2


Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Checks : Identifier of the transceiverZone object that defines the zone to which a TDMA frame belongs in a concentric cell. [0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)] transceiver To define if the covering cell is concentric DP

[C]: [M]:

The referenced transceiverZone object is created for the parent bts object. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked.

Release :

V9

transceiverEquipment
Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined with regard to a bts object. It defines the related transceiverEquipment object. Value range : Object : [0 to 15] software

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

498

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Checks :

Id

[C]:

The transceiverEquipment object is created.

transceiverEquipment
Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined with regard to a bts object. By definition, a TRX/DRX is related to a cell, a cell is related to a site, and a site is related to a BSC. In all MMI commands, a transceiverEquipment object can be referred to by the sequence "siteName.cellName.tr ansceiverEquipment", where siteName and cellName respectively identify the covering site and cell by name. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 15] transceiverEquipment Id

[C]:

The number of TRX/DRXs per site is limited to 24, regardless of the type of the BSC that controls the site. The number of TRX/DRXs per cell is limited to 16, regardless of the type of the BSC that controls the cell. The handOverControl and powerControl objects are created for the parent bts object. The referenced lapdLink objects (lapdLinkO MLRef and lapdLinkRSLRef) are created for the parent bsc object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent btsSiteManager and bts objects are locked, and the transceiverEquipment object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No traceControl or callPathTrace object refers to the transceiverEquipment object (the BSC Call tracing or Call path tracing function does not monitor that object).

[C]:

[C]: [C]:

[C]:

[D]:

[D]:

[D]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

499

transceiver equipment class


Description : Class of the TRX/DRXs partnered with the TDMA frames of the zone. The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximum transmission power. Refer to the previous entry. When dual band (concentric cell) is used, the class of a TRX/DRX enables to distinguish which DRX and which TDMA are used in the outer zone or inner zone. Class 1 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency band carrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 0 (large/outer zone). Class 2 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency band not carrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 1 (small/inner zone). Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions : Release : Note : [1 / 2] transceiverZone DP

V9

[M]:

This attribute cannot be modified.

The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objects that describe concentric cells.

transceiverZone
Description : Identifier of a transceiverZone object that describes the large zone or the small zone of a concentric cell. The transceiverZone objects are only significant for the bts objects that describe concentric cells. Two transceiverZone objects are created for each created concentric bts object; one describes the large or outer transmission zone, and the other describes the small or inner transmission zone. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)] transceiverZone Id

[C]:

The associated bts object is created and the transceiverZone object is not created for that object.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

500

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

[C]:

The number of transmission zones in a concentric cell equals 2. Each transceiverZone object is one-of-a -kind to the associated bts object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. The parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No transceiver object refers to the transceiverZone object.


Release : V9

[C/D]:

[M]: [D]:

[D]:

transcoder2GEqptId
Description : Identifier of the transcoder2GEqpt object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The only value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU 2G. [1 to 255] transcoder2GEqpt DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

transcoder3GEqptId
Description : Identifier of the hardware transcoder 3G object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The only value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU 3000. [0 to 0] hardware transcoder 3G DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

501

transcoder
Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bsc object. It defines the parent transcoder object. Value range : [0 to 11] (BSC 12000HC, E1 PCM network), [0 to 13] (BSC 12000HC, T1 PCM network), [0 to 33] (BSC 3000, E1 PCM network), [0 to 33] (BSC 3000, T1 PCM network) Object : Type : Checks : pcmCircuit (A interface) Id

[C]:

The transcoder object is created.

transcoder
Description : Value range : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bsc object. [0 to 11] (BSC 12000HC, E1 PCM network), [0 to 13] (BSC 12000HC, T1 PCM network), [0 to 33] (BSC 3000, E1 PCM network), [0 to 33] (BSC 3000, T1 PCM network) Object : Type : Checks : transcoder Id

[C]:

The number of remote transcoders linked to a BSC is limited to maxTranscdPerBsc (static configuration data). The software object related to the parent bsc object is created. The referenced lapdLink object (lapd LinkOMLRef) is created for the parent bsc object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoder object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

[C]: [C]:

[C]: [D]:

[D]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

502

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

transcoder
Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bsc object. It defines the parent transcoder object. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 11] (BSC 12000HC, E1 PCM network), [0 to 13] (BSC 12000HC, T1 PCM network). transcoderBoard Id

[C]:

The transcoder object is created.

transcoderAlarmList
Description : This attribute is relevant only for BSC 12000HC. Activation state of the internal alarm loops of the transcoder. The manager may either display it (in French) without previous decoding, or decode provided raw data for displaying in English. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. [KO/OK] transcoder2GEqpt DD V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

transcoderAlarmMask Class 3
Description : Configuration of external alarms in a TCU [xx]: The external alarm loop is monitored (not monitored) when bit 0 is set to 1 (0), bit 1 indicates whether operating anomalies of the TCU external clock are notified (1) or not (0) to the OMC-R. transcoder 11 DP This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Object : Default value : Type : Note :

transcoderArchitecture
Description : Indicates the TCU hardware configuration. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the BDA is not built. [tcu2G / tcu3G ]

Value range :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

503

Object : Default value : Type : Release :

transcoder

DP V13

transcoderBoard
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regard to a transcoder object. [0 to 7] (GSM 1900/850 network), [0 to 9] (other networks). transcoderBoard Id

[C]:

The number of transcoding boards housed in a TCU is limited to maxTranscdBPerTranscd (static configuration data). If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoderBoard object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

[C]: [D]:

[D]:

transcoderBoard
Description : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regard to a transcoder object. It defines the related transcoderBoard object. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 7] (GSM 1900 or GSM 850 network), [0 to 9] (other networks). software-transcoderBoard Id

[C]:

The transcoderBoard object is created.

transcoderBoardIntState
Description : Value range : TCB internal state. [working / fault]

working ..........

The board is working.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

504

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Type : DD

fault ............

An error was detected on the board.

transcoderBoard

transcoderId Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM link that carries the SS7 channel on the A interface. [0 to 33] signallingLink DP

[C/M]:

The referenced transcoder object is created and the pcmCircuit object used by the signallingLink object (pcmCircuitId) is related to that object.

transcoderId Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM link that carries the terrestrial circuit on the A interface. [0 to 33] xtp DP

[C/M]:

The referenced transcoder object is created and the pcmCircuit object used by the xtp object (pcmCircuitId) is related to that object.

transcoderIntPcmIntState
Description : Value range : State of the TCU internal PCM links. Each link is identified by a serial number n = [0 to 15]. [0 to 15] [working / fault]


Object : Type : Note : DD

working .......... fault ............

The internal PCM is working. An error was detected on the PCM link.

transcoder

This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

505

transcoderMatrix
Description : Configuration of the TCU switching matrix = mapping PCM Ater TS <=> PCM A TS. This attribute describes the relation between the TSs of the four PCM A links used by the TCU (A interface) and the TSs of the PCM Ater link used by the TCU (Ater interface). The following tables show the correspondence when PCM E1 or T1 links are used. Object : Type : Restrictions : transcoder - Display DP

[C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

PCM E1 links

TS PCM Ater 1 (LAPD channel) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

PCM A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

TS PCM A no equivalence 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

506

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

TS PCM Ater 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 -

PCM A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

TS PCM A 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28

PCM T1 links

TS PCM Ater 1 (LAPD channel) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 -

PCM A 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3

TS PCM A no equivalence 1 5 9 13 17 21 1 5 9 13 17 21 1 5 9 13 17 21 1 5 9 13 17 21 2 6 10 14 18 22 2 6 10 14 18 22 2 6 10 14 18 22 2 6 10 14 18 22 3 7 11 15 19 23 3 7 11 15 19 23 3 7 11 15 19 23 3 7 11 15 19 23 4 8 12 16 20 24 4 8 12 16 20 24 4 8 12 16 20 24 4 8 12 16 20 24

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

507

transparentSiteAttrib2 Class 2
Description : BSC 2nd class transparent attribute on bstSiteManager MO. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. Value range : Object : Type : Release : String [0 to 129] btsSiteManager DP V14

transparentTeiAttrib2 Class 2
Description : BSC transparent attribute on bts MO. Transmitted to SUP-TEI AO and then to the bts in LOAD_READY message. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. Value range : Object : Type : Release : String [0 to 27] bts DP V14

tResumeAck Class 3
Description : Timer used by the bsc waiting for an MS Resume Ack from a pcu. On timer expiry, the procedure is canceled. A TCH Release is sent to the MS, requesting this MS to send a Routing Area Update. [0..10] (1 unit = 100 ms). The recommended value is 1. 0 bsc GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume DP V15 Value 0 is considered as 1 by the BSC.

Value range : Default value : Object : Feature : Type : Release : Note :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

508

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

trm
Description : Value range : Object : Type : The Transcoding Resource Module, which is responsible for GSM vocoding of the voice channels. [0 to 2147483646] trm Id

trmArchipelagoCalls
Description : Value range : Number of calls per archipelago and per TRM. List of 3 archipelagoes. Each of them is a list [coderAlgo, maximumNumberOfCalls, currentNumberOfCalls] with: coderAlgo: fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder / ctmEnhancedFullRateCode / amrFullHalfRateCoder maxi mumNumberOfCalls: 0 to 65535 currentNumberOfCalls: 0 to 65535 trm BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement DD V16

Object : Feature : Type : Release :

trmId
Description : Identifier of the trm object class. This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU 3000. [0 to 2147483646] trm DP V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

tSCBNumber
Description : This attribute is significant only for BSC 12000HC. This attribute indicates which is the number of the TSCB (Transcoder Signalling Concentration Board) board, managing the signalling for transcoders, and the number of the BSCB (BTS signalling Concentration Board) board, managing the signalling for BTS. This board is redundant at BSC level. [0 to 13] bsc2GEqpt

Value range : Object :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

509

Type : Release :

DD V13

tSCBUse
Description : This attribute is significant only for BSC 12000HC. 1xSCB Boards Use: indicates the internal state and LAPD mapping for each created TSCB and BSCB board. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are notified to the Manager. [0 to 14] bsc2GEqpt DD V13

Value range : Object : Type : Release :

tsConfiguration
Description : Configuration of the radio TDMA frame time slots. This dynamic attribute indicates, for each time slot, the reconfiguration state, the type of logical channel supported, the frequency channel used (absoluteRFChannelNo) if the time slot does not hop, the list of frequency channels used (mobileAllocation), the maio, and the hoppingSequenceNumber if the time slot hops. When frequency hopping is used if "reconfiguration state" is "true", it means that BSC has recalculated the frequency hopping law following the loss of one or several TRX (defence of TDMA carrying the BCCH. If "reconfiguration state" is "false", it means that the TDMA configuration is the original one. When frequency hopping is not used, this boolean has no meaning and would be set to "false". Value range : Object : Type : Remark : [true / false] transceiver DD Since the time slots are reconfigured after each dynamic reconfiguration of the hopping frequencies, the data can be different from those defined by the user when creating the channel objects. V8

Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

510

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

tSuspendAck Class 3
Description : Timer used by the bsc waiting for an MS Suspend Ack message from a pcu. On timer expiry, the Suspend message is repeated. After three unsuccessful attempts, the procedure is canceled. [1..10] seconds. The recommended value is 1. 1 bsc GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume DP V15 Value 0 is considered as 1 by the BSC.

Value range : Default value : Object : Feature : Type : Release : Note :

tUsfExt Class 3
Description : Throughput optimization timer. On timer expiry, the USF allocation is optimized in order to give priority to active MSs that share the TS with the inactive MS. Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Release : [0..255] (1 unit = 20 ms) bts 0 Extended UL TBF DP

[C/M]:

tUsfExt value must be lower than or equal to tNwExtUtbf value.

V15

txPowerMaxReduction Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : Maximum transmission power level allowed in a TDMA frame (attenuation versus bsTxPowerMax) per transceiver. [0 to 30 by step of 2] dB. "0" is the only value accepted. transceiver 0 DP

[C/M]:

The only value accepted by the system is 0 dB.

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

511

type
Description : Value range : Type of data to archive or restore. [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]


Object : Type :

Fault data are stored in the "/MD/notif" partition on the OMC-R agent disks. Observation data are stored in the "/MD/obs" partition on the OMC-R agent disks. Trace data are stored in the "/MD/trace_function" partition on the OMC-R agent disks. Backup data are stored on the OMC-R agent disks. Other data files are defined in the "/MD/config" partition on the OMC-R agent disks.

md - Archive DP

type
Description : Value range : Type of data to archive or restore. [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]


Object : Type :

Fault data are restored to the "/MD/restored/notif" partition on the OMC-R agent disks. Observation data are restored to the "/MD/restored/obs" partition on the OMC-R agent disks. Trace data are restored in the "/MD/restored/trace_funct ion" partition on the OMC-R agent disks. Other data files are restored to their source directory on the OMC-R agent disks.

md - Restore DP

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

512

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

type
Description : Value range : Type of data to archive or restore. [faults / observations / trace data / backup / backup without eft / PCUOAM / other data]


Object : Type :

Fault data are stored in the "/CMN/base/save_rest" partition on the OMC-R manager disks. Observation data are stored in the "/OMC/obs" partition on the OMC-R manager disks. Trace data are stored in the "/CMN/base/save_rest" partition on the OMC-R manager. Backup data are stored on the OMC-R manager disks. Other data files are defined in the "/OMC/data" partition on the OMC-R manager disks.

omc - Archive DP

type
Description : Value range : Type of data to archive or restore. [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]


Object : Type :

Fault data are restored to the "/CMN/base/save_rest" partition on the OMC-R manager disks. Observation data are restored to the "/OMC/obs" partition on the OMC-R manager disks. Trace data are restored to the "/CMN/base/save_rest" partition on the OMC-R manager disks. Other data files are restored to their source directory "/OMC/data" on the manager disks.

omc - Restore DP

type
Description : Value range : Type of observation report. [single observed instance / several observed instance]

single observed instance .......

several observed counters on a single object

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

513

Object : Type : Release :

several observed instance .......

single counter observed on several objects

report template DP V11

type of data to be purged


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Type of the OMC data to be purged. [traceData] omc - Data purge DP V10

type of display
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Choice of the observation counter display mode. [Chart / Table / Text] report template DP V11

U
ulBepPeriod Class 2
Description : The parameter is used by BTS to derive the forgetting factor used in the UL to compute averaged MEAN-BEP and CV-BEP. [0 to 15] transceiver EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 DP V15

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter allows the operator to set the threshold between MCS2 and the next code in the UL GMSK Only Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255]

Value range :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

514

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation Tables) DP V15

ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter allows to set the threshold between MCS3 and the next code in the UL GMSK Only Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS3 in the Link Adaptation Tables) DP V15

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

ulMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS2 and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation Tables) DP V15

ulMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS3 and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS3 in the Link Adaptation Tables) DP V15

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

515

ulMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS5 and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS5 in the Link Adaptation Tables) DP V15

ulMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS6 and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS6 in the Link Adaptation Tables) DP V15

ulMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS7 and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS7 in the Link Adaptation Tables) DP V15

ulMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS8 and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table. [0 to 255] bts EDGE link adaptation (20219) 0 (disabled MCS8 in the Link Adaptation Tables)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

516

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DP V15

UMTS access min level Class 3


Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : A minimum threshold for Ec/No for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection (3GPP reference: FDD_Qmin). V15: [-20 / -19 / -18 / -17 / -16 / - 15 / -14 / -13] dB V16: [-20 / -18 / -16 / -14 / -12 / -10 / -8 / -6] dB bts V15: -20 dB V16: -12 dB DP V14

UMTS reselection ARFCN Class 3


Description : Neighboring UMTS cell ARFCN. Although no control is performed on the value, it shall be indicated on the OMC-R display as a comment that a UTRAN ARFCN FDD is from 10562 to 10838 (3GPP reference: FDD_Qmin). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [0 to 16383] bts 0 DP V14

UMTS reselection offset Class 3


Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Applies an offset to RLA_C for cell re-selection to access technology / mode FDD (3GPP reference: FDD_Qmin). [infinity / -28 / -24 / -20 / -16 / -12 / -8 / -4 / 0 / 4 / 8 / 12 / 16 / 20 / 24 / 28] dB bts infinity dB DP V14

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

517

UMTS search min level Class 3


Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Search for 3G cell if signal level is below or above the threshold (3GPP reference: Qsearch_I). [<-98 / <-94 / <-90 / <-86 / <-82 / <-78 / <-74 / Always / >-78 / > -74 / >-70 / >-66 / >-62 / >-58 / >-54 / Never] dB bts <-98 dB DP V14

unequippedCircuit Class 1
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : Release : Whether the UNEQUIPPED CIRCUIT messages are used (Phase II compliance). [false / true] signallingPoint Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 V12) False DP

[C/M]:

The only accepted value is "false" in V10 and V11.

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute in V10 and V11, changing it has no meaning. V8

unit
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : The name that identifies the unit. String [1 to 2 characters] transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardware transcoder 3G DD This parameter is applicable for TCU3G only.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

518

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

unknownNCellWarning Class 3
Description : Whether feedback of measurements performed by mobiles on neighbor cells that are unknown to the BSC is allowed. When feedback of measurements is enabled, notifications with codano 1260 are generated. These notifications indicate that measurements are performed on cells which use the same BCCH as a neighbor cell of the serving cell but have different BSICs. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : [enabled / disabled] bts disabled DP

unmasked users alarms Class 2


Description : Configuration of the user (unprotected) external alarm loops controlled by the BTS. When an alarm is unmasked, it means the relevant equipment is monitored by the BTS. There are 6 user alarms per cabinet.

on the S8000 Outdoor (up to 18 user alarms = 3 cabinets * 6 user alarms per cabinet). on the S8002 BTS (up to 6 user alarms = 1 cabinet * 6 user alarms)

A user alarm is used when an external equipment is inserted in the BTS (for instance a microwave terminal) and does not require a new DLU. Value range : [All masked, Base 1, Base 1 to 2, Base 1 to 3, Base 1 to 4, Base 1 to 5, Base 1 to 6, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 2, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 3, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 4, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 5, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 2, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 4, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 6] For instance:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

519


Object : Type : Release :

Base 1: the first user alarm in the Base cabinet is unmasked Base 1 to 2: the first and second user alarm in the Base cabinet are unmasked Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1: The 6 user alarms in the Base cabinet and the first one in the Extension cabinet 0 are unmasked

btsSiteManager DP V9

upAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime)


Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : DP V12 Defines the DL TBF pre-establishment timer. [1 to 64] steps 100 ms for uplink transfer transceiver GPRS (SV407 - V12 and TF1220 - V12.4c)

upgradeStatus
Description : Stands whether an upgrade is complete, or is whether or not it is still in progress. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are notified to the manager. Value range : [notInProgress / inProgress / performed / toBeUpgraded / aborted; duplicateInProgress; frozen; failed; flashUpdated; Unknown] transcoder, atmRm, cc, cem, controlNode, iem, iom, interfaceNode, omu, tmu, trm, hardware transcoder 3G, sw8kRm, btsSiteManager, transceiverEquipment AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

Object :

Feature : Type : Release :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

520

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

uplinkMappingChannelNumber Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Channel number used for uplink mapping as the monitored TS. [1 to 7] bts Uplink mapping (TF876 - V12) 7 DP

[C/M]:

The attribute must contain an even value in case of an extended cell (2, 4, 6). In case of a multi CCCH cell it must contain an odd value (1, 3, 5, 7).

Release :

V12

uplinkMappingFreq Class 2
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Release : The frequency (f0) used for uplink mapping. [0 to 1023] bts 0 Uplink mapping (TF876 - V12) DP V12

uplinkMappingMeasurementMode Class 2
Description : This attribute is relevant from V11 BTS. This attribute indicates if the uplink mapping is active (TRUE) or inactive (FALSE) on the BTS. Once active BTS sends collected data to BSC. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : [disabled/enabled] bts disabled DP V12

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

521

uplinkMappingProcessingMode Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Whether or not uplink mapping is active on the BSC. [disabled / enabled] bsc Uplink mapping (TF876 - V12) disabled DP V12

uplinkPowerControl Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Whether power control in the MS-to-BTS direction is authorized at cell level. [enabled / disabled] powerControl enabled DP V8

uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Reserved for future use. [enabled / disabled] bsc disabled DP V16

uplinkReply Class 3
Description : Defines the use of the uplink-reply procedure, which applies to VBS and VGCS calls for radio resources optimization. [0 to 2] with:

Value range :

0: Disabled (recommended value for non-GSM-R customers) 1: Enabled on all group calls (recommended value for GSM-R customers) 2: Enabled on all group calls except on emergency group calls (optional value for GSM-R customers)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

522

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release :

bsc ASCI 0 DP GSM-R V15

uplinkReplyTimer Class 3
Description : Value range : Timer value of the uplink-reply procedure. [0 to 65535] seconds, with:


Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : bts

0: the feature is not allowed 6: recommended minimum value 120: recommended value

ASCI 120 DP GSM-R V15

uRxLevDLP Class 3
Description : Upper strength threshold for BTS txpwr decrease for step by step algorithm. It is greater than lRxLevDLP. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB powerControl -85 to -84 dB DP lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize uRxLevDLP uRxLevDLP - powerRedStepSize lRxLevDLP

[M]: [M]:

Note :

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard "step by step" power control algorithm.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

523

uRxLevULP Class 3
Description : Upper strength threshold for MS txpwr decrease for step by step algorithm. It is greater than lRxLevULP. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48] dB powerControl -85 to -84 dB DP lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize uRxLevULP uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSize lRxLevULP

[M]: [M]:

Note :

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard "step by step" power control algorithm.

uRxQualDLP Class 3
Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce BTS txpwr for step by step algorithm. It is lower than or equal to lRxQualDLP. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % powerControl 0.2 to 0.4 DP uRxQualDLP lRxQualDLP

[M]:

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard "step by step" power control algorithm.

uRxQualULP Class 3
Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce MS txpwr for step by step algorithm. It is lower than or equal to lRxQualULP. Value range : Object : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % powerControl

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

524

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

0.2 to 0.4 DP uRxQualULP lRxQualULP

[M]:

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard "step by step" power control algorithm.

usageState
Description : Activity state of the Call path tracing function in the BSC. Refer to the endSessionCriteriaType entry in the Dictionary and the operationalState entry related to the callPathTrace object which describes the possible state parameter combinations for this type of object. Value range : [idle / busy ]


Object : Type :

idle ............. busy .............

The PCM time slot that conveys the terrestrial circuit is traffic-free. The PCM time slot conveys the terrestrial circuit is working and carrying traffic.

callPathTrace DP

usageState
Description : ISO state Refer to the operationalState entry related to the xtp object which describes the possible state parameter combinations for this type of object. Value range : [idle / busy / active]


Object : Type : xtp DD

idle ............. busy .............

The PCM time slot that conveys the terrestrial circuit is traffic-free. The PCM time slot conveys the terrestrial circuit is working and carrying traffic. The PCM time slot that conveys the terrestrial circuit is active.

active ...........

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

525

use default list


Description : Value range : Object : Type : Release : Whether the default counter list has to be used. [yes] bscCounterList DP V11

user name
Description : Name of an OMC-R user as defined in the users profile (default is the logged-in users name). Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Note : [case sensitive] System session log - Filter DP

[A]:

The related user profile object is created on the OMC-R.

Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

user profile
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier (name) of an OMC-R user. [case sensitive, 2 characters min] user profile DP

[C]: [M/D]:

The name of a user is one-of-a-kind to the OMC-R. The user profile object is created.

username
Description : Value range : Type : Name of the OMC-R user, as defined in the users profile, who created the job. [case sensitive] DD

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

526

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Object : Note :

job Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

username
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Name of the OMC-R user, as defined in the users profile, who created the associated job. [case sensitive] jobResult DD Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

usfGranularity Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : The type of granularity supported by PCU when dynamic allocation is available. [0] bts EDGE dynamic allocation (20230) 0 (granularity 1) DP V15

V
version Class 2
Description : Version number of the remote transcoder TCBs. Version 1 TCB software only manages the FR (Full Rate) service. Version 2 TCB software manages both FR and EFR (Enhanced Full Rate) services. The following apply:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

527


Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

All TCBs in a given TCU are the same version. All TCUs in a BSS must be equipped with Version 2 TCBs for the EFR service to be provided.

[TCB_1 / TCB_2] transcoder TCB_2 DP

[M]:

The attribute value is "TCB_2" if the speechMode attribute of the dependent transcoderBoard objects contains "enhanced full rate".

Release :

V8

voiceBroadcastService Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Authorize Voice Broadcast Service. [enabled / disabled] signallingPoint (GSM-R V12) disabled DP V12

voiceGroupCallService Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Release : Authorize Voice Group Call Service. [enabled / disabled] signallingPoint (GSM-R V12) disabled DP V12

vSWR meter Class 2


Description : Value range : Object : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "voltage stationary wave rate meter" in S8000 Indoor or Outdoor. [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

528

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Type : Release :

DP V9

W
workstation name
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Note : Name of a workstation as defined in its profile (default is the logged-in users workstation). [case sensitive] omc - Display workstation markers DP

[A]:

The terminal profile object describing the workstation is created on the OMC-R.

Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters are prohibited.

wPSManagement Class 3
Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Release : WPS feature is enabled or disabled. [disabled 0 ; enabled 1] bsc WPS queuing managment (22463) Disabled DP

[A]:

The terminal profile object describing the workstation is created on the OMC-R.

V15

wPSQueueStepRotation Class 3
Description : One out of the WPSQueueStepRotation value to first have an evaluation of the WPS queues in the radio resource allocator. [1 to 10] bts WPS public access bandwidth protection (22465) 4 DP

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type :

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

529

Checks : Release :

[A]:

The terminal profile object describing the workstation is created on the OMC-R.

V15

X
X25 port 0 operational
Description : Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 0. ISO operational state (enabled/disabled). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : [enabled / disabled] omu AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

X25 port 1 operational


Description : Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 1. ISO operational state (enabled/ disabled). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000. Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Release : [enabled / disabled] omu AR 1209 - V13.1 DD V13

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

530

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

xSCBConfiguration Class 0
Description : Number of TSCBs and BSCBs concentrating LAPD signaling in the BSC. The TSCBs are used for TCU signaling on the Ater interface. The BSCBs are used for BTS signaling on the Abis interface. A BSC which manages BTS LAPD signaling concentration can control up to 138 radio sites with redundancy, or 147 radio sites without redundancy. When a BSC does not manage BTS LAPD signaling concentration, the number of radio sites it controls is limited to the number of SICD ports available, minus 1 (which is reserved for TCU LAPD signaling), that is 39 sites. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Release : Note : [2 to 14] bsc 2 DP V8 This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

xSCBNumber
Description : Number of the TSCB that concentrates TCU LAPD signaling in the BSC This dynamic attribute is managed by the BSC. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [0 to 13] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

xSCBUse
Description : State and assignment of the BSC TSCBs and BSCBs. This dynamic attribute indicates, for each TSCB and BSCB housed in the BSC, its operational state and the list of the LAPD links it concentrates. Value range : Object : [working / fault] bsc

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

531

Type : Release :

DD V8

xtp
Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of an xtp object (eXchange Termination Point) defined with regard to a bsc object. [0 to 2147483646] xtp Id

[C]:

The number of terrestrial circuits linked to a BSC 12000HC is limited to 1288 if PCM E1 links are used and to 1440 if PCM T1 links are used. The software object related to the bsc object is created. The referenced pcmCircuit object (pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interface and depends on the same transcoder object (transcoderId) as the xtp object. The time slot used by the xtp object (timeSlotNumber) is identical to the mscPcmTsNumber component of the cic attribute. The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitId and timeSlotNumber) is not already assigned to an xtp or signallingLink object dependent on the same transcoder object, and the time slot is not mapped on the TS used by the OMC channel on the Ater interface. If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3 (pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary). If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the xtp object is locked.

Checks :

[C]: [C/M]:

[C]:

[C/M]:

[C/M]:

[C]: [D]:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

532

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order


Restrictions :

[D]:

If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No traceControl or callPathTrace object refers to the xtp object (the Call tracing and Call path tracing functions do not monitor that object). The cic and timeSlotNumber attributes of an xtp object cannot be modified.

[D]:

[M]:

Z
zI bss
Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest. Enter "all" to include all the BSCs created on the OMC-R. If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fill in the list as follows:

The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list. The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs from the list.

A BSS terminal zone of interest allows users to filter the unsolicited messages (output domain) that can be output on the terminal outside users work sessions according to the BSS entities that send them. Object : Type : Note : terminal profile DP The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet. When it is created, this BSC will be handle as the other BSCs already created.

zI bss
Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest. Enter "all" to include all the BSCs created on the OMC-R. If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fill in the list as follows:

The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list. The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs from the list.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

533

A BSS users zone of interest defines the BSS entities the user is entitled to work on. It allows to filter both the MMI commands they can enter (command domain) according to the objects managed by these commands and the unsolicited messages (output domain) they have access to according to the BSS entities that send them. Object : Type : Note : user profile DP The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet. When it is created, this BSC will be handle as the other BSCs already created.

zone frequency hopping Class 2


Description : Whether frequency hopping is authorized in the zone. If frequency hopping is not allowed in a zone, the channel objects that describe the radio time slots of the TDMA frames used in the zone cannot be allowed to hop. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Release : Note : [hopping / not hopping] transceiverZone not hopping DP

V9

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objects that describe concentric cells.

zone frequency threshold Class 2


Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Minimum number of frequencies needed to allow frequency reconfiguration in the zone. [1 to 64] transceiverZone 1 DP

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

534

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Release : Note :

V9 The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objects that describe concentric cells.

zone Tx power max reduction Class 2


Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Attenuation vs bsTxPowerMax that defines the maximum TRX/DRX transmission power in the zone. [0 to 55] dB transceiverZone 0 DP

[C/M]:

zone Tx power max reduction equals zero if the transceiverZone object describes the cell outer zone. It is greater than zero if the transceiverZone object describes the cell inner zone. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

Release : Note : V9

[M]:

The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objects that describe concentric cells.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

535

Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution


This appendix categorizes new configuration parameters and objects by release.

A.1 New V16 parameters


Parameter aterLapd bckgDLLayer3WindowSize channelReleaseonAbisFailure eGPRSlrUlActivation enableRepeatedFacchFr facchPowerOffset frPowerControlTargetModeDl hrPowerControlTargetModeDl interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain monitoredObjectClass nACCActivation packetFlowContext packetSiStatus pcuCellState pfcActivation pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection lsaRc bsc bts bts bts bts PowerControl PowerControl bts bsc transceiver mdWarning bts powerControl bts pcu bts powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl Object

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

536

Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution

Parameter pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection pfcFlowControlActivation pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitR ate pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold pfcPreemptionRatioGold pfcPreemptionRatioSilver pfcRtDowngradeAllowed pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold pfcT6 pfcT8 pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl privilegedCell sacchPowerOffset sacchPowerOffsetSelection sigPowerOverboost tcu2gGroup trmArchipelagoCalls uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA

Object powerControl powerControl bts transceiver transceiver powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl bts bts bts bts tcu2g trm bsc

A.2 New V15 parameters


Parameter allocPriorityTable allocPriorityTimers amrUlHrAdaptationSet amrDlHrAdaptationSet amrUlFrAdaptationSet amrDlFrAdaptationSet available synchronization sources bts bts bts bts bts bts bts Object

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

A.2 New V15 parameters

537

Parameter beacBatteryRemoteController Presence batteryRemoteControllerPres ence bEPPeriod bscHighSwitchingCapacity bssSccpConnEst bssSccpInactRx bssSccpInactTx bssSccpRelease bssSccpSubSysTest btsSMSynchroMode callDropActivation concentricCell cpueNumber css7LocalSubSystemNumber css7RemoteSubSystemNumb er current synchronization mode dARPPh1Priority degradedCause degradedCause delivery distributionActivation distributionDuration distributionQualityThreshold distributionTime dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold dlMCS2UpperThreshold dlMCS3UpperThreshold dlMCS5UpperThreshold dlMCS6UpperThreshold dlMCS7UpperThreshold dlMCS8UpperThreshold btsSiteManager btsSiteManager bts bsc

Object

signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet btsSiteManager bts bts btsSiteManager signallingLinkSet signallingLinkSet bts transceiver bts transceiver bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

538

Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution

Parameter edgeDataServiceType edgeFavor eDGEMixity egprsServices emergencyThreshold agpsTimer estimatedSiteLoad extUtbfNoData fERThreshold1 fERThreshold2 fERThreshold3 fERThreshold4 filteredTrafficCoefficient floor fnOffset fullDlKa gprsNetworkModeOperation gprsState gprsState initialMCSDL initialMCSUL jokerPerMainTarget mainNetworkBand masterBtsSMId msPowerClassToggle nbLargeReuseDataChannels numberOfJokerDS0 nUsfExt nwExtUtbf onePhaseAccess onePhaseDnMsCapability onlyExtUtbf reportTypeMeas rLCPolling transceiver transceiver bts bts signallingPoint bsc btsSiteManager bts bts bts bts bts bts bts btsSiteManager bts bts bts transceiver transceiver transceiver transceiver bsc btsSiteManager bts bts transceiver bts bts bts bts bts bts bts

Object

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

A.3 New V14 parameters

539

Parameter sGSNRelease securedLoopActivation standardIndicator suspendResumeActivation systemInfoType2 tGMMKeepAlive timerGcchNotif tnOffset tNwExtUtbf tResumeAck tSuspendAck tUsfExt ulBepPeriod ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold ulMCS2UpperThreshold ulMCS3UpperThreshold ulMCS5UpperThreshold ulMCS6UpperThreshold ulMCS7UpperThreshold ulMCS8UpperThreshold uplinkReply uplinkReplyTimer usfGranularity wPSManagement wPSQueueStepRotation bts btsSiteManager bts bsc bts bts signallingPoint btsSiteManager bts bsc bsc bts transceiver bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bsc bts bts bsc bts

Object

A.3 New V14 parameters


Parameter peakThroughputLimitation upQoSCriterion dwQoSCriterion minThroughputGold minThroughputSilver powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl Object

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

540

Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution

Parameter minThroughputBronze preemptionRatioGold preemptionRatioSilver voicePreemptionGold voicePreemptionSilver voicePreemptionBronze admissionCtrlGold admissionCtrlSilver admissionCtrlBronze frPowerControlTargetMode hrPowerControlTargetMode powerIncrStepSizeDL powerIncrStepSizeUL powerRedStepSizeDL powerRedStepSizeUL gsmToUmtsReselection uMTSSearchLevel uMTSReselectionOffset uMTSAccessMinLevel uMTSReselectionARFCN amrAdaptationSet hrCellLoadEnd hrCellLoadStart selfAdaptActivation hrAmrPriority nbOfFramesForFER rxLevRxQualDistributionActiv ation rxQualThresholdDistribution transparentTeiAttrib2 amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL amrDirectAllocIntRxLevUL amrDirectAllocRxLevDL amrDirectAllocRxLevUL powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts transceiver bts bts bts bts handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl

Object

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

A.3 New V14 parameters

541

Parameter amrFRIntracellCodec amrHRIntercellCodec amrHRToFRIntraCodec amrReserved1 amrReserved2 amriRxLevDLH amriRxLevULH capacityTimeRejection enhCellTieringConfiguration nCapacityFRRequestedCodec offsetNeighbouringCell nFRRequestedCodec nHRRequestedCodec pRequestedCodec minTimeQualityIntraCellHO rxQualAveBeg servingFactorOffset adjacentCellReselectionId adjacentCellHandOverId hoMarginAMR bscCapacityReduction frAmrPriority lcsType sIkAssociatedTmuPortPosition sIkATerResource transparentSiteAttrib2 dynamicAgprsAllowed cCCHGprsAtBtsLevel agprsFilterCoefficient t3168 t3192 flowControlMaxDelay handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl

Object

adjacentCellReselection adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver bsc, signallingPoint transceiver bsc signallingLink signallingLink btsSiteManager pcu bts bts bts bts pcusn

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

542

Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

543

Appendix B Parameters per feature


This appendix presents BSS parameters per feature.

B.1 AMR based on trafc filteredTrafficCoefficient (bts) B.2 AMR Optimizations amrDlFrAdaptationSet (bts) amrDlHrAdaptationSet (bts) amrUlFrAdaptationSet (bts) amrUlHrAdaptationSet (bts) B.3 BSC/TCU 3000 administrativeState (atmRm, cc, cem, controlNode, hardware bsc
3G, hardware transcoder 3G, iem, interfaceNode, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm, )

operationalState (atmRm, cc, cem, controlNode, hardware bsc 3G, hardware transcoder 3G, iem, interfaceNode, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm, ) cTU cable (iem) hsaPcmList (hsaRcTcu, iom) hsaRc Reference (iom) interOmuEtherlinkOper (controlNode) lsaPcmList (iem, lsaRc) lsaRc Reference (iem)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

544

Appendix B Parameters per feature

mmsUsage (mms) numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts (iem, tmu) port Ethernet operational (omu) port Ethernet status (omu) port 0 X25 status (omu) port 1 X25 status (omu) positionInShelf (atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm)

B.4 BSC 3000 cell group management/load balancing associatedTMUPosition (btsSiteManager, signallingLinkSet,
transcoder, pcu)

B.5 BSC 3000 switching increase capacity bscHighSwitchingCapacity (bsc) B.6 BSC overload management processorLoadSupConf (bsc) B.7 Dualband cell management biZonePowerOffset (adjacentCellHandOver) biZonePowerOffset (handOverControl) concentric cell (bts) msTxPwrMax2ndBand (bts) standard indicator AdjC (adjacentCellHandover) standard indicator AdjC (adjacentCellReselection) standardIndicator (bts) B.8 EDGE dynamic allocation eDGEMixity (bts) usfGranularity (bts)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

B.11 GSM-R V12

545

B.9 EDGE trafc management bEPPeriod (bts) edgeFavor (transceiver) egprsServices (bts) initialMCSDL (transceiver) initialMCSUL (transceiver) jokerPerMainTarget (transceiver) sGSNRelease (bts) B.10 EDGE link adaptation dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold (bts) dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold (bts) dlMCS2UpperThreshold (bts) dlMCS3UpperThreshold (bts) dlMCS5UpperThreshold (bts) dlMCS6UpperThreshold (bts) dlMCS7UpperThreshold (bts) dlMCS8UpperThreshold (bts) ulBepPeriod (transceiver) ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold (bts) ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold (bts) ulMCS2UpperThreshold (bts) ulMCS3UpperThreshold (bts) ulMCS5UpperThreshold (bts) ulMCS6UpperThreshold (bts) ulMCS7UpperThreshold (bts) ulMCS8UpperThreshold (bts) B.11 GSM-R V12 additional supervised PCM 0 (btsSiteManager) additional supervised PCM 1 (btsSiteManager)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

546

Appendix B Parameters per feature

additional supervised PCM 2 (btsSiteManager) additional supervised PCM 3 (btsSiteManager) additional supervised PCM 4 (btsSiteManager) additional supervised PCM 5 (btsSiteManager) additional unmasked users alarms (btsSiteManager) eMLPPThreshold (signallingPoint) nCHPosition (bts) preemptionAuthor (signallingPoint) preemptionConfiguration (signallingPoint) voiceBroadcastService (signallingPoint) voiceGroupCallService (signallingPoint)

B.12 GSM-R V15 emergencyThreshold (signallingPoint) msPowerClassToggle (bts) timerGcchNotif (signallingPoint) uplinkReply (bsc) uplinkReplyTimer (bts) B.13 GPRS (SV407 - V12) administrativeState (pcu) associatedInterface (lapdLink) availabilityStatus (pcu) availabilityStatus (pcusn) bscGprsActivation (bsc) bscRefList (pcusn) bsCvMax (bts) btsSensitivity (bts) btsSensitivityInnerZone (bts) channelType (channel) codingScheme (transceiver)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

B.13 GPRS (SV407 - V12)

547

drxTimerMax (bts) dwAckTime (transceiver) geographical coordinates (pcusn) gprsCellActivation (bts) gprsPermittedAccess (bts) gprsTimerWaitPUAM (bts) gprsTimerWaitRLC (bts) lapdConcentration (lapdLink) lapdTerminalNumber (lapdLink) longTbfLossThroughput (bts) longTbfSizeThreshold (bts) maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone (bts) maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold (bts) maxDnTbfPerTs (bts) maxDwAssign (bts) maxNbrPDAAssig (transceiver) maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange (transceiver) maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock (transceiver) maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold (bts) maxUpTbfPerTs (bts) msCapWeightActive (bts) muxNumber (pcusn) n3103 (bts) n3105max (transceiver) nAvgl (bts) nAvgT (bts) nAvgW (bts) nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation (bts) nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation (bts) nbrTch (pcu) operationalState (pcu) operationalState (pcusn)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

548

Appendix B Parameters per feature

panDec (bts) panInc (bts) panMax (bts) pcmCircuit (pcmCircuit) pcmNbr (pcu) pcmType (pcmCircuit) pcu (pcu) pcuLapdEqptRefList (pcu) pcusn (pcusn) routingArea (bts) speechOnHoppingTs (bts) t3172 (bts) upAckTime (transceiver)

B.14 GPRS (TF1134 - NMO I) gprsNetworkModeOperation (bts) B.15 GPRS (TF1121 - V12) gprsPreemption (bts) gprsPreemptionProtection (bts) gprsPriority (transceiver) minNbrGprsTs (bts) radioAllocator (bts) B.16 GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access onePhaseAccess (bts) onePhaseDnMsCapability (bts)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

B.21 Automatic Cell Tiering

549

B.17 GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume suspendResumeActivation (bsc) tResumeAck (bsc) tSuspendAck (bsc) B.18 PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC bscPcuPcmRefList (pcu) gprsPcuCrossConnectList B.19 Network Synchronization btsSMSynchroMode (btsSiteManager) dARPPh1Priority (transceiver) fnOffset (btsSiteManager) tnOffset (btsSiteManager) B.20 BTS Synchronization available synchronization sources current synchronization mode masterBtsSMId (btsSiteManager) B.21 Automatic Cell Tiering btsReserved3 (bts) hoMarginTiering (handOverControl) interferenceType (adjacentCellHandOver) intraCell (handOverControl) numberOfPwciSamples (handOverControl) selfTuningObs (handOverControl)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

550

Appendix B Parameters per feature

B.22 Handover for trafc reasons hoMarginTrafficOffset (adjacentCellHandOver) hoTraffic (bsc) hoTraffic (bts) B.23 Handover decision (adjacent cell priority and load) offsetLoad (adjacentCellHandOver) offsetPriority (adjacentCellHandOver) B.24 General protection against pingpong handover bts time between HO configuration (bts) directedRetryPrio (bts) hoPingpongCombination (adjacentCellHandOver) hoPingpongTimeRejection (adjacentCellHandOver) timeBetweenHOConfiguration (bsc) B.25 Intracell handover enhancements lRxQualDLH (handOverControl) lRxQualULH (handOverControl) B.26 AR 264
cellReselectOffset (bts) penaltyTime (bts) temporaryOffset (bts)

B.27 Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs btsWithCavity (bts) B.28 Call drop analysis callDropActivation (bts)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

B.34 L1M evolutions for advanced features support

551

B.29 Extended CCCH channelType (channel) B.30 CPU/BIFP load sharing cpueNumber (btsSiteManager) B.31 Distribution on Radio measurements distributionActivation (bts) distributionDuration (bts) distributionTime (bts) distributionQualityThreshold (bts) fERThreshold1 (bts) fERThreshold2 (bts) fERThreshold3 (bts) fERThreshold4 (bts) nbOfFramesForFER (bts) B.32 Extended UL TBF extUtbfNoData (bts) fullDlKa (bts) nUsfExt (bts) nwExtUtbf (bts) onlyExtUtbf (bts) tNwExtUtbf (bts) tUsfExt (bts) B.33 Broadcast of PSI 13 maxRACH (bts) B.34 L1M evolutions for advanced features support measurementProcAlgorithm (bts)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

552

Appendix B Parameters per feature

B.35 Fast power control at TCH assignment new power control algorithm (bts) B.36 Data Backhaul Evolution numberOfJokerDS0 (transceiver) B.37 Disabling TBF Keep Alive tGMMKeepAlive (bts) B.38 PCM error correction enhancedTRAUFrameIndication (bsc) pcmErrorCorrection (bts) B.39 Unequipped circuit and circuit group block circuitGroupBlock (signallingPoint) unequippedCircuit (signallingPoint) B.40 Uplink mapping rxLevULIH (handOverControl) uplinkMappingChannelNumber (bts) uplinkMappingFreq (bts) uplinkMappingProcessingMode (bsc) B.41 WPS public access bandwidth protection wPSQueueStepRotation (bts) B.42 WPS queuing management allocPriorityTable (bts) allocPriorityTimers (bts) allocWaitThreshold (bts)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

B.45 BSS Packet Flow Context

553

B.43 BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement aterLapd (lsaRc) trmArchipelagoCalls (trm) B.44 Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS nAccActivation (bts) packetSiStatus (bts) B.45 BSS Packet Flow Context packetFlowContext (powerControl) pfcActivation (bts) pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection (powerControl) pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection (powerControl) pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection (powerControl) pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection (powerControl) pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection (powerControl) pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection (powerControl) pfcFlowControlActivation (bts) pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs (transceiver) pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate (transceiver) pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold (powerControl) pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold (powerControl) pfcPreemptionRatioGold (powerControl) pfcPreemptionRatioSilver (powerControl) pfcRtDowngradeAllowed (powerControl) pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold (powerControl) pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold (powerControl) pfcT6 (powerControl) pfcT8 (powerControl) pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl (powerControl) pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl (powerControl)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

554

Appendix B Parameters per feature

B.46 BSC 3000 support of BTS background downloading bckgDLLayer3WindowSize (bsc) B.47 Optimized Agprs cell allocation privilegedCell (bsc) B.48 EDGE Dynamic Agprs dynamicAgprsAllowed (pcu) minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain (transceiver) B.49 Switch Interference Matrix interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc B.50 Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure channelReleaseOnAbisFailure B.51 PM1270 - TDMA based counters monitoredObjectClass B.52 Tx power offset for signalling channels facchPowerOffset sacchPowerOffsetSelection sacchPowerOffset hrPowerControlTargetModeDl frPowerControlTargetModeDl sigPowerOverboost B.53 Tx power overboost for signaling channels enableRepeatedFacchFr
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

B.56 Smart Power Management

555

B.54 U-TDOA support on the BSS uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA (bsc) B.56 Smart Power Management smartPowerManagementConfig smartPowerSwitchOffTimer

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

556

Appendix B Parameters per feature

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

557

Appendix C PCUSN components


The PCUSN components are described in the following NTPs:

Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component PcGtl (241-5701-060_PcGtl) Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component Psusa (241-5701-060_Pcusa) Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component Psusn (241-5701-060_Pcusn)

For more information on the PCUSN components, refer to:

Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component Overview (241-5701-060)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

558

Appendix C PCUSN components

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference 411-9001-124 16.14 Standard 28 May 2008
Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference


Copyright 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved.

Release: 16.0 Publication: 411-9001-124 Document status: Standard Document revision: 16.14 Document release date: 28 May 2008

To provide feedback or to report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback. www.nortel.com Sourced in Canada, France, and the United States of America. LEGAL NOTICE While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice. Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, S2000, and S8000 are trademarks of Nortel Networks. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.